JP2016158655A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of accurately determining abnormal winning.SOLUTION: The game machine comprises: a winning area which a game medium can enter; winning area detection means which detects the entrance of the game medium into the winning area; game medium detection means which detects a game medium ejected from the game area; determination means which determines whether winning area detection information based on the detection of the game medium having entered the winning area by the winning area detection means and game medium detection information based on the detection of the game medium by the game medium detection means come into a predetermined relation; and notification means which, on the basis of the determination by the determination means that they come into the predetermined relation, gives notification that they come into the predetermined relation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 21

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols.

  Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a bonus (prize ball) is paid out to a player when a game ball enters a ball entrance provided in a game area (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In such gaming machines, fraudulent attempts to illegally enter gaming balls (hereinafter referred to as “abnormal winnings”) and to pay out excessive prize balls by cheating to increase the entrance rate to the entrance. Action is a problem.

  For this reason, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, as an illegal act to increase the entrance rate to the entrance, the game ball is illegally used using a magnet or the like so that the game ball enters the entrance. In order to prevent illegal acts such as guiding illegal acts and illegal acts that illegally bend game nails that adjust the rate at which game balls enter the entrance, in order to prevent these illegal acts, Provided with a ball detection means for detecting, is configured to count the number of balls entered into the entrance per predetermined time, and when the number of balls entered counts a prescribed number, it is determined as an abnormal winning, and an abnormality notification is executed. Yes.

JP 2010-264070 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a string is attached to a fraudulent act or game ball that causes the ball detection means to recognize that the game ball has entered by using radio waves without actually firing the game ball. In addition, if an illegal act is performed so that the number of entered balls per predetermined time does not become a specified ball using an illegal act that causes the incoming ball detection means to recognize that a game ball has entered, it is determined as an abnormal prize. There was a problem that I could not.

  In view of the above background, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately determining an abnormal winning.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention detects a winning area in which the gaming medium can be won and that the gaming medium has won in the winning area in a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by firing the gaming medium in the gaming area. Winning area detection means, gaming medium detection means for detecting gaming media ejected from the gaming area, winning area detection information based on detection of gaming media in the winning area by the winning area detection means, and the gaming medium A determination unit that determines whether or not the game medium detection information based on the detection of the game medium by the detection unit has a predetermined relationship; and the determination unit that determines that the predetermined relationship has been determined. And notifying means for notifying that the predetermined relationship has been established.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to accurately determine an abnormal winning.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a partial perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electric constitution of a game machine. It is a block diagram of the game system of a gaming machine and a server via the Internet. It is a sequence diagram of a game system. (A-1) is a figure showing a 1st jackpot determination table, (a-2) is a figure showing a 2nd jackpot determination table, (b) is a figure showing a reach determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for winning a big win, (b) is a diagram showing a special symbol determining table for winning a small winner, (c) is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for lose. (A) is a figure showing a big hit game control table, (b) is a figure showing a small hit game control table. (A) is a figure showing a big winning opening / closing control table for the first big win game (first long game), and (b) is a big winning opening / closing control table for the second big game (second long game). (C) is a big winning opening / closing control table for the sixth big hit game (short win game). (A) is a figure showing a big winning opening / closing control table for the third big hit game (game per third long), (b) is a big winning opening / closing control table for the fourth big win game (game per fourth long). (C) is a big winning opening / closing control table for the fifth big hit game (the fifth long hit game). It is a figure showing the big winning opening / closing control table for small hit games. (A) is a figure showing a game condition data determination table, (b) is a figure showing a game condition determination table. It is a figure showing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in a non-time-short game state. It is a figure showing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in a time-short game state. (A) is a diagram representing a normal symbol hit determination table, (b) is a diagram representing a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a regular variation pattern determination table, (d) is an auxiliary game reference data determination table. FIG. 5E is a diagram illustrating a second start port opening / closing control table. (A) is a diagram showing an abnormal winning determination table in a non-short-time gaming state, (b) is a diagram showing an abnormal winning determination table in a short-time gaming state, (c) is a diagram showing an abnormal winning determination table in a long win game is there. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the special symbol reserve storage area of the main RAM 101c, (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol reserve storage area, (c) is a diagram of the normal symbol reserve storage area of the main RAM 101c The figure showing a structure is a figure showing the structure of each memory | storage part of a normal symbol holding | maintenance storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the general winning opening detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big winning opening detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big winning opening detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting port detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows to the middle of the 2nd start port detection signal input process in a main control board. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the second start port detection signal input process of FIG. 25. It is a flowchart which shows the winning gate detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows to the middle of the out sphere detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the out sphere detection signal input process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the magnetic detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the vibration detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game end process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the common figure normal power control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol memory | storage determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the auxiliary | assistant game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the data creation process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the output control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of a security signal output when detection of any abnormal winning, magnetic detection abnormality, vibration detection abnormality, or RAM clear is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the electric power interruption interrupt process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows to the middle of the command analysis process in an effect control board. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the command analysis processing of FIG. 54. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the command analysis processing of FIG. 55. (A) is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting effect start process in an effect control board, (b) is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting effect end process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect symbol stop display pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production end process in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode setting process in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special game effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the round effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows to the middle of the roulette effect determination process in an effect control board. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the roulette effect determination process of FIG. 64. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-reading effect mode execution determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the long open effect determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the launch notification process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the dish full tank abnormality notification process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows to the middle of the out ball process in an effect control board. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the out ball processing of FIG. 70. FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the out ball processing of FIG. 71. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game privilege control process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows until the middle of the special effect control process in an effect control board. 75 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the special effect control process of FIG. 74. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting effect control process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the long open effect control process in an effect control board. (A) is a figure showing the structure of the production | presentation information storage area | region of sub RAM102c, (b) is a figure showing the structure of each memory | storage part of an production | presentation information storage area. It is a figure showing an example of the variation production pattern determination table in the production mode A. It is a figure showing an example of the variation production pattern determination table in the production mode A. It is a figure showing an example of the special effect design stop display pattern determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a production mode determination table. (A) is a figure showing an example of a special game effect pattern determination table, (b) is a figure showing an example of a specific special game effect pattern determination table, (c) is a figure showing an example of a round effect pattern determination table. is there. (A) is a figure showing an example of the roulette effect determination table for long hits, (b) is a figure showing an example of the roulette effect determination table for specific special figure results, (c) is an example of the roulette effect determination table for prefetch effect mode. FIG. (A) is a figure showing an example of the roulette effect determination table for 2 wins, (b) is a figure showing an example of the roulette effect determination table for losers. It is a figure showing the prefetch effect mode execution determination table. (A)-(d) is a figure showing an example of the reel structure determination table for non privilege provision modes. It is a figure showing an example of the reel structure determination table for non privilege provision modes. (A)-(d) is a figure showing an example of the reel structure determination table for privilege provision modes. (A)-(b) is a figure showing an example of the reel structure determination table for privilege provision modes. (A) is a figure showing the relationship between the reel configuration in the non-privilege grant mode and the roulette effect type, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the reel configuration in the privilege grant mode and the roulette effect type. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a reel image. (A) is a figure showing an example of a roulette effect pattern determination table, (b) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the roulette effect pattern, the effect time of the roulette effect, and the effect start time, (c) is a normal map change display and each It is explanatory drawing showing the relationship with the roulette effect of a roulette effect pattern. It is a figure showing the special privilege game pattern determination table for long hits. It is a figure showing the special privilege game pattern determination table for specific special figure results and prefetch effect modes. It is a figure showing the special privilege game pattern determination table for 2 hits. It is a figure showing an example of a special game privilege determination table. (A) is a time chart of the roulette effect of the effect types other than the effect type 7, and (b) is a time chart of the roulette effect of the effect type 7. It is a figure showing the mode before a roulette effect starts. It is a figure showing an example of the change display of the specific effect design in a roulette effect. It is a figure showing the specific effect design which concerns on a roulette effect. It is a figure which shows the notification effect conditions and the notification effect content corresponding to the kind of notification effect. It is a figure showing the mode of the firing stop alerting effect during fluctuation display. It is a figure showing the mode of the discharge instruction | indication effect during a specific round. It is a figure showing the mode of the discharge instruction | indication effect during a specific round. It is a figure showing the mode of the discharge instruction | indication effect during long open. It is a figure showing the mode of the discharge instruction | indication effect during long open. It is a figure showing an example of each abnormality alerting effect when each abnormal winning occurs. It is a figure showing an example of each abnormality alerting effect when each abnormal winning occurs. It is a figure showing an example of a magnetic abnormality notification effect when a magnetic detection abnormality occurs. It is a figure showing an example of a vibration abnormality notification effect when vibration detection abnormality occurs. It is a figure showing an example of a dish full tank abnormality notification effect when a dish full tank abnormality generate | occur | produces. It is a figure showing an example of the right-handed emphasis alerting | reporting effect when left-handed in the right-handed gaming state. It is a figure showing an example of the left-handed notification effect when a right-handed is made during the left-handed gaming state. It is a figure showing the mode of special privilege provision mode. It is a figure showing the mode of special privilege provision mode. It is a figure showing the mode of special production. It is a figure showing the mode of a demonstration production | presentation, the setting of power-saving mode, and a re-seat production | presentation. (A) is a figure showing an example of the figure showing the structure (array) of the special effect design in the non-privilege grant mode, (b) is a figure showing an example of the figure showing the structure (array) of the special effect design in the privilege grant mode. It is. It is a figure showing an example of the change display of the special effect design in privilege grant mode. (A)-(g) is a figure showing an example of the stop display of the special decoration symbol showing grant of a game privilege, (h)-(j) is an example of the stop display of the special decoration symbol showing the result of a special symbol lottery. FIG.

(Embodiment 1)
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine Y is formed with a gaming board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the gaming board mounting frame Y1, and a gaming area 2A in which gaming balls flow down. And a game board 2.

  The game board mounting frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to the island facility of the game store, and is detachably mounted.

  The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame Y1 via a hinge mechanism portion H at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably about the hinge mechanism portion H as a fulcrum. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door around the hinge mechanism H as a fulcrum, the game area 2A and the front portion of the game board mounting frame Y1 can be opened and closed. The glass door Y2 covers the game area 2A in a state where the game board 2 is closed so as to be visible.

  A lock mechanism R that fixes the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided on the other end side of the glass door Y2. The fixing by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key. Further, the glass door Y2 is provided with a door opening detection sensor 87a for detecting whether or not the glass door Y2 is opened from the game board mounting frame Y1.

  The glass door Y2 flows into an upper tray 60 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls paid out from the payout device 5 described later, and an overflow ball path (not shown) without entering the upper tray 60. A receiving tray 61 for receiving and storing the game balls and a firing operation device 3 capable of performing an operation for firing the game balls are provided. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a game ball launch device (not shown) that can launch a game ball toward the game area 2A. The game ball launcher is provided on the front surface of the game board mounting frame Y1.

  Between the upper tray 60 and the lower tray 61, an overflow ball channel (not shown) for guiding game balls that cannot enter the upper tray 60 to the lower tray 61 is formed. Further, the overflow ball channel is provided with a tray full tank detection sensor 86a for detecting that the game ball is full in the lower tray 61, and the tray full tank detection sensor 86a detects that the bottom tray 61 is full. During this time, the payout of game balls by the payout device 5 described later is stopped.

  The firing operation device 3 includes a base that is fixed to the glass door Y2, and a launch handle 32 that is rotatably provided on the base. The game ball launcher launches a game ball with a strength (hereinafter referred to as “game ball launch strength”) according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32.

  In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, an inner rail member 29B having a curved shape, an outer rail member 29C, and a first grand prize winning port 8, which will be described later, are arranged. A guide member 29 </ b> D is provided on the top surface of which a guide path capable of guiding the sphere to the second starting port 7 is formed.

  The decorative frame 29 </ b> A is fitted into the approximate center of the game board 2. An image display device 14 including a liquid crystal display is fitted inside the decorative frame 29A. Further, effect accessory devices 200 to 203 are provided at the inner end of the decorative frame 29A.

  The inner rail member 29B is disposed outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is disposed outside the inner rail member 29B. A game ball fired with a predetermined game ball launch strength rises between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enters the game area 2A. In the game area 2A, a plurality of nails and windmills are provided. A game ball that has entered the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails and windmills.

In the game area 2A, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning awards 12 are provided. Each general winning opening 12 is provided with a general winning opening detecting sensor 12a. When the general winning opening detecting sensor 12a detects a gaming ball, a predetermined number (for example, ten) of gaming balls are paid out as winning balls. . In addition, a magnetic detection sensor 81a for detecting magnetism equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold is provided inside the game board 2 in the vicinity of the general winning opening 12.
The general winning opening detection sensor 12a corresponds to the winning area detecting means of the present invention.

  A first winning gate 10 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. In addition, a second winning gate 11 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. The first prize gate 10 and the second prize gate 11 are provided with a first prize gate detection sensor 10a and a second prize gate detection sensor 11a for detecting a game ball. A normal symbol lottery is performed on condition that the first winning gate detection sensor 10a and the second winning gate detection sensor 11a detect a game ball. The normal symbol lottery will be described later. In addition, a magnetic detection sensor 82a for detecting magnetism of a predetermined threshold value or more is provided inside the game board 2 in the vicinity of the second winning gate 11.

In the game area 2A, below the image display device 14 is provided a first start port 6 that is invariable and can always enter the ball. The first start port 6 is provided with a first start port detection sensor 6a for detecting a game ball. A first special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball. The first special symbol lottery will be described later. When the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Further, inside the game board 2 above the first start port 6, a magnetic detection sensor 83a for detecting magnetism above a predetermined threshold is provided.
The first start port detection sensor 6a corresponds to a winning area detection sensor of the present invention.

In the game area 2 </ b> A, a variable second start port 7 is provided immediately below the first start port 6. The second start port 7 is controlled by the second start port control device 70 to either a basic mode (closed mode) incapable of winning a prize or a special mode (open mode) of winning. The second start port 7 is also provided with a second start port detection sensor 7a for detecting a game ball. A second special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball. The second special symbol lottery will be described later. When the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball.
The second start port detection sensor 7a corresponds to a winning area detection sensor of the present invention.

  The second start port control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B as a drive unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

  The normal movable piece 70A is composed of a rectangular door member. Normally, the movable piece 70A stops in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and the second start port 7 is opened. It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70 </ b> A constitutes a basic mode of the second starting port 7.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the normal movable piece 70A is rotated forward about the rotation shaft formed at the lower end portion to open the second start port 7. The second start port 7 is controlled to a special mode that allows the ball to enter. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70 </ b> A constitutes a special mode of the second starting port 7. When the second starting port 7 is opened, the normal movable piece 70A protrudes from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the second starting port 7.

  Note that the predetermined condition for the second start-up port control device 70 is that the normal symbol lottery described above is determined as the winning normal symbol.

A variable first big prize opening 8 is provided on the downstream side of the second prize winning gate 11. The first big prize opening 8 is controlled by the first big prize opening control device 80 to either a basic mode in which a prize cannot be won or a special mode in which a prize can be won. The first big prize opening 8 is provided with a first big prize opening detection sensor 8a for detecting a game ball. When the first big prize opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. In addition, a magnetic detection sensor 84a for detecting magnetism of a predetermined threshold value or more is provided inside the game board 2 above the first grand prize winning opening 8. In addition, a vibration detection sensor 85a for detecting vibrations of a predetermined threshold value or more is provided inside the game board 2 on the left side of the first grand prize winning opening 8.
Note that the first big prize opening detection sensor 8a corresponds to the winning area detection sensor of the present invention.

  The magnetic detection sensors 81 a to 84 a output a magnetic detection signal to the main control board 101 when detecting magnetism exceeding a predetermined threshold. The magnetic detection sensors 81a to 84a change the trend of the game ball by bringing the magnet closer to the gaming machine Y, and each winning opening (first starting opening 6, second starting opening 7, first major winning opening 8, Since the sensor is provided as a countermeasure for preventing an illegal act to be awarded to the second grand prize opening 9 and the general prize opening 12), each prize opening (first start opening 6, second start opening 7, first grand prize winning) It is arranged in the vicinity of the mouth 8, the second big prize opening 9, and the general prize opening 12). The predetermined threshold may be a value that can be detected without erroneously detecting the magnetism of the cheating magnet using the above-described magnet.

  The vibration detection sensor 85a outputs a vibration detection signal to the main control board 101 when detecting a vibration of a predetermined threshold value or more. The position of the vibration detection sensor 85a is not particularly limited, and an illegal act such as shaking or hitting the gaming machine Y in order to change the trend of the game ball or hitting the gaming machine Y to distract the player. It may be attached to a position where there is a high possibility that the vibration is executed or a position where vibration is easily transmitted. The predetermined threshold value may be a value that can be detected without erroneously detecting the vibration of an illegal act of shaking or hitting the gaming machine Y described above. In this embodiment, vibration is detected by one vibration detection sensor 85a, but a plurality of vibration detection sensors may be arranged.

  The first big prize opening control device 80 includes a rotatable first special movable piece 80A and a first big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a drive unit for turning the first special movable piece 80A.

  The first special movable piece 80A is composed of a rectangular door member, and normally stops (with the exception of a predetermined condition) and stops with the surface being flush with the game area 2A. The mouth 8 is closed. The closing of the first big prize opening 8 by the first special movable piece 80A constitutes the basic mode of the first big prize opening 8.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first special movable piece 80A is rotated forward about the rotation shaft formed at the lower end portion to open the first big prize opening 8. The first big winning opening 8 is controlled to a special mode in which a ball can be entered. The opening of the first big prize opening 8 by the first special movable piece 80A constitutes a special mode of the first big prize opening 8. When the first special winning piece 80A is opened, the first special winning piece 80A protrudes from the game area 2A and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the first special winning opening 8. .

  The predetermined condition for the first grand prize winning control device 80 is the above-mentioned first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as “special”. In general, it is determined to be a big hit special symbol or a small bonus special symbol.

In addition, a variable second big prize opening 9 is provided in the vicinity of the second prize winning gate 11. The second big prize opening 9 is controlled by the second big prize opening control device 90 to either a basic mode in which a prize cannot be won or a special mode in which a prize can be won. The second big prize opening 9 is provided with a second big prize opening detection sensor 9a for detecting a game ball. When the second big prize opening detection sensor 9a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball.
The second big prize opening detection sensor 9a corresponds to the winning area detection sensor of the present invention.

  The second big prize opening control device 90 includes a rotatable second special movable piece 90A and a second big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 90B as a drive unit for rotating the second special movable piece 90A.

  The second special movable piece 90 </ b> A is composed of one blade-like member, and normally stops (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and closes the second big prize opening 9. The closing of the second big prize opening 9 by the second special movable piece 90 </ b> A constitutes the basic mode of the second big prize opening 9.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, one blade-like member that constitutes the second special movable piece 90A rotates to the right about the lower base end portion to open the second grand prize winning opening 9. The second big winning opening 9 is controlled to a special mode in which a ball can be entered. The opening of the second big prize opening 9 by the second special movable piece 90 </ b> A constitutes a special mode of the second big prize opening 9.

  The predetermined condition for the second big prize opening control device 90 is that the special symbol lottery described above is determined as a special jackpot symbol.

  The first starting port 6 can receive a game ball that has passed through the game area 2A on the left side of the decorative frame 29A, but a game ball that has passed through the game area 2A on the right side of the decorative frame 29A can enter. I can't do it. On the other hand, the second starting port 7 can receive a game ball that has passed through the left game area 2A or the right game area 2A of the decorative frame 29A, but the game ball that has passed through the right game area 2A is guided. Since it is guided to the second starting port 7 by the member 29D, it is easier to enter the second starting port 7 than the game ball passing through the left game area 2A. Therefore, in the short-time gaming state described later, it is better to launch the game ball (so-called right hit) aiming at the right game area 2A. In addition, the first big winning opening 8 and the second big winning opening 9 can enter a game ball passing through the game area 2A on the right side of the decorative frame 29A, but the game area 2A on the left side of the decorative frame 29A can be entered. The game balls that pass through cannot be entered. In other words, the first start port 6, the second start port 7, the first big winning port 8 and the second big winning port 9 can play game balls separately.

  In addition, at the lowest end of the game area 2A, the ball enters any of the first start port 6, the second start port 7, the first grand prize port 8, the second major prize port 9, and the general prize port 12. An out port 13 is provided for a game ball that could not be played.

The game balls that have entered the first start port 6, the second start port 7, the first grand prize port 8, the second big prize port 9, the general prize port 12, or the out port 13 are in the game area 2A. It is discharged outside. A predetermined discharge path (not shown) is connected to each of the first start port 6, the second start port 7, the first grand prize port 8, the second big prize port 9, the general prize port 12, and the out port 13. Yes. The predetermined discharge path connected to the first start port 6, the second start port 7, the first grand prize port 8, the second big prize port 9, the general prize port 12, and the out port 13 is finally one. It joins the discharge route. An out ball detection sensor 52 for detecting a game ball is provided on the one discharge path. The fact that the out ball detection sensor 52 detects a game ball means that the first start port 6, the second start port 7, the first big winning port 8, the second big winning port 9, the general winning port 12, and the out port This means that the game ball that has entered 13 is discharged to the outside of the game area 2A. In the following, the game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 52 is referred to as “out ball”.
The out ball detecting sensor 52 corresponds to the game medium detecting means of the present invention, and the out ball corresponds to the game medium used in the game of the present invention.

The first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21 and the normal symbol are on the surface of the game board 2 and outside the game area 2A, that is, in a predetermined area where the game balls on the surface of the game board 2 do not flow down. A symbol display device comprising a display device 22, a first special symbol hold display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, and a hold display device comprising a normal symbol hold display device 25, a round number display device 26, a right-handed display device 27 , And an out-sphere detection display device 28 is provided.
The out sphere detection display device 28 corresponds to the detection status notification means of the present invention.

  The first special symbol display device 20 is a variable display device that displays the result of the first special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the first start port 6, and the second special symbol display device 21 is This is a variable display device that displays the result of the second special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 7.

  In the first special symbol lottery, a big hit determination random number value is acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 6, and the acquired big hit determination random number value is a random value corresponding to “big hit” Determining whether or not. In the second special symbol lottery, whether a big hit determination random number value is acquired when a game ball enters the second starting port 7, and the acquired big hit determination random number value is a random value corresponding to “big hit” Determining whether or not.

  When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation of the special symbol based on the lottery result, and displays the first special symbol lottery representing the result of the first special symbol lottery. Stop display is performed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is a notification of the lottery result. The same applies to the second special symbol lottery and the second special symbol display device 21.

  For example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 each include a plurality of LEDs. In the variation display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol display device 20 or second special symbol display device 21 blinks at a predetermined interval. In the special symbol stop display, a specific LED indicating the result of each special symbol lottery is lit.

  The normal symbol display device 22 is a variable display device that displays a result of a normal symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball passes through the first winning gate 10 and the second winning gate 11. The normal symbol lottery is a random number value for winning determination when the game ball passes the first winning gate 10 and the second winning gate 11, and the acquired winning determination random value is a random value corresponding to “win”. This refers to the process of determining whether or not there is.

  When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol display device 22 displays the variation of the normal symbol based on the lottery result, and the stop display of the normal symbol representing the result of the normal symbol lottery is performed. That is, the normal symbol stop display on the normal symbol display device 22 is a notification of the lottery result.

  For example, each of the normal symbol display devices 22 includes a plurality of LEDs. In the normal symbol variation display, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol display device 22 blinks at a predetermined interval. And in the stop display of a normal symbol, specific LED showing the result of a normal symbol lottery lights.

  By the way, even if a game ball enters the start opening 6 or 7 during the special game during the special symbol display or during the special game in which the first big prize opening control device 80 or the second big prize opening control device 90 is operated, The special symbol variation display is not performed and the result of the special symbol lottery is not notified. That is, the special symbol variation display may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as a fixed condition, an upper limit is set for the number of special symbols that can be suspended. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value is set to “4” for each of the start ports 6 and 7. That is, the right to execute the special symbol variation display on the first starting port 6 (hereinafter referred to as “first special symbol hold”) and the right to execute the special symbol variation display on the second starting port 7. (Hereinafter referred to as “second special figure hold”) can be held up to four (hereinafter, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are collectively referred to as “special figure hold”). ).

  The first special symbol hold display device 23 displays the hold number (U1: hereinafter referred to as “first special figure hold number”) of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first special figure change display”). To do. The second special symbol hold display device 24 displays the hold number (U2: hereinafter referred to as “second special figure hold number”) of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “second special figure change display”). To do. The first special symbol hold display device 23 and the second special symbol hold display device 24 include, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and turn on a predetermined LED according to the number of holds.

  Similarly, for the variable symbol display (hereinafter referred to as “general variable display”), the upper limit reserved number is set to four, and the reserved number (G: hereinafter referred to as “general map reserved number”). ) Is displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25. The normal symbol hold display device 25 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED according to the number of hold of the normal symbols.

  The round number display device 26 lights up in a predetermined manner at the start of the jackpot game. The lighting mode indicates the number of executions of the round game of the jackpot game described later. The round number display device 26 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED according to the number of round game executions of the jackpot game.

The right-handed display device 27 is a display device that is turned on in a short-time gaming state and a special game, which will be described later, and lighting of the right-handed display device 27 represents a notification that a right-handed game is performed.
Here, the right strike means that the game ball passes through the game area 2A on the right side of the decorative frame 29A and enters the second start port 7, the first grand prize port 8, or the second big prize port 9. This is the operation of the launch handle 32 by the player. The operation of the launch handle 32 by the player, which is performed so that the game ball passes through the game area 2A on the left side of the decorative frame 29A and enters the first starting port 6, is called left-handed. The right-handed display device 27 is composed of, for example, one LED.

The out sphere detection display device 28 lights up for a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second) when the out sphere is detected ten times by the out sphere detection sensor 52. The out sphere detection display device 28 is composed of, for example, one LED.
In this way, by using the out-ball detection display device 28 to notify whether or not the out-ball has been detected normally, the store clerk of the amusement shop can normally perform the processing related to the out-ball on the main control board 101. Can be confirmed. In addition, the notification method of an out ball | bowl detection is not limited, It can set suitably. For example, the out sphere detection display device may be turned on every time an out sphere is detected by the out sphere detection sensor 52, or the number of detected out spheres may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 14. Anyway.

  In addition, the gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for executing various effects. In the present embodiment, the effect device includes an image display device 14, an audio output device 15, an effect lighting device 16, and effect accessory devices 200 to 203. The image display device 14 and the effect accessory devices 200 to 203 are provided on the game board 2, and the sound output device 15 and the effect lighting device 16 are provided on the glass door Y2.

  The image display device 14 performs various effects by displaying various still images and moving images. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 14, but other types of display devices such as a plasma display and an organic EL display can also be used.

  Each of the effect accessory devices 200 to 203 includes a predetermined drive unit (not shown) made of a solenoid or a motor, and decorative members 200A to 203A connected directly or indirectly to the drive units. . An effect by the operation of the decorative members 200A to 203A is executed by driving the driving unit and moving the decorative members 200A to 203A. The audio output device 15 produces a sound effect by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. The effect lighting device 16 performs an effect by illumination by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp.

  The upper tray 60 is provided with an effect button device 18 and a selection button device 19 that function as input devices for performing operations related to setting and canceling various effects and privilege grant modes described later.

  The effect button device 18 includes an effect button 18A that can be operated and an effect button detection switch 18a that is connected to the effect button 18A and detects an operation on the effect button 18A (see FIG. 2).

  The selection button device 19 is connected to an operable selection button 19A and a selection button 19A, and includes a selection button detection switch 19a that detects an operation on the selection button 19A (see FIG. 2).

  The selection button 19A includes an upper button 191A, a left button 192A, a lower button 193A, and a right button 194A. Each button 191 </ b> A to 194 </ b> A is provided so as to be pressed in a state of protruding from the upper tray 60.

  The effect device performs various effects according to the progress (state) of the game. As an effect, for example, there is a special drawing lottery effect that is performed in response to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The special drawing lottery effect is performed in the image display device 14. In the special drawing lottery effect, a change display of the special effect symbol and a stop display of the special effect symbol are performed.

  The variation display of the special effect symbol is performed corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the special effect symbol varies for a predetermined time in a predetermined manner. The special effect symbol stop display is performed in response to the special symbol stop display (hereinafter, the special effect symbol change display and stop display are collectively referred to as “special effect symbol display”). In the special effect symbol stop display, the special effect symbol is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined manner indicating the result of the special symbol lottery.

  The special effect symbols are, for example, three rows of special ornament symbols (for example, ornaments representing numbers from “1” to “9”) arranged in the left region, the center region, and the right region of the display region 140 of the image display device 14. Pattern). In the variation display of the special effect design, the special decoration design in each column moves (variation display) from top to bottom as if the reels are rotating. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of special effect symbols is not limited to this. In addition, during the variation display of the special effect symbol, various effect images such as a background image and an object image such as a character, a movie, and the like are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, in the special effect design stop display, the above three rows of special decoration designs are stopped and displayed in the left region, the center region, and the right region of the display region 140 of the image display device 14. The arrangement of special decorative symbols on a predetermined effective line (for example, the central horizontal line in the display area 140) when the special effect symbols are stopped and displayed represents the result of the special symbol lottery.

  In addition to the special drawing lottery effect, a roulette effect that is triggered by a normal symbol lottery described later, a special game effect that is performed when a jackpot game is executed, and a special symbol variation display or special game is performed for a predetermined period. Various effects such as a demonstration effect performed in an internal standby state (so-called customer waiting state) are performed.

  On the back side of the game board 2 and the game board mounting frame Y1, there are a main control board 101, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, an image control board 105, a power supply board 107, and a game information output terminal board 108. Etc. are provided.

  In addition, on the left side of the gaming machine Y, as shown in FIG. The gaming ball lending device 800 is electrically connected to the gaming machine Y by a harness (wiring or the like) (not shown) (see FIG. 3).

  The game ball lending device 800 is a prepaid card that stores information that can specify the remaining amount of prepaid information as a game recording medium, a member card that stores saving information that can specify the number of medals. A card insertion slot 801 for inserting (receiving) (hereinafter referred to as “game card”) is provided. The gaming card includes card identification information for identifying each gaming card, a non-volatile memory in which recording information such as prepaid balance information and saving information is recorded, and rewriting and reading out the recording information. An IC chip having a control unit for performing non-contact communication with the reader / writer unit of the game ball lending device 800 is mounted.

  A prepaid card will be described as an example of a gaming card. When a gaming card is inserted into the card insertion slot 801 of the gaming ball lending device 800 and a ball lending button 88A, which will be described later, is pressed, the gaming card is non-volatile. A predetermined amount is withdrawn from the prepaid balance information recorded in the sexual memory, and a game ball corresponding to the withdrawal amount is lent out.

Further, after the gaming card is inserted into the card insertion slot 801, it is possible to perform almost all operations related to lending of balls and discharging of gaming cards on the gaming machine Y side. For this reason, the gaming machine Y is provided with a remaining number display device 29, a ball lending button 88A and a return button 89A shown in FIG.
When a gaming card is inserted into the gaming ball lending device 800, the reader / writer unit communicates with the inserted gaming card control unit, and when the inserted gaming card is a regular gaming card, The remaining number display device 29 displays the remaining number corresponding to the prepaid balance information recorded on the gaming card. Each time a ball lending operation is accepted by the ball lending button 88A, a certain amount is subtracted from the prepaid balance information, and a ball lending instruction for the number of game balls corresponding to the number of times corresponding to the decremented certain amount is issued. This is performed for the connected gaming machine Y, and the frequency obtained by subtracting the frequency corresponding to a certain amount is displayed on the remaining frequency display device 29. Receiving the ball rental instruction, the gaming machine Y pays out the number of game balls according to the ball rental instruction. When a card return operation is accepted by the return button 89A, a card return signal is output to the game ball lending device 800, and the game ball lending device 800 returns (discharges) the game card from the card insertion slot 801.

  Next, referring to FIG. 3, the main control board 101, the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103, the lamp control board 104, and the image control board 105 provided on the back side of the game board 2 and the game board mounting frame Y1. The power supply board 107 and the game information output terminal board 108 will be described.

  The power supply board 107 supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine Y. On the power supply board 107, a backup power supply (not shown) made of a capacitor and a power supply monitoring circuit (not shown) are mounted. The backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery or a combination of a capacitor and a battery.

  The power supply monitoring circuit 107a monitors the power supply voltage (supply power) supplied to the gaming machine Y, detects when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined level value lower than the normal value, and outputs a voltage drop signal as a main signal. Output to the control board 101. Specifically, the power supply monitoring circuit 107a detects a voltage drop of 30V by monitoring DC30V obtained by rectifying AC24V supplied to the power supply, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined level value (for example, + 22V), As a voltage drop is detected, a voltage drop signal is output to the main control board 101. The power supply voltage to be monitored is higher than the power supply voltage (for example, +5 V) of the circuit element mounted on each board. For example, a voltage (+30 V) immediately after being converted from AC to DC is used.

  Furthermore, if the monitoring voltage (+30 V) is higher than the voltage (for example, +12 V) supplied to the various switches of the gaming machine Y, it is possible to prevent erroneous switch-on detection at the time of power interruption. That is, when the voltage of the + 30V power supply is monitored, the decrease can be detected at a stage before + 12V produced after the creation of + 30V starts to drop. In other words, when the voltage of the + 12V power supply decreases, the switch output becomes an on state. However, by monitoring the + 30V power supply voltage that decreases faster than + 12V and recognizing a power interruption, the switch output exhibits an on state. Before entering the power recovery waiting state, the switch output is not detected.

The main control board 101 controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads out a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, timers (quartz crystal units) and the like, performs arithmetic processing related to the game, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like.
The main CPU 101a corresponds to the notification control means of the present invention and the predetermined event determination means of the present invention.

  The main RAM 101c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a. The main RAM 101 c is a backup RAM as a nonvolatile storage means that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 107. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine Y is stopped (disconnected), a part or all of the main RAM 101c is kept for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The contents are saved. That is, based on detecting that the power supplied to the gaming machine Y has reached a predetermined level value lower than the normal value, the main CPU 101a has at least gaming state information including a gaming state when the predetermined level value is detected. And information related to the out ball (hereinafter referred to as “out information”) is stored in the main RAM 101c so as to be able to be held even in a state where the power supplied to the gaming machine Y is not supplied.

  In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the main CPU 101a (big hit game flag, round number (R), high probability state designation flag, high probability flag (probability variation flag), special symbol determination result (big hit or lose) , Jackpot type), hour / hour flag, hour / hour remaining number of times (hour / hour counter), special figure special electricity processing data, ordinary figure electric power treatment data, etc.), the number of unpaid prize balls, and data indicating out information are the progress of the game This data indicates the state and is stored in the backup RAM (backup data).

  The data corresponding to the control state of the main CPU 101a is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of the power interruption based on the data when the power is restored after the power interruption. In the present embodiment, the entire main RAM 101c is backed up.

  Further, as described above, an interruption signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board 107 has decreased to a predetermined level or less is input to an input port (not shown) of the main control board 101. That is, the power supply monitoring circuit 107a mounted on the power supply board 107 monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V, DC5V, etc.) used in the gaming machine Y, and the voltage value is set at a predetermined level. When the value drops to the value (when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected), an interruption signal indicating that is output to the main control board 101.

  Further, a RAM clear SW 101d is connected to the input side of the main control board 101 via an input port (not shown). The RAM clear SW 101d has a pushable button structure. When the RAM clear SW 101d is pressed when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is output to the main control board 101. When the signal is input to the input port, the main RAM 101c is cleared. .

  On the input side of the main control board 101, via an input port (not shown), a first start port detection sensor 6a, a second start port detection sensor 7a, a first big prize opening detection sensor 8a, and a second big prize are obtained. The mouth detection sensor 9a, the first winning gate detection sensor 10a, the second winning gate detection sensor 11a, the general winning mouth detection sensor 12a, the out ball detection sensor 52, the magnetic detection sensors 81a to 84a, and the vibration detection sensor 85a are connected. ing. Various detection signals (first start opening detection signal, second start opening detection signal, first big prize opening detection signal, second big prize opening detection signal, first prize winning gate detection signal, second prize winning from each detection sensor. A gate detection signal, a general winning opening detection signal, an out ball detection signal, a magnetic detection signal, and a vibration detection signal) are output to the main control board 101.

  On the output side of the main control board 101, a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating the normal movable piece 70A of the second start port control device 70 via an output port (not shown), a first big prize opening control device. A first big prize opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the first special movable piece 80A of 80 and a second big prize opening / closing solenoid 90B for operating the second special movable piece 90A of the second big prize opening control device 90 are connected. Has been. The main control board 101 outputs a control signal for controlling each solenoid to the second start opening / closing solenoid 70B, the first big prize opening / closing solenoid 80B, and the second big prize opening / closing solenoid 90B.

  Further, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the normal symbol display device 22, and the first special symbol hold display are provided on the output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). A device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, a normal symbol hold display device 25, a round number display device 26, a right-handed display device 27, and an out-ball detection display device 28 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs display control signals for controlling the display devices to the display devices 20 to 28.

Furthermore, a game information output terminal board 108 is connected to the output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 has predetermined information about the game (game information), predetermined information about the out ball (out information), the first starting port 6, the second starting port 7, the first grand prize winning port 8, and the second large size. Information related to abnormal winnings such as the award winning opening 9 and the general winning opening 12, magnetic detection abnormality, vibration detection abnormality and the like, and when the RAM clear switch is pressed when power supply to the gaming machine Y is started, are stored in the main RAM 101c. The information (security signal) indicating that the RAM clear for clearing the current data (backup data) has been executed is output to the game information output terminal board 108 as an external signal.
The abnormality information included in the security signal is not limited to the above-described abnormality, and can be set as appropriate.

A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal board 108. The game information output terminal board 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The game information display device is provided on the gaming machine Y, and displays predetermined game information and out information based on the predetermined game information (external signal). Therefore, the store clerk and player of a game store can confirm game information and out information. The hall computer can also input game information and out information and output the game information and out information, so that the game information and out information can be used for management of a game store.
The security signal based on the occurrence of various abnormalities and the security signal based on the RAM clear execution are output to the hall computer from a common output port.

The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102a, a sub ROM 102b, a sub RAM 102c, and an RTC (real time clock) 102d. The effect control board 102 is connected to the main control board 101 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the processing related to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.
The sub CPU 102a corresponds to the predetermined event determination unit of the present invention and the specific control execution unit of the present invention.

  The RTC 102d measures the current date and time. The RTC 102d operates with this power supply voltage when the power supply voltage is supplied to the effect control board 102, and is supplied from a backup power supply (not shown) built in the RTC 102d when the power supply voltage is not supplied to the effect control board 102. Operates according to the power supply voltage. For this reason, the RTC 102d can measure the current date and time even when the gaming machine Y is not powered on.

  An effect button detection switch 18 a and a selection button detection switch 19 a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104.

  When the effect button 18A is operated and the effect button detection switch 18a is operated, the lamp control board 104 detects and outputs to the effect control board 102 an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 18A has been operated.

  When the selection button 19 is operated and the selection button detection switch 19a is operated, the lamp control board 104 detects and outputs a selection button detection signal indicating that the selection button 19 has been operated to the effect control board 102.

  The selection button 19 includes an upper button 191A, a left button 192A, a lower button 193A, and a right button 194A. The selection button detection switch 19a is connected to the upper button 191A and detects an operation of the upper button 191A. 191a, a left button detection switch 192a connected to the left button 192A to detect an operation of the left button 192A, a lower button detection switch 193a connected to the lower button 193A to detect an operation of the lower button 193A, and a right button A right button detection switch 194a is connected to 194A and detects an operation of the right button 194A.

  When each button detection switch 191a, 192a, 193a, 194a detects an operation, the upper button detection signal, the left button detection signal, the lower button detection signal, and the right button detection signal are respectively transmitted via the lamp control board 104. To the effect control board 102. The upper button detection signal, the left button detection signal, the lower button detection signal, and the right button detection signal are collectively referred to as a “selection button detection signal”. The selection button detection signal and the effect button detection signal are collectively referred to as “button detection signal”.

  The sub CPU 102a outputs a command output from the main control board 101, an effect button detection signal output from the effect button device 18, a selection button detection signal output from the selection button device 19, and an input signal from a timer (crystal oscillator). Based on the out sphere detection signal output from the out sphere detection sensor 52 and the like, the program stored in the sub ROM 102b is read out to perform arithmetic processing, and based on the processing, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 are processed. A command for controlling the production is transmitted to The sub RAM 102c functions as a data work area when the sub CPU 102a performs arithmetic processing.

  The payout control board 103 performs launch control for launching the game ball and payout control for paying out the game ball to the player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c. The payout control board 103 is connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and is connected to the effect control board 102 in one direction so as to be able to transmit.

  A touch sensor 32a and a firing volume knob 32b are connected to the input side of the payout CPU 103a. The touch sensor 32 a is mounted in the firing handle 32. When a player, a store clerk, or the like touches the launch handle 32, the touch sensor 32 a detects that a person has touched the launch handle 32 and transmits a launch handle detection signal to the launch control board 106. The firing volume knob 32 b is connected to the firing handle 32. The firing volume knob 32b rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32 and detects the rotation angle.

  Further, on the input side of the payout CPU 103a, a payout ball counting switch (not shown) for detecting whether or not a game ball has been paid out in the payout device 5, and a ball lending button detection switch 88a for detecting the operation of the ball lending button 88A. , A return button detection switch 89a for detecting the operation of the return button 89A, a door opening detection sensor 87a for detecting whether or not the glass door Y2 is opened from the game board mounting frame Y1, and the game ball is full in the lower tray 61. A dish full tank detection sensor 86a for detecting the occurrence of the error is connected.

  The payout CPU 103a reads out a program stored in the payout ROM 103b based on input signals from the payout ball count detection sensor, the door open detection sensor 87a, the dish full tank detection sensor 86a, etc. The corresponding data is transmitted to the main control board 101.

  The payout control board 103 is connected to the firing solenoid 41 via the power supply board 107 on the output side. Then, the payout CPU 103a confirms whether or not the game ball lending device 800 is connected to the payout control board 103, and if the game ball lending device 800 is connected, permits the game ball to be fired, and the payout control board 103. When receiving a launch handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a, the launch solenoid 41 is energized to launch a game ball.

  When the firing handle 32 is operated to change the rotation angle of the firing handle 32, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 rotates and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear rotates. A voltage corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 detected by the firing volume knob 32 b is applied to the firing solenoid 41.

  When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates according to the applied voltage. In this manner, the payout control board 103 controls the energization of the launch solenoid 41 based on the information contained in the launch handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the launch volume knob 32b, and launches the game ball.

  In this embodiment, the reciprocating speed of the firing solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the payout control board 103. Since one game ball is fired every time the firing solenoid 41 makes one reciprocation, the number of game balls fired in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

  Further, on the output side of the payout control board 103, a remaining number display device 29 for displaying the remaining number corresponding to the prepaid balance information recorded on the game card, and a predetermined number of game balls from a storage tank (not shown) are played. The payout drive unit 51 of the payout device 5 for paying out to a person is connected. The payout CPU 103a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b based on the prize ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout device 5 to give a predetermined game ball to the player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a data work area during the calculation process of the payout CPU 103a.

  The lamp control board 104 includes a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, similarly to the above boards. On the output side of the lamp control board 104, an effect lighting device 16 and effect accessory devices 200 to 203 are connected.

  The lamp CPU 104a performs light emission control of the effect lighting device 16 and irradiation of light from the effect lighting device 16 based on a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102 (hereinafter referred to as “effect control command”). Drive control for the motor for changing the direction is performed. In addition, the lamp CPU 104a performs drive control on a solenoid or a motor that operates the effect accessory devices 200 to 203 based on the effect control command.

  Further, on the input side of the lamp control board 104, an effect button detection switch 18 a of the effect button device 18 and a selection button detection switch 19 a of the selection button device 19 are connected. When the effect button detection signal or the selection button detection signal is input, the lamp control board 104 outputs each to the effect control board 102. That is, the lamp control board 104 relays the effect button detection signal and the selection button detection signal between the effect control board 102, the effect button device 18, and the selection button device 19.

  The image control board 105 generates at least a video signal related to an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on the image display device 14, and outputs the image signal to the image display device 14 and sound output to the sound output device 15. A sound generation unit 105C that generates and outputs the sound signal to the sound output device 15, and a control unit 105A that controls and controls the image generation unit 105B and the sound generation unit 105C.

  The overall control unit 105 </ b> A of the image control board 105 includes an overall CPU 105 </ b> Aa, an overall ROM 105 </ b> Ab, and an overall RAM 105 </ b> Ac for performing image display control by the image display device 14.

  The overall CPU 105Aa is connected to an overall ROM 105Ab in which a control program and the like are stored, and a control program necessary for the operation of the overall CPU 105Aa is read out. Upon receiving a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102, the general CPU 105Aa issues an instruction for an image to be displayed on the image display device 14 on the image generation unit 105B based on the command, and also transmits to the sound generation unit 105C. A voice instruction to be output from the voice output device 15 is issued.

  The general RAM 105Ac functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the general CPU 105Aa, and temporarily stores data read from the general ROM 105Ab.

  The general ROM 105Ab is composed of a mask ROM, a control processing program for the general ROM 105Ab, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of a production pattern, animation scene information, and the like. Is remembered.

  This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. Various information such as a duty ratio that is a parameter of the luminance of the image display device 14 is included.

  The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 105Ba that is an image processor, a CGROM 105Bb that stores image data, and a VRAM 105Bc that temporarily stores drawing data generated from the image data. I have.

  The VDP 105Ba is connected to the CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and generates drawing data as a source of a video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the image data based on an instruction from the overall CPU 105Aa. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 14, for example, a material image representing an individual image such as a background image such as a scene, a character, and a dialogue that constitutes a background of a decorative design image or a decorative design. It is data. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

  The CGROM 105Bb includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies), etc., consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image.

  Further, the CGROM 105Bb stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without being compressed. The CGROM 105Bb may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without being compressed. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to the VDP 105Ba. The VDP 105Ba divides the pulse signal to generate a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 14, and outputs the synchronization signal to the image display device 14.

  FIG. 4 is a configuration diagram of a gaming system of the gaming machine Y and the server 500 via the public line (Internet) 410.

  The gaming machine Y is configured to be able to store information on the gaming history performed on the gaming machine, and can generate and display a QR code (registered trademark) including the stored gaming history information. Here, the “game history” indicates the history of various games such as the number of executions of the special symbol display, the number of wins of the jackpot, and the game benefits granted by the bonus game described later. However, it is not always necessary to have the entire history in the game by the gaming machine Y, and may be a part of the history specified in the game.

  The terminal 400 includes a mobile phone with a camera and a smart device that can access the public line (Internet) 410, reads game history information displayed on the gaming machine Y from the QR code, and passes through the public line 410. The read game history information can be transmitted to the server 500.

  The server 500 is configured as an information processing apparatus, and more specifically, includes a Web server 501, an application server 502, and a database server 503.

  The web server 501 has a function of transmitting / receiving information to / from the terminal 400. Whether the application server 502 generates start information (password character data or sound data) for causing the gaming machine Y to start the “privilege grant mode”, or stores game history information received from the terminal 400 It has a function of performing authentication or the like. The database server 503 has a function of storing game history information received from the terminal 400. Here, the “privilege grant mode” is an internal specific state of the gaming machine Y, and is a state in which information of various game histories including a game privilege described later can be stored.

  In this embodiment, the server 500 is configured by the Web server 501, the application server 502, and the database server 503 as described above. However, the server 500 may include one server or a server having other functions. Also good.

  Note that the gaming machine Y constituting the gaming system of this embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine, but instead of the gaming machine Y, a revolving type gaming machine (so-called slot machine), a jiyan ball gaming machine, and an arrange ball gaming machine are used. It can also be used.

  Next, a sequence diagram of the gaming system described with reference to FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the left column of FIG. 5 shows the player's operation, in other words, the processing of the terminal 400, the center column shows the processing of the gaming machine Y, and the right column shows the processing of the server 500.

  First, the player accesses the server 500 via the terminal 400, for example, by an address (URL) to a homepage. When the server 500 is accessed from the terminal 400, the application server 502 of the server 500 performs start information generation processing (step S2-1).

  In the start information generation process, the application server 502 first acquires terminal-specific information of the terminal 400 (for example, a user ID for a mobile phone or the like, hereinafter referred to as “UID”) and is stored in the database server 503. The game history information associated with the terminal-specific information is acquired.

  Next, the application server 502 generates start information for causing the gaming machine Y to set a privilege granting mode based on the acquired terminal unique information, game history information, and the like. The start information is composed of, for example, a password composed of alphanumeric characters, and the password includes game history information. The generated start information is transmitted to the terminal 400. Accordingly, the terminal 400 acquires start information.

  When the player inputs the start information acquired by the terminal 400 to the gaming machine Y, the gaming machine Y authenticates the input start information (step S1-1). When the authentication of the start information is successful, the gaming machine Y clears the gaming history information stored in the gaming machine Y (step S1-2) and permits the accumulation of gaming history information (step S1-3). That is, when the password acquired from the server 500 is input to the gaming machine Y, the privilege grant mode is set.

  When the player starts the game by rotating the launch handle 32, the gaming machine Y performs game processing such as special symbol lottery and special symbol variation display (step S1-4). The gaming machine Y in which the privilege grant mode is set stores game history information corresponding to the gaming process performed in step S1-4 (step S1-5).

  When the player ends the game, a predetermined end operation is performed on the gaming machine Y using the effect button 18A and the selection button 19A.

  When a predetermined end operation is performed by the player, the gaming machine Y includes information on gaming history stored in the gaming machine Y, terminal-specific information, and an address for accessing the server 500 (so-called homepage address). A QR code including information and the like is generated, the generated QR code is displayed on the image display device 14, and the privilege grant mode is canceled (step S1-6).

  Then, the player reads the QR code displayed on the gaming machine Y with the terminal 400 and accesses the server 500 from the QR code. That is, the terminal 400 transmits game history information, terminal specific information, and the like included in the QR code to the server 500 via the public line 410.

  When the game history information is received from the terminal 400, the application server 502 of the server 500 performs a QR authentication process (step S2-2). As the QR authentication process, the application server 502 acquires the terminal specific information included in the QR code and also acquires the terminal specific information of the terminal 400 accessed this time. Determine. Then, when the terminal-specific information of both matches (when the authentication in the QR authentication process is successful), the application server 502 stores the game history information included in the QR code in the database server 503.

  In addition, when authentication in the QR authentication process is successful, the server 500 displays game history information on the terminal 400, so that the game history image data processed based on the game history information is stored in the terminal 400. Send. On the other hand, when the authentication in the QR authentication process fails, the server 500 transmits error image data notifying the error to the terminal 400 in order to display the failure on the terminal 400 (step S2-3).

  Further, when the player wants to confirm the game history information so far, the player accesses the server 500 via the terminal 400, for example, by an address (URL) to a homepage.

  When accessed from the terminal 400, the server 500 reads the terminal-specific information of the accessed terminal 400 and authenticates whether the terminal-specific information of the accessed terminal 400 is registered in the database ( Step S2-4)

  If the server 500 is terminal specific information already registered in the database, the game history information corresponding to the terminal specific information is displayed on the terminal 400. Therefore, the game history image data for the top page is displayed on the terminal 400. (Step S2-5).

  In addition, the process of the server 500 in the sequence diagram mentioned above does not show all the processes of the server 500, and other processes for performing many functions are performed.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 101b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 6A-1 and 6A-2 are diagrams illustrating an example of the jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination constitutes a special symbol lottery and is to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 6A-1 is a table (hereinafter referred to as “first jackpot determination table”) that is referred to in the jackpot determination performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 as a trigger. On the other hand, FIG. 6A-2 is a table (hereinafter referred to as “second jackpot determination table”) that is referred to in the jackpot determination performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 7 as a trigger.

  In any jackpot determination table, a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as “low probability jackpot determination table”) referred to when the jackpot winning probability described later is relatively low (set to a standard value). And a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as “high probability jackpot determination table”) that is referred to when the state is relatively high (set higher than the standard value).

  In each jackpot determination table, a jackpot determination value and a determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by matching the jackpot determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 with the jackpot determination table, Either “winning” or “losing” is determined.

  If the result of the jackpot determination is “big jackpot”, after the special symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game with the opening of the first jackpot 8 or the second jackpot 9 is executed. If the result of the jackpot determination is “small jackpot”, after the special symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed, the bonus game with the opening of the first big winning opening 8 is executed. If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, neither the jackpot game or the jackpot game is executed.

  When the result of the big hit determination is “losing”, the reach determination is further performed based on the reach determination table of FIG. In the reach determination table, the reach determination value and the presence / absence of execution of reach production are uniquely associated and stored. As described later, whether or not the reach effect is executed by collating the reach determination random number obtained when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 with the reach determination table Is determined.

  If the result of the reach determination is “execution of reach production”, the reach production is performed to increase the player's expectation of winning the big hit in the special drawing lottery production.

  As a reach effect, for example, the above-mentioned special-figure decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in two areas of the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display area 140 of the image display device 14 during the variable display of the effect symbols. (A part of the production symbol performs a pseudo stop display), and if a predetermined special figure decoration symbol stops on a predetermined effective line in the remaining one region, it becomes an arrangement of special figure decoration symbols representing the winning of the jackpot There is a reach effect in which a state (so-called “reach state”) occurs. If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the result of the jackpot determination is still “losing” even if this stunning specific state is reached.

  After the reach state occurs in the reach production, a specific production (so-called “super-reach production”) that increases the expectation of winning a big win may or may not be developed. Further, in the reach production, the reach state does not always occur. That is, there is also a reach effect in which a predetermined effect is performed to increase the player's expectation of winning the big hit without reaching a reach state. If the result of the jackpot determination is “big jackpot”, the reach effect is basically performed in most cases.

  Fig.7 (a)-FIG.7 (c) are figures which show an example of a special symbol determination table. The special symbol determination constitutes a special symbol lottery, and determines the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (special symbol stop display mode) based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is.

  The special symbol determination table is largely divided according to the result of the jackpot determination (big hit, small hit and loss). That is, FIG. 7A is a table that is referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “big jackpot”, and FIG. 7B is the case where the result of the jackpot determination is “small jackpot”. A table referred to in the special symbol determination, FIG. 7C, is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

  Each of these tables is further divided according to the type of start port (first start port 6 or second start port 7) where a game ball was entered as a trigger for the special symbol determination. When the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the special symbol determination table is further divided according to whether or not the reach effect is executed (reach determination result).

  In each special symbol determination table, the special symbol determination value and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the special symbol determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 is collated with the special symbol determination table to be stopped and displayed. A special symbol is determined. As special symbol identification information to be stopped and displayed, special symbol stop symbol data and special effect symbol designating commands are set.

  The special figure stop symbol data is used in the process on the main control board 101, and the special effect design designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the process on the effect control board 102. The special effect designating command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the special symbol variation display (during the special symbol memory determination process in step S300).

  The special effect designating command is a 1-byte MODE data for identifying a special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21) on which the special symbol related to the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. And 1-byte DATA data for identifying a special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  Regarding the special effect designating command, if the MODE data is “E3H”, it means that the special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is “E4H”, the second is displayed. The special symbol display device 21 indicates that the special symbol is stopped. The special effect symbol designating command with MODE data “E3H” is referred to as “first special effect symbol designating command”, and the special effect symbol designating command with MODE data “E4H” is referred to as “second special effect symbol designating command”. "

  FIG. 8A is a diagram illustrating an example of a jackpot game control table used when controlling a jackpot game.

  The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As a condition for controlling the jackpot game, the opening time, which is a period from the start of the jackpot game until the first opening of the first big winning opening 8 or the second big winning opening 9, is performed, Opening designation command to be transmitted to the production control board 102 at the start of opening, the type of table used for controlling the opening / closing of the first grand prize port 8 or the second major prize port 9, the first grand prize port 8, or The ending time, which is the period from the end of the last opening of the second big prize opening 9 to the end of the jackpot game, and the ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 when the ending starts are set. . The conditions for controlling these jackpot games are related to the type of jackpot, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the jackpot game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

  FIG. 8B is a diagram showing an example of the small hit game control table used when controlling the small hit game.

  The small hit game control table stores conditions for controlling the small hit game. As conditions for controlling the small hit game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the small hit game to the first opening of the first big winning opening 8, and the stage control board 102 at the start of the opening. Opening designation command, type of table used to control the opening / closing of the first big prize opening 8, and the period from the last opening of the first big prize opening 8 to the end of the small hit game And the ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of ending. The conditions for controlling these small hit games are related to the type of the small hit, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the small hit game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

  FIG. 9A to FIG. 9C are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot opening / closing control table for jackpot games used when controlling opening / closing of the first winning prize port 8, and FIGS. 10A to 10C. 10 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a big winning opening / closing control table for jackpot games used when controlling the opening / closing of the second big winning opening 9. FIG. FIG. 9A is a table referred to in the first jackpot game (game per first length) constituting the jackpot game, and FIG. 9B is the second jackpot game (game per second length) constituting the jackpot game. FIG. 9C shows a table referred to in the sixth jackpot game (short hit game) constituting the jackpot game. On the other hand, FIG. 10 (a) is a table referenced in the third jackpot game (game per third head) constituting the jackpot game, and FIG. 10 (b) is the fourth jackpot game (per fourth head) constituting the jackpot game. FIG. 10C shows a table referred to in the fifth jackpot game (game per fifth head) constituting the jackpot game.

  The big winning game opening / closing control table for the big hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the first big winning port 8 and the second big winning port 9 during the big win game. The conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the first grand prize opening 8 and the second big prize opening 9 are the round number (R), which is the number of the round game, the first big prize opening control device 80 in each round game, the second Special operation number (K), which is the operation of the winning prize control device 90 (the opening of the first winning prize port 8 and the second winning prize port 9), and the opening time / closing time (operation time / non-operation time) Is set.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a big winning opening / closing control table for a small hit game used when controlling opening / closing of the first big winning opening 8. The big winning opening / closing control table for the small hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the first big winning opening 8 during the small hit game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the first prize winning opening 8, a special electric operation number (K) which is an opening number of the first prize winning opening 8 (operation of the first prize winning control device 80), and the first The opening time / closing time (operating time / non-operating time) of the big prize opening 8 is set.

  FIG. 12A shows an example of a game condition data determination table that is referred to when determining game condition data. The game condition data is identification information that represents a game condition that is newly set (changed) after the jackpot game when the jackpot is won. The game condition data is associated with the jackpot winning probability at the time of the special symbol determination and the result of the special symbol determination (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, the game condition data determination table is divided according to the jackpot winning probability (low probability game state / high probability game state), and in each divided table, the type of special symbol (special diagram stop symbol data) and game Condition data is uniquely associated and stored.

  The game condition data is composed of 2-byte data. The upper byte of the game condition data represents a jackpot winning probability newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is “01H”, the winning probability of the jackpot is set to a high probability (high probability gaming state) after the jackpot game, and if it is “00H”, the winning probability of the jackpot is low (low probability game). Status). On the other hand, the low-order byte of the game condition data represents the start opening prize ease that is newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is “01H”, the start port winning ease after the jackpot game is set to easy (short time gaming state), and if it is “00H”, the starting port winning ease is difficult after the jackpot game (non-short time gaming state). ).

  FIG. 12B is a diagram illustrating an example of the game condition determination table. The game condition determination is to determine a game condition that is newly set when the jackpot game ends (during the jackpot game end process). As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the start opening winning ease are set as the game conditions.

  The game condition determination table includes game condition data and each game condition, that is, ON / OFF of a flag indicating the game condition (high probability flag and short time flag), and the number of times of special symbol variable display that can be executed according to the game condition. (Xa, Ja: hereinafter referred to as “executable number of times”) are uniquely associated and stored. The number of times that the special symbol display can be executed means the specified number of times of special symbol variable display according to the newly set game conditions.

  13 to 14 are diagrams illustrating an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when determining a variation display mode of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special figure fluctuation pattern”). The special figure variation pattern is associated with the time required for displaying the variation of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special diagram variation time”) and the type of effect. The special symbol variation pattern includes a first special symbol variation pattern which is a variation display mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 and a first special symbol variation pattern which is displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. It is distinguished from the second special figure variation pattern which is a mode of variation display of two special symbols.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special figure variation pattern in a non-short game state to be described later, and FIG. 14 illustrates a special figure variation pattern in a short time game state to be described later. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred when determining. That is, the special figure variation pattern determination table is largely divided according to the gaming state.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination table further includes special symbol stop symbol data and special symbol data reflecting the result of the special symbol determination and the type of the special symbol display device (starting port related to the special symbol display) that operates in the special symbol display. The figure is divided according to the reserved number (U1 or U2).

  In each table, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value and one or a plurality of special figure fluctuation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by comparing the special figure variation pattern determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 with the special diagram variation pattern determination table, A special figure variation pattern is determined.

  The special figure fluctuation pattern is allocated with a predetermined probability set in advance in each table. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation pattern includes the expectation level of a big win and a specific big win (for example, a promising big win, a long win, etc.). Expectations are associated with each other.

  The special figure variation pattern is determined by the first pre-determination (step S236) or the second pre-determination (step S246) when the game ball enters the start ports 6 and 7 (during the input control process of step S200). This is determined by the special symbol variation pattern determination (step S313-3) at the start of the special symbol variation display (at the time of the special symbol memory determination processing in step S300).

  A start opening prize designation command and a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern. The start opening winning designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination. The special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponds to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined by the special figure fluctuation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the special figure fluctuation pattern determination.

  The special symbol variation pattern designation command is a 1-byte identifier for identifying a special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20 or second special symbol display device 21) on which a special symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination is performed. It is composed of MODE data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying a special figure variation pattern. For the special figure variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is “E6H”, this means that the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is “E7H”, 2 represents that the special symbol display device 21 displays the variation of the special symbol.

  Note that the special map fluctuation pattern designation command with MODE data “E6H” is “first special figure fluctuation pattern designation command”, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command with MODE data “E7H” is “second special figure”. This is called “variation pattern designation command”.

  The start opening winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the type of the start opening and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure variation pattern. Regarding the start opening prize designation command, if the MODE data is “E1H”, it indicates that a game ball has entered the first start opening 6, and if the MODE data is “E2H”, the second start opening 7 is displayed. Indicates that a game ball has entered. It should be noted that the start opening prize designation command with MODE data “E1H” is “first start opening prize designation command”, and the start opening prize designation command with MODE data “E2H” is “second start opening prize designation command”. "

  FIG. 15A to FIG. 15E show an example of a table used when controlling a normal symbol game based on winning to the first winning gate 10 and the second winning gate 11.

  FIG. 15A is a diagram illustrating an example of the normal symbol hit determination table. The hit determination is to determine whether or not to execute an auxiliary game that involves opening the second start port 7. As will be described later, the winning determination is performed based on a winning determination random number acquired based on the game ball passing through the first winning gate 10 and the second winning gate 11.

  The hit determination table is divided according to the start opening winning easiness. Specifically, the hit determination table is divided into a hit determination table referred to in the non-time-saving gaming state and a hit determination table referred to in the time-saving gaming state.

  In each hit determination table, a hit determination value and a determination result are uniquely associated and stored. By collating the acquired random number for hit determination with the hit determination table, either “winning” or “losing” is determined. When “winning” is won, an auxiliary game with the opening of the second start port 7 is executed.

  FIG. 15B is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination is to determine a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The normal symbol determination table is divided according to the result of winning determination (winning and losing).

  Each normal symbol determination table stores a normal symbol determination value and a normal symbol that is stopped and displayed in a uniquely associated manner. As will be described later, the normal symbol that is acquired when the game ball passes through the first winning gate 10 and the second winning gate 11 is collated with the normal symbol determining table, and displayed in a normal state. The symbol is determined. As the normal symbol identification information to be stopped and displayed, the normal symbol stop symbol data and the normal effect symbol designation command are set.

  The normal stop symbol data is used in the processing in the main control board 101, and the normal effect symbol designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the processing in the effect control board 102.

  FIG. 15C determines a variation pattern of a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “normal diagram variation pattern”) associated with a time required to display a variation of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “normal diagram variation time”). It is a figure which shows the common figure fluctuation pattern determination table for this. The normal variation pattern determination table is composed of a general variation variation determination table that is referred to in the non-short game state and a general variation pattern determination table that is referred to in the short time gaming state.

  In each table, a common pattern variation pattern determination value and one or a plurality of common map variation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the random number for determining the normal variation pattern acquired when the game ball passes through the first winning gate 10 and the second winning gate 11 is collated with the normal variation pattern determination table. A figure variation pattern is determined.

  A command change pattern designation command is set corresponding to the command map change pattern. It is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the normal pattern variation pattern is determined. When the production control board 102 receives the normal pattern variation pattern designation command, the variation display of the normal symbol is started from now on, and the determination result of the normal symbol determination related to the variation display of the normal symbol is recognized. Can do.

  The usual pattern change pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the gaming state related to the current start opening winning ease, and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the usual figure change pattern. Yes. With respect to the usual variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is “D6H”, it represents a non-short-time gaming state, and if the MODE data is “D7H”, it represents a time-short gaming state.

  FIG. 15D shows an example of the auxiliary game reference data determination table. This table stores data (auxiliary game reference data) that is referred to when performing an auxiliary game. As shown in FIG. 15D, in the auxiliary game reference data determination table, the combination of the current start port winning easiness and the usual figure stop symbol data is associated with the auxiliary game reference data. That is, the auxiliary game reference data includes information regarding the start opening winning easiness state and the result of the normal symbol determination when the normal symbol determination is performed.

  FIG. 15 (e) is a diagram showing an example of a second start port opening / closing control table for auxiliary games used when controlling opening / closing of the second start port 7. Conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second start port 7 during the auxiliary game are stored in the second start port opening / closing control table for the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 7, a general electric operation number (D) which is an opening number (operation of the second starting port control device 70) number of the second starting port 7 in the auxiliary game, 2 Opening time and closing time (operation time / non-operation time) of the start port 7 are set. The conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second start port 7 are associated with the auxiliary game reference data.

  16 (a) to 16 (c) show that game balls are awarded to the first start port 6, the second start port 7, the first grand prize port 8, the second big prize port 9, and the general prize port 12. It is a figure which shows an example of the abnormal winning determination table referred when determining whether it is abnormal. 16A is an abnormal winning determination table referred to in the non-short-time gaming state, FIG. 16B is an abnormal winning determination table referred to in the short-time gaming state, and FIG. 6 is an abnormal winning determination table referred to in FIG.

  In each abnormal winning determination table, whether or not the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 6, the second starting port 7, the first large winning port 8, the second large winning port 9, and the general winning port 12 is abnormal is determined. The condition for determining whether or not is stored. As a condition for determining whether or not a game ball winning is abnormal, a predetermined winning ball is set corresponding to each abnormal winning. Specifically, when 100 game balls are fired, that is, when 100 out balls are detected, if a game ball exceeding the winning stipulated ball has been won, it is determined as an abnormal winning, and the number of the winning sphere below the winning stipulated ball is determined. If the game ball wins, it is determined to be normal.

  In the general winning mouth abnormal winning, the winning stipulated ball is set to “10” in any of the non-time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, and the long winning game. Since the general winning opening 12 does not differ in ease of winning depending on the gaming state, the value of the winning stipulated ball is set in common in any gaming state.

  In the first grand prize opening abnormal winning, the winning stipulated ball is set to “3” in the non-short-time gaming state and the short-time gaming state. On the other hand, the winning stipulated ball is set to “100” during the long game. In the non-short-time gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the first big prize opening 8 is controlled to a basic mode (closed mode) in which a winning is not possible, so the winning stipulated ball is set to “3”. The reason for setting “3” instead of “0” is that the game ball is clogged in the first big winning opening 8 and the clog is eliminated after the long hitting game is finished, so that the non-short game state or the short In the gaming state, the first grand prize opening detection sensor 8a may detect a gaming ball or may be erroneously detected due to noise or a failure, so the threshold value is set to “3” to prevent erroneous determination. It is set. In addition, during the long game, the first big winning opening 8 is controlled to a special mode (open mode) where a winning can be made, and is set to “100” for easy winning.

  In the second grand prize opening abnormal winning, the winning stipulated ball is set to “3” in the non-short-time gaming state and the short-time gaming state. On the other hand, the winning stipulated ball is set to “100” during the long game. In the non-short-time gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the second big prize opening 9 is controlled to a basic mode (closed mode) in which no winning is possible, so the winning stipulated ball is set to “3”. The reason for setting “3” instead of “0” is that the game ball is clogged in the second big winning opening 9 and the clog is eliminated after the long hitting game is finished, so that the non-short game state or the short In the gaming state, the second grand prize opening detection sensor 9a may detect a gaming ball or may be erroneously detected due to noise or a failure, so the threshold value is set to “3” to prevent erroneous determination. It is set. Further, during the long winning game, the second big winning opening 9 is controlled to a special mode (open mode) where a winning can be made, and is set to “100” for easy winning.

  In the first start opening abnormal winning, the winning stipulated ball is set to “25” in any of the non-time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, and the long winning game. As described above, since the game ball that has passed through the right game area 2A cannot be won in the first starting port 6, the short game state in which the right ball is played, the short game state, the long hit game, and the left strike In the non-short-time gaming state, which is a gaming state in which a player performs a game, the ease of winning a prize will differ, but since a player does not necessarily make a right or left strike according to the gaming state, a winning will occur in any gaming state. The value of the specified sphere is set in common. For example, in the short-time gaming state, the player usually makes a right-hand hit, so it is difficult to think of winning a prize at the first starting port 6, but even if the player has left-handed even in the short-time gaming state, it is possible to win. In order to prevent erroneous determination, the value of the winning stipulated ball is set in common in any gaming state.

  In the second start opening abnormal winning, the winning stipulated ball is set to “20” in the non-time-saving gaming state and the long winning game. On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state, the winning stipulated ball is set to “50”. In the short-time game state, the second start port 7 is set to “50” because it is easier to win as compared to the non-short-time game state and long game. In the non-short game state and the long hit game, the second start port 7 is difficult to win in comparison with the short-time game state. However, in the non-short game state and the short-time game state, Unlike the first grand prize opening 8 and the second big prize opening 9), it is not impossible to win, so “20” is set.

  Note that the winning stipulated sphere is not limited to these values, and any value can be used as long as an abnormal winning can be determined without erroneous determination.

  A special game will be described. In the present embodiment, the first grand prize opening control device 80 or the second big prize opening control device 90 operates (the first big prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9 is opened). The game is executed when a “hit” is won, and is configured as a “hit game” in which the first big winning opening 8 or the second big winning opening 9 is opened and closed. The jackpot game is divided into a “long win game” and a “short win game” mainly depending on the opening and closing modes of the first big winning port 8 and the second big winning port 9.

  In the jackpot game, a round game in which the first big prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9 is opened at least once is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times that the game can be released (hereinafter referred to as the maximum number of times of release) and the total amount of time that can be released (hereinafter referred to as the maximum release time) are set in advance. The reason why it can be opened is that the number of game balls that can be won in the first grand prize winning opening 8 or the second big winning prize opening 9 during one round game is preset. (For example, 9). Therefore, even if the first grand prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9 is not opened the maximum number of times, the first big prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9 is closed, and the round game is performed. May end. Even if the maximum opening time has not elapsed, the first grand prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9 may be closed, and the round game may end. It should be noted that the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9 in each round game may or may not be unified in each jackpot game.

  Next, game conditions that are conditions when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the start opening winning easiness are set as the game conditions. As for the jackpot winning probability, the game progresses under the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state, and the game ball progresses under the short-time gaming state or the non-short-time gaming state with respect to the ease of winning the game opening. To do. The initial (power-on) gaming conditions are set to a low probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state, and this low probability gaming state and a non-time-short gaming state are referred to as a normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the low-probability gaming state with respect to the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set to be relatively disadvantageous to the player at 1/350. On the other hand, the high probability gaming state is that the jackpot winning probability is higher than the low probability gaming state, that is, set to 1/80 which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is in a high probability gaming state, winning a jackpot is easier than in the low probability gaming state, and the number of winning jackpots per unit time is relatively large, which is advantageous to the player. It can be said that it is a state.

  The non-time-saving gaming state is a state in which the start opening winning easiness is normal. Specifically, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the normal time variation time is set to 15 seconds, and the operation time (second start time) of the second start port control device 70 that operates when “winning” is won in the winning determination. The sum of the opening time of the mouth 7) is set to 0.2 seconds or 5.1 seconds, and the probability of winning in the hit determination for the normal symbol is set to 1/50. Note that the “total opening time” is that the second start port 7 may be opened multiple times for each win, and a game ball can be won for each win. This is because the number is limited, and when a game ball is won, it closes without waiting for the opening time.

  On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state, the opening time of the second starting port 7 per unit time (the operating time of the second starting port control device 70) is longer than in the non-short-time gaming state, and the second starting port 7 Is a gaming state that tends to be open. Due to the relatively high start opening prize ease, the number of times the second special symbol determination can be performed per unit time increases. Under the same jackpot winning probability, the number of executions of the second special symbol determination per unit time inevitably increases the number of winning jackpots per unit time. It can be said that this is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the short-time gaming state, the normal variation time is set to 3.0 seconds, the total maximum opening time of the second start port 7 is set to 5.2 seconds, The probability of winning is set to 1/5. That is, all the components of the start opening winning ease are set to be more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving gaming state. In the short-time gaming state, the second start port 7 is opened twice via a 1.0 second closure (interval). However, there is no such closure, and it may be opened only once. Moreover, the closure may be provided a plurality of times.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the start openings 6 and 7, three prize balls can be obtained, but the player fires the game ball by operating the appropriate launch handle 32. However, the number of game balls possessed by the player tends to decrease. However, in the short-time gaming state, since it is easier to enter the second starting port 7 than in the non-short-time gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of game balls possessed by the player, the short-time game state is set to be more advantageous for the player than the non-short-time game state.

  In this way, the type of jackpot game and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game (the combination of the low probability game state / high probability game state and the non-short-time game state / time-short game state) are determined by winning the jackpot. It is determined. In view of this, the substantial jackpot type (the jackpot type based on the profits enjoyed by the player) includes the type of jackpot game to be executed and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game ends ( It can be said that it is a combination with (game state). Therefore, hereinafter, apart from the type of jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, based on the combination of the type of jackpot game derived by the jackpot and the game conditions after the jackpot game, that is, based on the type of profit that the player enjoys The jackpot type can be classified.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, a winning game is executed by winning the first long game, and then the game condition is set to a high probability state and a short time state. Probability jackpot 1) ”, the jackpot for executing the game per second length and then setting the game condition state to a high probability state and a short time state is“ high probability short-lived second longest (probability variation jackpot 2) ” Execute a game per 2 lengths, and then set the game condition state to a low probability state and a short time state as “low probability short duration 2nd long (ordinary jackpot)”, execute a game per 3rd length, After that, the jackpot for setting the state of the gaming condition to the high probability state and the short-time state is “high probability short-lived third per third (probability big hit 3)”, the game per fourth long is executed, and then the state of the gaming condition The jackpot that sets the high probability state and the short-time state is “high-probability short-lived fourth length (4 per probability variation jackpot)”, the game per fifth length is executed, and then the state of the game condition is the high-probability state and the short-time state The jackpot to be set to “High probability short-lived 5th longest (probability big hit 5)”, the short hit game is executed, and then the jackpot to be set to the high-probability gaming state and the non-time-short gaming state It is called "winning (latent probability big hit)".

  When the jackpot is won, the normal game state is set when the jackpot game starts regardless of the state before the jackpot game. That is, during the jackpot game, the low probability game state and the non-short-time game state are entered. On the other hand, even if winning a small win, the game conditions do not change. That is, the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is during the small hit game and after the small hit game.

  The main process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When power is supplied from the power supply board 107, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

  The main CPU 101a first sets permission to access the main RAM 101c in step S1.

  In step S2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the RAM clear SW 101d is on (whether the RAM clear SW 101d is pressed). If the RAM clear SW 101d is determined to be on, the main CPU 101a clears the main RAM 101c. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S9. On the other hand, if the RAM clear SW 101d is not determined to be ON, the process proceeds to step S3.

  In step S3, the main CPU 101a creates a checksum of the main RAM 101c when the power is turned on.

  In step S4, the main CPU 101a compares the created checksum of the main RAM 101c when the power is turned on with the checksum of the main RAM 101c when the power is cut off. Here, the main CPU 101a determines that it is normal if they match, and shifts the process to step S5, and determines that it does not match, and shifts the process to step S9.

  In step S5, the main CPU 101a loads the backup data stored in the backed up main RAM 101c.

  In step S6, the main CPU 101a sets an initial value in the work area of the main RAM 101c that requires an initial value at the time of power failure / recovery, and performs a RAM setting process when backup is valid.

  In step S7, the main CPU 101a performs initial setting of devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the effect control board 120, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, etc. are set.

  In step S8, the main CPU 101a determines a power interruption recovery designation command based on the loaded gaming state information, sets the determined power interruption recovery designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and produces an effect control board. 102.

  The power interruption recovery designation command indicates that the gaming machine Y has been turned on and has recovered normally, and data backed up before power interruption (data indicating information relating to the game, that is, the main CPU 101a Data according to the control state (special special charge processing data, special figure stop symbol data, special figure fluctuation pattern, round number (R), high probability gaming state flag, high probability gaming state remaining number counter, short time gaming state flag, high The game state at the time of power recovery is also shown on the basis of the probability game state remaining number counter, the general-purpose ordinary power processing data, etc., the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls, and the data indicating out information.

  Specifically, the main CPU 101a sets the start address of a backup setting table (not shown) stored in the main ROM 101b as a pointer, and sequentially stores the contents of the backup setting table in the work area (area in the main RAM 101c). Set to.

  This work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. In addition, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The portion that should not be initialized is at least data indicating information related to the game, that is, data corresponding to the control state of the main CPU 101a (special drawing special electric processing data, special graphic stop graphic data, special graphic fluctuation pattern, round number ( R), high-probability gaming state flag, high-probability gaming state remaining number counter, hourly gaming state flag, high-probable gaming state remaining number counter, ordinary map electric power processing data, etc.), data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls, and Data indicating out information, a part where an output port output state is stored (output port buffer), and the like.

  In step S9, the main CPU 101a clears the use area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S10, the main CPU 101a sets an initial value in a work area of the main RAM 101c that requires an initial value at the time of initialization, and performs setting processing of the main RAM 101c when backup is not valid.

  In step S11, the main CPU 101a performs initial setting of devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the effect control board 120, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, etc. are set.

  In step S12, the main CPU 101a determines a power-on designation command, sets the determined power-on designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and transmits it to the effect control board 102.

  In step S13, the main CPU 101a stands by until the RAM clear SW 101d is turned on again (pressing operation). When the RAM clear SW 101d is turned on again (pressing operation), the process proceeds to step S14.

  In step S14, the main CPU 101a determines a RAM clear designation command, sets the determined RAM clear designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and transmits it to the effect control board 102.

  In step S15, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure fluctuation random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the special symbol fluctuation display composed of the reach determination random number and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number. .

  In step S <b> 16, the main CPU 101 a updates the initial value random number including the jackpot determination initial value random number, the special symbol determination initial value random number, the hit determination initial value random number, and the like. Thereafter, the processes in steps S15 and S16 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

  The timer interrupt process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. The following timer interrupt processing is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 ms) by the reset clock pulse generating circuit provided on the main control board 101.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 101a to the stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101a updates the special symbol variation time processing, the special symbol stop time update processing, the opening time update processing, the first grand prize winning port 8, and the second grand prize winning port 9 opening / closing time. Special game timer counter that performs the update process of the game, and the auxiliary game timer that performs the update process of the normal symbol variation time, the update process of the normal symbol stop time, the update process of the opening and closing time of the second start port 7, etc. A time control process for updating the counter is performed.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates a specific random number including a jackpot determining random number, a special symbol determining random number, and a winning determining random number.

  In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number update process for updating the jackpot determining initial value random number, the special symbol initial value random number, and the winning determination initial value random number.

  For updating various random numbers, the random number is updated by adding “1” to a random number counter provided for each type of random number. Various random numbers have a random number range. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. In the update of the random number, when the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is reset to “0” without adding “1”, and each random number value is newly updated from the initial random number at that time. Update to

  In step S200, the main CPU 101a performs input control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process for determining whether or not a new valid signal is transmitted from a predetermined detection sensor. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101a displays the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the first special symbol hold display device 23, the second special symbol hold display device 24, and the first big prize opening control device 80. And the special figure special electric control process (special symbol related process) for performing the control (control of the special symbol system device) of the second big prize winning control device 90 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S400, the main CPU 101a performs a normal signal normal power control process (normal signal control) for controlling the normal symbol display device 22, the normal symbol hold display device 25, and the second starting port control device 70 (control of the normal symbol system device). Perform symbolic processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a corresponds to the start port (first start port 6, second start port 7), grand prize port (first big prize port 8, second big prize port 9), and general prize port 12. It is checked whether or not the prize ball counter to be exceeded exceeds “0”. If the prize ball counter exceeds “0”, a prize ball request signal indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening is sent to the payout control board 103. Send. When a prize ball signal is transmitted, an update process for subtracting “1” from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

  In step S600, the main CPU 101a controls each solenoid drive control data, each symbol display device 20, 21, 22, each hold display device 23, 24, 25, the round number display device 26, the right-handed display device 27, and the out. A process of creating external signal output data for outputting display control data of the ball detection display device 28, predetermined game information, and out information as external signals to an external device such as the game information display device 700 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs output control processing. In this process, first, a port output process for outputting a signal based on the drive control data and the external signal output data created in S600 is performed. Next, a display device output process for outputting a signal based on the display control data created in step S600 is performed. Finally, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board is also performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 101a.

  The input control process will be described with reference to FIGS. First, in step S201, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a general winning opening detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 12a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 12. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S202, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first grand prize opening detection signal is input from the first big prize opening detection sensor 8a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first big prize opening 8. To do. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S203, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second big prize opening detection signal from the second big prize opening detection sensor 9a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second big prize opening 9. To do. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S204, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first start port detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 6. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S205, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second start port detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 7a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 7. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S206, the main CPU 101a inputs the first winning gate detection signal and the second winning gate detection signal from the first winning gate detection sensor 10a and the second winning gate detection sensor 11a, that is, the game ball is the first. It is determined whether the winning gate 10 and the second winning gate 11 have been passed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S207, the main CPU 101a has input an out-ball detection signal from the out-ball detection sensor 52, that is, whether or not the game ball is discharged from the game area 2A, in other words, whether or not an out-ball has occurred. Determine whether. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S208, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the magnetic detection signals from the magnetic detection sensors 81a to 84a have been input. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S209, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a vibration detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 85a has been input. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S210, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the dish full tank detection signal from the dish full tank detection sensor 86a has been input. When determining that the dish full tank detection signal has been input, the main CPU 101a stops paying out the game balls by the payout device 5, and sets a dish full tank abnormality occurrence designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer). Then, the dish full detection signal input process is terminated. When determining that the dish full tank detection signal is not input, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the payout of the game ball by the payout device 5 is currently stopped, and if it is stopped, the payout is resumed. Set the dish full tank abnormal release designation command in the transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) for production, and finish the dish full tank detection signal input process. If not stopped, perform the dish full tank detection signal input process as it is. finish.

  Next, the general winning opening detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S201-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a general winning opening detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 12a. If it is determined that the general winning opening detection signal is input, the process proceeds to step S201-2, and if it is determined that the general winning opening detection signal is not input, the process proceeds to step S201-10.

  In step S201-2, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the general winning opening winning ball counter used for winning balls and the abnormality determining general winning opening winning counter used to determine whether or not there is an abnormal winning and updates it. To do.

  In step S201-3, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a game ball is being fired, that is, whether or not a game ball firing flag is ON in the game ball firing flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the main CPU 101a determines that the game ball is being fired, the main winning a prize opening detection signal input process is terminated, and if it is determined that the game ball is not being fired, the process proceeds to step S201-4.

  In step S201-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the unfired general winning opening abnormal winning determination flag is turned on in the unfired general winning opening abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the main CPU 101a determines that the non-launched general prize opening abnormal winning determination flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S201-7, and if the main CPU 101a determines that the unfired general winning opening abnormal winning determination flag is not ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S201-5.

  In step S201-5, the main CPU 101a turns on the unfired general winning opening abnormal winning determination flag in the unlaunched general winning opening abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S201-6, the main CPU 101a sets a non-launched general winning opening abnormal winning determination timer counter in the main RAM 101c to a non-firing general winning opening abnormal winning determination time (in this embodiment, 2 seconds = 500 counters). To do.

  In step S <b> 201-7, the main CPU 101 a determines whether or not the non-launched general winning opening abnormal winning determination time has elapsed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the unpaid general winning mouth abnormal winning determination time has elapsed, the process moves to step S201-8, and if the main CPU 101a determines that the unfired general winning mouth abnormal winning determination time has not elapsed, The general winning opening detection signal input process is terminated.

  In step S201-8, the main CPU 101a turns off the unfired general winning opening abnormal winning determination flag in the unlaunched general winning opening abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S201-9, the main CPU 101a sets the general winning opening first abnormal winning designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer), and ends the general winning opening detection signal input process.

  In step S201-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the non-firing general winning opening abnormal winning determination flag is turned on in the non-firing general winning opening abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the main CPU 101a determines that the non-launched general prize opening abnormal winning determination flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S201-7, and if the main CPU 101a determines that the unfired general winning opening abnormal winning determination flag is not ON. Then, the general winning a prize opening detection signal input process is terminated.

In step S201-7, when it is determined that the non-launched general winning opening abnormal winning determination time has elapsed, in step S201-9, the general winning opening first abnormal winning designation command is set as a game. In order to prevent erroneous determination when the first ball of the game ball newly launched from the state in which the ball has not been fired wins the general winning opening 12, the game ball is detected by the general winning opening detecting sensor 12a. “2 seconds” is set as the detection time from the detection by the out-sphere detection sensor 52 to the detection by the out-sphere detection sensor 52.
The “2 seconds” is not limited to this value because the detection time differs depending on the positional relationship between the general winning opening detecting sensor 12a and the out ball detecting sensor 52, and is not limited to this value. Any value that can prevent erroneous determination is acceptable.
Note that this general winning opening detection signal input processing corresponds to determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined predetermined relationship of the present invention has been established.

  Next, the first big prize opening detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S202-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a first big prize opening detection signal is input from the first big prize opening detection sensor 8a. If it is determined that the first grand prize opening detection signal is not input, the process proceeds to step S202-12. If it is determined that the first big prize opening detection signal is input, the process proceeds to step S202-2.

  In step S202-2, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the big winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball and the abnormality determining first big winning opening prize winning counter used to determine whether or not there is an abnormal winning. Update.

  In step S202-3, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the game ball is being fired, that is, whether or not the game ball firing flag is ON in the game ball firing flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the main CPU 101a determines that the game ball is being launched, the process proceeds to step S202-13, and if the main CPU 101a determines that the game ball is not being launched, the process proceeds to step S202-4.

  In step S202-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is during the big prize opening validity period. If the main CPU 101a determines that it is during the big prize opening validity period, it moves the process to step 202-5, and if it determines that it is not during the big prize opening validity period, it moves the process to step S202-6.

This grand prize winning period is the period from when either the first big prize winning opening 8 or the second big winning prize opening 9 is controlled to the closed state until one second has elapsed after being controlled to the closed state. It is.
In addition, it is not controlled until it is controlled to the closed state after the grand prize winning ports (the first grand prize winning port 8, the second grand prize winning port 9) are controlled to the open state, but are controlled to the closed state. 1 second elapses after a game ball is clogged in the big prize opening (first big prize opening 8, second big prize opening 9) or the big prize opening (first big prize opening 8, When a prize is won immediately before the second big prize opening 9) is controlled to be closed, the game ball won while the big prize opening (the first big prize opening 8 and the second big prize opening 9) is open. The big prize opening (the first big prize opening 8, the second big prize opening 9 before the game balls are detected by the big prize opening detection sensor 8a, the second big prize opening detection sensor 9a). ) Is controlled in the closed state, and the game ball is won while the grand prize opening (the first grand prize opening 8, the second big prize opening 9) is open. First, a detection time of 1 second is set after being controlled to be closed in order to prevent being added to the first grand prize winning port abnormal winning counter and the second big winning mouth abnormal winning counter during launching, which will be described later. Yes.
The detection time is not limited to 1 second, and is a time that can be prevented from being added to the first major winning mouth abnormal winning counter during firing and the second major winning mouth abnormal winning counter during firing. I just need it.

  In step S202-5, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls won in the first grand prize winning port 8 and the second grand prize winning port 9 and updates them.

  In step S202-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the unfired first big prize winning port abnormal winning determination flag is ON in the unfired first big winning prize abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. . If the main CPU 101a determines that the first big prize mouth abnormal prize determination flag is not on during firing, the process moves to step S202-9, and the first big prize mouth abnormal prize judgment flag is not on during firing. If determined, the process proceeds to step S202-7.

  In step S202-7, the main CPU 101a turns on the unfired first big prize opening abnormal winning determination flag in the unlaunched first big winning opening abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S202-8, the main CPU 101a determines that the first major prize winning port abnormal winning determination timer counter in the main RAM 101c has not fired in the first major winning prize abnormal winning determination time (in this embodiment, 2 seconds = 500). Set the counter).

  In step S202-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first major winning opening abnormal winning determination time has elapsed while not being fired. If the main CPU 101a determines that the first major winning opening abnormal winning determination time has not elapsed during firing, the process moves to step S202-10, and if the first major winning opening abnormal winning determination time has not elapsed during non-firing. If it determines, the said 1st big winning opening detection signal input process will be complete | finished.

  In step S202-10, the main CPU 101a turns off the unfired first big prize winning port abnormal winning determination flag in the unlaunched first big winning opening abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S202-11, the main CPU 101a sets the first big prize opening first abnormal prize designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer), and ends the first big prize opening detection signal input process.

  In step S202-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the unfired first big prize winning port abnormal winning determination flag is ON in the unlaunched first big winning prize abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. . If the main CPU 101a determines that the first big prize mouth abnormal prize determination flag is not on during firing, the process moves to step S202-9, and the first big prize mouth abnormal prize judgment flag is not on during firing. If determined, the first big prize opening detection signal input process is terminated.

In step S202-9, when it is determined that the first unsuccessful first major winning opening abnormal winning determination time has elapsed, the first large winning opening first abnormal winning designation command is set in step S202-11. In order to prevent the game ball from being erroneously determined when the first ball of the game ball newly launched from the state in which the game ball has been determined to be unlaunched wins the first grand prize opening 8, “2 seconds” is set as the detection time from the detection by the first big prize opening detection sensor 8a to the detection by the out ball detection sensor 52.
Further, this “2 seconds” is not limited to this value because the detection time differs depending on the positional relationship between the first big prize opening detection sensor 8a and the out ball detection sensor 52, and the first big prize opening number Any value that can prevent erroneous determination of one abnormal winning is acceptable.

  In step S202-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is during the grand prize winning period. If the main CPU 101a determines that it is during the prize winning period, the process proceeds to step 202-14. If the main CPU 101a determines that it is not during the prize winning period, the process proceeds to step S202-15.

  In step S202-14, the main CPU 101a updates the round winning counter (C) for counting game balls won in the first grand prize winning port 8 and the second major winning prize port 9 by adding "1", The first big prize opening detection signal input process is terminated.

  In step S202-15, the main CPU 101a sets a first big prize mouth abnormal prize counter during firing for counting the game balls won in the first big prize mouth 8 during the game ball firing and the big prize mouth ineffective period. Update by adding "1".

  In step S202-16, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the firing first big prize winning port abnormal winning determination flag is ON in the firing first big winning prize abnormal winning decision flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the main CPU 101a determines that the first major winning opening abnormal winning determination flag is on during firing, the process moves to step S202-19, and if the first major winning opening abnormal winning determination flag is not on during firing. If determined, the process proceeds to step S202-17.

  In step S202-17, the main CPU 101a turns on the first grand prize winning port abnormal winning determination flag being fired in the first grand prize winning port abnormal winning judgment flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S202-18, the main CPU 101a fires the first big prize winning port abnormal winning judgment timer counter during the firing of the main RAM 101c, and the first big prize winning port abnormal winning judgment time (in this embodiment, 60 seconds = 15000 counters). Set.

  In step S202-19, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first major winning opening abnormal winning determination time has elapsed during firing. If the main CPU 101a determines that the first major winning opening abnormal winning determination time has elapsed during firing, the process moves to step S202-20, and determines that the first major winning opening abnormal winning determination time has not elapsed during firing. Then, the process proceeds to step S202-22.

  In step S202-20, the main CPU 101a turns off the first grand prize winning port abnormal winning determination flag being fired in the first grand prize winning port abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S202-21, the main CPU 101a clears the first grand prize winning port abnormal winning counter during launch, and ends the first big prize winning port detection signal input process.

  In step S202-22, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the value of the first major winning opening abnormal winning counter during launch is “3”. If the main CPU 101a determines that the value of the first grand prize winning port abnormal winning counter during launch is “3”, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S202-23, and the value of the first major prize winning port abnormal winning counter during firing is “3”. If not, the first big prize opening detection signal input process is terminated.

  In step S202-23, the main CPU 101a turns off the firing first big prize opening abnormal winning determination flag in the firing first big winning opening abnormal winning determination flag storage area.

  In step S202-24, the main CPU 101a sets the first big prize opening third abnormal prize designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer).

In step S202-19, it is determined that the first major winning opening abnormal winning determination time during firing has not elapsed, and in step S202-22, the first major winning opening abnormal winning counter during firing is “3”. In step S202-24, the first big prize opening third abnormal prize designation command is set as a set because the game ball is clogged in the first big prize opening 8, and the detection time of 1 second described above is set. In order to prevent misjudgment, the clogging is resolved after the elapse of time, and the first grand prize opening detection sensor 8a may detect a game ball or may be erroneously detected due to noise or failure. In step 202-18 as the threshold value, “60 seconds” is set as the determination time of the first big winning mouth abnormal winning determination timer during firing, and in step S202-22, the first large value during firing. It is set to "3" as the determination value of the prize outlet abnormal prize.
Further, “60 seconds” and “3” are not limited to these values, and may be values that can prevent erroneous determination of the first big prize opening and the third abnormal prize.
It should be noted that this first grand prize opening detection signal input process corresponds to a determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined predetermined relationship of the present invention is satisfied.

  Next, the second big prize opening detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S203-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second big prize opening detection signal is inputted from the second big prize opening detection sensor 9a. If it is determined that the second big prize opening detection signal is not input, the process proceeds to step S203-12, and if it is determined that the second big prize opening detection signal is input, the process moves to step S203-2.

  In step S203-2, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the big prize winning ball counter used for the winning ball and the abnormality determination second big winning prize winning counter used to determine whether or not there is an abnormal winning. Update.

  In step S203-3, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the game ball is being fired, that is, whether or not the game ball firing flag is ON in the game ball firing flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the main CPU 101a determines that the game ball is being launched, the process proceeds to step S203-13, and if the main CPU 101a determines that the game ball is not being launched, the process proceeds to step S203-4.

  In step S203-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is during the big prize opening validity period. If the main CPU 101a determines that it is during the big prize opening validity period, it moves the process to step 203-5, and if it determines that it is not during the big prize opening validity period, it moves the process to step S203-6.

  In step S203-5, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls won in the first grand prize winning port 8 and the second major winning prize port 9 and updates them.

  In step S203-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the unfired second big prize opening abnormal winning determination flag is ON in the non-firing second big prize opening abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. . If the main CPU 101a determines that the second big prize opening abnormal winning determination flag is not turned on during firing, the process proceeds to step S203-9, and the second big prize opening abnormal winning determination flag is not turned on during firing. If determined, the process proceeds to step S203-7.

  In step S203-7, the main CPU 101a turns on the unreleased second big prize opening abnormal winning determination flag in the unreleased second big prize opening abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S203-8, the main CPU 101a determines that the second major prize winning port abnormal winning determination timer counter in the main RAM 101c has not been fired in the second major winning prize abnormal winning determination time (in this embodiment, 2 seconds = 500). Set the counter).

  In step S <b> 203-9, the main CPU 101 a determines whether or not the unfired second big prize opening abnormal winning determination time has elapsed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second major winning opening abnormal winning determination time has not elapsed yet, the process moves to step S203-10, and if the second major winning opening abnormal winning determination time has not elapsed yet. If it determines, the said 2nd big winning opening detection signal input process will be complete | finished.

  In step S203-10, the main CPU 101a turns off the unfired second big prize opening abnormal winning determination flag in the unlaunched second big prize opening abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S203-11, the main CPU 101a sets the second big prize opening first abnormal prize designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer), and ends the second big prize opening detection signal input process.

  In step S203-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the unfired second big prize opening abnormal winning determination flag is ON in the unlaunched second big prize opening abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. . If the main CPU 101a determines that the second big prize opening abnormal winning determination flag is not turned on during firing, the process proceeds to step S203-9, and the second big prize opening abnormal winning determination flag is not turned on during firing. If it is determined, the second big prize opening detection signal input process is terminated.

In step S203-9, when it is determined that the second major winning opening abnormal winning determination time has not elapsed during the launch, the second large winning opening first abnormal winning designation command is set in step S203-11. In order to prevent the game ball from being erroneously determined when the first ball of the game ball newly launched from the state in which the game ball has been determined to be unlaunched enters the second grand prize opening 9, “2 seconds” is set as the detection time from the detection by the second big prize opening detection sensor 9 a to the detection by the out-ball detection sensor 52.
In addition, this “2 seconds” is not limited to this value because the detection time differs depending on the positional relationship between the second big prize opening detection sensor 9a and the out ball detection sensor 52, and is not limited to this value. Any value that can prevent erroneous determination of one abnormal winning is acceptable.

  In step S203-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is during the grand prize winning period. If the main CPU 101a determines that it is during the big prize opening validity period, it moves the process to step 203-14, and if it determines that it is not during the big prize opening validity period, it moves the process to step S203-15.

  In step S203-14, the main CPU 101a updates the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls won in the first grand prize winning port 8 and the second major winning prize port 9 by adding "1", The second big prize opening detection signal input process is terminated.

  In step S203-15, the main CPU 101a sets a second big prize winning port abnormal winning counter during firing for counting the game balls won in the second big prize winning opening 9 during the game ball launching and during the special winning opening invalid period. Update by adding "1".

  In step S203-16, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the firing second big prize winning port abnormal winning determination flag is ON in the firing second big winning prize abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second big prize opening abnormal winning determination flag is on during firing, the process moves to step S203-19, and if the second big prize opening abnormal winning judgment flag is not on during firing. If determined, the process proceeds to step S203-17.

  In step S203-17, the main CPU 101a turns on the second major winning port abnormal winning determination flag being fired in the second grand winning port abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S203-18, the main CPU 101a sets the second big prize winning port abnormal winning determination timer counter in the main RAM 101c during firing to the second big prize winning port abnormal winning determination time (in this embodiment, 60 seconds = 15000 counters). Set.

  In step S203-19, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second major winning opening abnormal winning determination time has elapsed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second major winning opening abnormal winning determination time has elapsed during firing, the process proceeds to step S203-20, and determines that the second major winning opening abnormal winning determination time has not elapsed during firing. Then, the process proceeds to step S203-22.

  In step S203-20, the main CPU 101a turns off the firing second big prize winning port abnormal winning determination flag in the firing second big winning prize abnormal winning decision flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S203-21, the main CPU 101a clears the second grand prize winning port abnormal winning counter during firing, and ends the second big prize winning port detection signal input process.

  In step S <b> 203-22, the main CPU 101 a determines whether or not the value of the second major winning opening abnormal winning counter during launch is “3”. If the main CPU 101a determines that the value of the second major winning mouth abnormal winning counter during launch is “3”, the process proceeds to step S203-23, and the value of the second major winning mouth abnormal winning counter during firing is “3”. If not, the second big prize opening detection signal input process is terminated.

  In step S203-23, the main CPU 101a turns off the firing second big prize winning port abnormal winning determination flag in the firing second big winning prize abnormal winning decision flag storage area.

  In step S203-24, the main CPU 101a sets the second big prize opening third abnormal winning designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer).

In step S203-19, it is determined that the second major winning opening abnormal winning determination time during firing has not elapsed, and in step S203-22, the second major winning opening abnormal winning counter during firing is “3”. In step S203-24, the second big prize opening third abnormal prize designation command is set as a set because the game ball is clogged in the second big prize opening 9, and the detection time of 1 second described above In order to prevent misjudgment, the clogging may be resolved after the elapse of time and the second grand prize opening detection sensor 9a may detect the game ball or may be erroneously detected due to noise or failure. In step 203-18 as the threshold value, “60 seconds” is set as the determination time of the second major winning mouth abnormal winning determination timer during discharge, and the second value during discharge is set in step S203-22. It is set to "3" as the determination value of the winning openings abnormal prize.
Also, “60 seconds” and “3” are not limited to these values, and may be any values that can prevent erroneous determination of the second big prize opening third abnormal prize.
It should be noted that this second grand prize opening detection signal input process corresponds to determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined predetermined relationship of the present invention is satisfied.

  Next, the first start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S204-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a first start port detection signal is input from the first start port detection sensor 6a. If it is determined that the first start port detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S204-17, and if it is determined that the second major winning port detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S204-2.

  In step S204-2, the first start opening winning ball counter and the abnormality determination first starting opening winning counter used for determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning are updated by adding "1". In step S204-3, The first starting port winning flag is turned ON in the first starting port winning flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S204-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the first special figure hold number counter for counting the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U1) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a terminates the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4, the first special chart in step S204-5 The counter value of the figure hold number counter is updated by adding “1”. Further, the main CPU 101a updates the first special symbol hold number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol hold display device 23 with special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. set.

  In step S204-6, the main CPU 101a acquires special determination information. The special determination information is each random number value indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number counter.

  In step S <b> 204-7, the main CPU 101 a performs a first preliminary determination based on a game ball entering the first start port 6. Here, the first preliminary determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the first prior determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number and the special figure variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol hold storage area, The first special figure variation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the first special figure fluctuation pattern as the first pre-determination before performing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (S313).

  In step S204-8, the main CPU 101a stores the special determination information acquired in step S204-6 in the first special symbol storage area.

  The first special symbol reserved storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 17A), and various random numbers are numbered in a storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. The data are stored in order starting from the smallest storage unit. Each storage unit has an area for each stored random number (see FIG. 17B).

  In step S204-9, the main CPU 101a stores the first start opening prize designation command corresponding to the first special figure variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. set.

  In step S204-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the game ball is being fired, that is, whether or not the game ball firing flag is ON in the game ball firing flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the main CPU 101a determines that the game ball is being fired, the first start port detection signal input process is terminated, and if it is determined that the game ball is not being fired, the process proceeds to step S204-11.

  In step S204-11, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the unstarted first starting port abnormal winning determination flag is ON in the unstarted first starting port abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the main CPU 101a determines that the first start port abnormal winning determination flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S204-14. If the main CPU 101a determines that the first starting port abnormal winning determination flag is not ON, The process moves to step S204-12.

  In step S204-12, the main CPU 101a turns on the unstarted first starting port abnormal winning determination flag in the unstarted first starting port abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S204-13, the main CPU 101a determines that the unstarted first starting port abnormal winning determination timer counter in the main RAM 101c is not being fired and the first starting port abnormal winning determination time (in this embodiment, 2 seconds = 500 counters). Set.

  In step S <b> 204-14, the main CPU 101 a determines whether or not the unstarted first start port abnormal winning determination time has elapsed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the first starting port abnormal winning determination time has not elapsed during unfired, the process proceeds to step S204-15, and determines that the first starting port abnormal winning determination time has not elapsed during non-firing. Then, the first start port detection signal input process is terminated.

  In step S204-15, the main CPU 101a turns off the unstarted first starting port abnormal winning determination flag in the unstarted first starting port abnormal winning determination flag storage area.

  In step S204-16, the main CPU 101a sets the first start port first abnormal winning designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer), and ends the first start port detection signal input process.

  In step S204-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the unstarted first starting port abnormal winning determination flag is ON in the unstarted first starting port abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the main CPU 101a determines that the unstarted first start port abnormal winning determination flag is ON, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S204-14, and if the unstarted unstarted first starting port abnormal winning determination flag is not ON. If it determines, the said 1st start port detection signal input process will be complete | finished.

In step S204-14, when it is determined that the first starting port abnormal winning determination time has elapsed during non-firing, the first starting port first abnormal winning designation command is set in step S204-16. In order to prevent erroneous determination when the first ball of the newly launched game ball wins the first start port 6 from the state in which the game ball is determined not to be fired, the game ball is first started. “2 seconds” is set as a detection time from detection by the mouth detection sensor 6a to detection by the out-sphere detection sensor 52.
The “2 seconds” is not limited to this value because the detection time differs depending on the positional relationship between the first start port detection sensor 6a and the out ball detection sensor 52. The first start port first abnormality is not limited to this value. Any value that can prevent erroneous determination of winning is acceptable.
Note that this first start port detection signal input process corresponds to determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined predetermined relationship of the present invention is satisfied.

  Next, the second start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIGS.

In step S205-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a second start port detection signal is input from the second start port detection sensor 7a. If it is determined that the second start port detection signal is not input, the process proceeds to step S205-19, and if it is determined that the second big prize opening detection signal is input, the process proceeds to step S205-2.

In step S205-2, the main CPU 101a updates the second start opening winning ball counter and the abnormality determination second starting opening winning counter used for determining whether or not there is an abnormal win by adding “1”, and step S205. At -3, the second start port winning flag is turned ON in the second start port winning flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S205-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the second special figure holding number counter for counting the second special figure holding number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4, the second special chart in step S205-5. The counter value of the figure hold number counter is updated by adding “1”. In step S205-5, the main CPU 101a updates the second special symbol hold number (U2) displayed on the second special symbol hold display device 24 to update the special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number. It is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S205-6, the main CPU 101a acquires special determination information.

  In step S205-7, the main CPU 101a performs a second preliminary determination based on the game ball entering the second start port 7. Here, the second prior determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the second prior determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special symbol hold storage area, A second special figure variation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the second special figure fluctuation pattern as the second pre-determination before performing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (S313).

  In step S205-8, the main CPU 101a stores the special determination information acquired in step S205-6 in the second special symbol holding storage area.

  The second special symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 17A), and various random numbers are numbered in a storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. The data are stored in order starting from the smallest storage unit. Each storage unit has an area for each stored random number (see FIG. 17B).

  In step S205-9, the main CPU 101a stores the second start opening winning designation command corresponding to the second special figure fluctuation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. set.

  In step S205-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the game ball is being fired, that is, whether or not the game ball firing flag is ON in the game ball firing flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the main CPU 101a determines that the game ball is being launched, the process proceeds to step S205-20. If the main CPU 101a determines that the game ball is not being launched, the process proceeds to step S205-11.

  In step S205-11, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is during the second start port effective period. If the main CPU 101a determines that it is during the second start port effective period, it moves the process to step S205-12, and if it determines that it is not during the second start port effective period, it moves the process to step S205-13.

The second start port effective period is a period from when the second start port 7 is controlled to the open state to when the second start port 7 is controlled to the closed state until one second has elapsed.
In addition, it is not until it is controlled from the open state to the closed state, but from the open state to the closed state until 1 second has passed, so that the game ball is in the second start port. If a game ball wins when the second start port is opened when the second start port is controlled to be closed, the game ball wins when the second start port is open, but the second start port detection sensor 7a receives the game ball. Before the detection, the second start port 7 is controlled to be in a closed state, and the game ball is won while the second start port 7 is in the open state. In order to prevent the addition, a detection time of 1 second is set after the closed state is controlled.
The detection time is not limited to 1 second, and may be any time that can prevent the detection from being added to the second starting-port abnormal winning counter during firing.

  In step S205-12, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the second start-entrance ball entry regulation counter and updates it.

  In step S205-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the unstarted second starting port abnormal winning determination flag is ON in the unstarted second starting port abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second starting port abnormal winning determination flag is not fired, the process proceeds to step S205-16. If the second starting port abnormal winning determination flag is not turned on, the main CPU 101a does not turn on. If determined, the process proceeds to step S205-14.

  In step S205-14, the main CPU 101a turns on the unstarted second starting port abnormal winning determination flag in the unstarted second starting port abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S205-15, the main CPU 101a sets the second start port abnormal winning determination timer counter that is not fired in the main RAM 101c to the second starting port abnormal winning determination time that is not fired (in this embodiment, 2 seconds = 500 counters). Set.

  In step S205-16, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the unstarted second start-up port abnormal winning determination time has elapsed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second start-up port abnormal winning determination time has not elapsed during unfired, the process proceeds to step S205-17, and determines that the second start-port abnormal winning determination time has not elapsed during non-firing. Then, the second start port detection signal input process is terminated.

  In step S205-17, the main CPU 101a turns off the unstarted second start port abnormal winning determination flag in the unstarted second starting port abnormal winning determination flag storage area.

  In step S205-18, the main CPU 101a sets the second start port first abnormal winning designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer), and ends the second start port detection signal input process.

  In step S205-19, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the unstarted second starting port abnormal winning determination flag is ON in the unstarted second starting port abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second starting port abnormal winning determination flag is not fired, the process proceeds to step S205-16. If the second starting port abnormal winning determination flag is not turned on, the main CPU 101a does not turn on. If it determines, the said 2nd starting port detection signal input process will be complete | finished.

In step S205-16, if it is determined that the second start-up port abnormal winning determination time has elapsed during non-firing, the second start-up port first abnormal winning designation command is set in step S205-18. In order to prevent erroneous determination when the first ball of the newly launched game ball wins the second start port 7 from the state in which the game ball is determined not to be fired, the game ball is second-started. “2 seconds” is set as the detection time from detection by the mouth detection sensor 7a to detection by the out-sphere detection sensor 52.
Further, this “2 seconds” is not limited to this value because the detection time differs depending on the positional relationship between the second start port detection sensor 7a and the out ball detection sensor 52. The second start port first abnormality is not limited to this value. Any value that can prevent erroneous determination of winning is acceptable.

  In step S205-20, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is during the second start port effective period. If the main CPU 101a determines that it is during the second start port effective period, it moves the process to step S205-21, and if it determines that it is not during the second start port effective period, it moves the process to step S205-22.

  In step S205-21, the main CPU 101a updates the second start port entry regulation counter by adding “1”, and ends the second start port detection signal input process.

  In step S205-22, the main CPU 101a sets a second starting-port abnormal winning counter during firing for counting the gaming balls won in the second starting port 7 during the game ball firing and during the second starting-port ineffective period. 1 ”is added and updated.

  In step S205-23, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the firing second starting port abnormal winning determination flag is ON in the firing second starting port abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second starting port abnormal winning determination flag is on during firing, the process proceeds to step S205-26 and determines that the second starting port abnormal winning determination flag is not on during firing. Then, the process proceeds to step S205-24.

  In step S205-24, the main CPU 101a turns on the firing second starting port abnormal winning determination flag in the firing second starting port abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S205-25, the main CPU 101a sets the firing second starting port abnormal winning determination time counter (60 seconds = 15000 counter in the present embodiment) in the firing second starting port abnormal winning determination timer counter of the main RAM 101c. To do.

  In step S205-26, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second start-up port abnormal winning determination time has elapsed during firing. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second starting opening abnormal winning determination time has elapsed during firing, the process proceeds to step S205-27, and if the main CPU 101a determines that the second starting opening abnormal winning determination time has not elapsed, The processing is moved to S205-29.

  In step S205-27, the main CPU 101a turns off the firing second starting port abnormal winning determination flag in the firing second starting port abnormal winning determination flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S205-28, the main CPU 101a clears the second starting port abnormal winning counter during firing, and ends the second starting port detection signal input process.

  In step S205-29, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the value of the second starting-port abnormal winning counter during firing is “3”. If the main CPU 101a determines that the value of the second starting port abnormal winning counter during firing is “3”, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S205-30, and if the value of the second starting port abnormal winning counter during firing is “3”. If it is determined that there is no, the second start port detection signal input process is terminated.

  In step S205-30, the main CPU 101a turns off the firing second starting port abnormal winning determination flag in the firing second starting port abnormal winning determination flag storage area.

  In step S205-31, the main CPU 101a sets the second start port third abnormal winning designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer).

In step S205-26, it is determined that the second starting port abnormal winning determination time during firing has not elapsed, and in step S205-29, it is determined that the second starting port abnormal winning counter during firing is “3”. In this case, in step S205-31, the second start port third abnormal winning designation command is set after the game ball is clogged in the second start port 7 and the detection time of 1 second described above has elapsed. It is possible that the clogging is eliminated and the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball outside the second start port effective period, or it may be erroneously detected due to noise or failure. In step 205-25 as a threshold value to prevent the occurrence of the second start port abnormal winning determination timer during firing, the determination time is "60 seconds" in step S205-29. Te is set to "3" as the determination value of the second start hole anomaly winning during firing.
Further, “60 seconds” and “3” are not limited to these values, and may be values that can prevent erroneous determination of the second start opening third abnormal winning.
Note that this second start port detection signal input processing corresponds to determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined predetermined relationship of the present invention has been established.

  Next, the winning gate detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S206-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a first winning gate detection signal is input from the first winning gate detection sensor 10a. If it is determined that the first winning gate detection signal is not input, the process proceeds to step S206-7. If it is determined that the first winning gate detection signal is input, the process proceeds to step S206-2.

  In step S206-2, the main CPU 101a sets the first winning gate winning designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer).

  In step S <b> 206-3, the main CPU 101 a determines whether or not the counter value of the normal symbol hold number counter that counts the normal symbol hold number (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the winning gate detection signal input process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is smaller than 4, the process proceeds to step S206-4. .

  In step S <b> 206-4, the main CPU 101 a adds “1” to the counter value (G) of the common figure hold number counter and updates it. In step S206-4, the main CPU 101a updates the normal symbol hold number (G) displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25 in order to update the normal symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in the main RAM 101c. Set to area.

  In step S206-5, the main CPU 101a acquires normal determination information. The normal determination information is each random number value indicated by the hit determination random number counter, the normal symbol determination random number counter, and the ordinary variation pattern determination random number counter.

  In step S206-6, the main CPU 101a stores the normal determination information acquired in step S206-5 in the normal symbol holding storage area, and ends the winning gate detection signal input process.

  The normal symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 17 (c)), and various random numbers are stored in a storage unit having a small number among storage units in which random numbers are not stored. It is memorized in order. In each storage unit, an area is divided for each stored random number (see FIG. 17D).

  In step S206-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a second winning gate detection signal is input from the second winning gate detection sensor 11a. If it is determined that the second winning gate detection signal has not been input, the winning gate detection signal input process is terminated. If it is determined that the second winning gate detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S206-8.

  In step S206-8, the main CPU 101a sets the second prize gate prize designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer).

  Next, the out sphere detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In step S207-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not an out-sphere detection signal is input from the out-sphere detection sensor 52. If the main CPU 101a determines that the out-sphere detection signal has been input, it moves the process to step S207-4. If it determines that the out-sphere detection signal has not been input, it moves the process to step S207-2.

  In step S207-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the game ball launch determination time has elapsed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the game ball launch determination time has elapsed, it moves the process to step S207-3, and if it determines that the game ball launch determination time has not elapsed, ends the out-ball detection signal input processing.

  In step S207-3, the main CPU 101a turns off the game ball firing flag in the game ball firing flag storage area of the main RAM 101c, and ends the out-ball detection signal input processing. This game ball firing flag determines whether or not the game ball is firing (step S201-3, step S202-3, step S203-3, step S204-10, step S205-10, step S208-2, step This flag is used for S209-2).

  In step S207-4, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value of the display out-sphere counter in the main RAM 101c and updates it. The display out sphere counter counts the number of out spheres up to a predetermined sphere (10 balls in the present embodiment).

  In step S207-5, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value of the abnormality determination out-sphere counter in the main RAM 101c and updates it. The abnormality determining out ball counter counts the number of out balls to a predetermined ball (100 balls in the present embodiment).

  In step S207-6, the main CPU 101a turns on the gaming ball firing flag in the gaming ball firing flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S207-7, the main CPU 101a resets the game ball launch determination time (10 seconds = 2500 counter in the present embodiment) of the game ball launch determination timer counter of the main RAM 101c. The game ball launch determination timer counter is a counter that measures the time from when an out ball is detected until the next out ball is detected, and is thus reset each time an out ball is detected.

  In step S207-8, the main CPU 101a determines that the non-launched general prize opening abnormal winning determination flag, the unreleased first big prize opening abnormal winning determination flag, the non-firing second big prize opening abnormal winning determination flag, and the unfired The first starting port abnormal winning determination flag and the unstarted second starting port abnormal winning determination flag are turned OFF.

  In step S207-9, the main CPU 101a sets an out-sphere detection designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer).

  In step S207-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the value of the display out ball counter in the main RAM 101c is “10”. If the main CPU 101a determines that the value of the display out sphere counter is “10”, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S207-11, and determines that the value of the display out sphere counter is not “10”. The processing is moved to 13.

  In step S207-11, the main CPU 101a displays out-ball display data for displaying on the out-ball detection display device 28 that ten out-balls have been detected and for outputting to the game information display device 700 or the hall computer. Is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  In this manner, out sphere display data is set every time ten out spheres are detected, and out sphere detection display is performed based on the out sphere display data in the out sphere detection display display control data creation (step S600-10) described later. Display control data is generated, and the out sphere detection display display control data is output to the out sphere detection display device 28 by a display device output process (step S700-2) described later, and the out sphere detection display device 28 is turned on. Therefore, the store clerk can confirm whether or not the out ball is normally detected.

  In addition, external signal output data is created based on the out-sphere display data in external signal output data creation (step S600-11), which will be described later, and the external signal output data is stored in the game information by port output processing (step S700-1), which will be described later. Since the data is output to the display device 700 or the hall computer, the game store side can grasp the operating status of the game machine from this out information and use it for management of the game store. In addition, the out information can be used to determine the operating status of the gaming machine and to determine the selection of the vehicle.

  In step S207-12, the main CPU 101a clears the display-out ball counter in the main RAM 101c.

  In step S207-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the value of the abnormality determination out ball counter in the main RAM 101c is "100". If it is determined that the value of the abnormality determination out ball counter is “100”, the process proceeds to step S207-14, and if it is determined that the value of the abnormality determination out ball counter is not “100”, the out ball detection signal The input process is terminated.

  In step S207-14, the main CPU 101a confirms the current gaming state, and in step S207-15, selects an abnormal winning determination table corresponding to the gaming state.

  In step S207-16, the main CPU 101a compares the value of the abnormality determination general winning award winning counter in the main RAM 101c with the abnormal winning determination table selected in step S207-15, and the value of the abnormality determining general winning opening winning counter is determined. It is determined whether the winning ball is exceeded. If the main CPU 101a determines that the value of the abnormality determination general winning opening winning counter exceeds the prescribed winning ball, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S207-17, and the value of the abnormality determining general winning opening winning counter changes the winning specified ball. If it is determined that it has not exceeded, the process proceeds to step S207-18.

  In step S207-17, the main CPU 101a sets the general winning opening second abnormal winning designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer).

  In step S207-18, the main CPU 101a collates the value of the abnormality determination first big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 101c with the abnormal winning judgment table selected in step S207-15, and makes the abnormality judgment first big prize winning prize. It is determined whether the value of the counter exceeds the winning stipulated ball. If the main CPU 101a determines that the value of the abnormality determination first big prize winning prize counter exceeds the prescribed prize ball, the process moves to step S207-19, and the value of the abnormality determination first big prize winning prize winning counter is determined. If it is determined that the specified winning ball is not exceeded, the process proceeds to step S207-20.

  In step S207-19, the main CPU 101a sets the first big prize opening second abnormal prize designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer).

  In step S207-20, the main CPU 101a collates the value of the abnormality determination second big prize winning prize winning counter in the main RAM 101c with the abnormal prize determination table selected in step S207-15, and makes the abnormality determination second big prize winning prize winning. It is determined whether the value of the counter exceeds the winning stipulated ball. If the main CPU 101a determines that the value of the abnormality determination second big prize opening winning counter exceeds the prescribed winning ball, the process moves to step S207-21, and the value of the abnormality determination second big winning opening winning prize counter is If it is determined that the specified winning ball is not exceeded, the process proceeds to step S207-22.

  In step S207-21, the main CPU 101a sets the second big prize opening second abnormal winning designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer).

  In step S207-22, the main CPU 101a collates the value of the first start opening prize counter for abnormality determination in the main RAM 101c with the abnormal winning determination table selected in step S207-15, and sets the first start opening prize counter for abnormality determination. It is determined whether or not the value exceeds the winning stipulated sphere. If the main CPU 101a determines that the value of the abnormality determination first starting opening prize counter exceeds the prescribed winning ball, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S207-23, and the value of the abnormality determining first starting opening prize counter is determined to be the winning regulation. If it is determined that it does not exceed the sphere, the process proceeds to step S207-24.

  In step S207-23, the main CPU 101a sets the first start port second abnormal winning designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer).

  In step S207-24, the main CPU 101a collates the value of the abnormality determination second start opening prize counter in the main RAM 101c with the abnormality winning determination table selected in step S207-15, and sets the abnormality determination second start opening prize counter. It is determined whether or not the value exceeds the winning stipulated sphere. If the main CPU 101a determines that the value of the abnormality determination second start-port winning counter exceeds the specified winning ball, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S207-25, and the value of the abnormality determination second start-port winning counter is determined to be the winning specification. If it is determined that it does not exceed the sphere, the process proceeds to step S207-26.

  In step S207-25, the main CPU 101a sets the second start port second abnormal winning designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer).

  In step S207-26, the main CPU 101a clears the abnormality determination out ball counter in the main RAM 101c.

  In step S207-27, the main CPU 101a performs the abnormality determination general winning award winning counter, the abnormality determining first large winning opening winning counter, the abnormality determining second large winning opening winning counter, and the abnormality determining first start. The mouth winning counter and the abnormality determination second starting mouth winning counter are cleared, and the out ball detection signal input processing is terminated.

In the out sphere detection signal input process, a display out sphere counter and an abnormality determination out sphere counter are provided and counted (step S207-4 and step S207-5). A counter may also be used. For example, the out sphere display data is set every time the out sphere is counted by a value that is a multiple of 10 (“10”, “20”... “100”). The abnormal winning determination process (steps S207-14 to S207-27) may be performed and the counter may be cleared. When the out ball is counted up to “10”, the out ball display data is displayed. The counter may be cleared and the abnormality determination process (steps S207-14 to S207-27) may be performed when the counter is cleared for the tenth time.
It should be noted that the determination means for determining whether or not the out-ball detection signal input process has detected the game medium of the present invention and the determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined predetermined relationship of the present invention has been established. Equivalent to.

  Next, the magnetic detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S208-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a magnetic detection signal is input from the magnetic detection sensors 81a to 84a. If the main CPU 101a determines that a magnetic detection signal has been input, it moves the process to step S208-2. If it determines that no magnetic detection signal has been input, the main CPU 101a ends the magnetic detection signal input processing.

  In step S208-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the game ball is being fired, that is, whether or not the game ball firing flag is ON in the game ball firing flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the main CPU 101a determines that the game ball is being fired, the process proceeds to step S208-3. If the main CPU 101a determines that the game ball is not being fired, the magnetic detection signal input process is terminated.

  In step S208-3, the main CPU 101a sets a magnetic detection abnormality designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer), and ends the magnetic detection signal input process.

  Next, the vibration detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S209-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a vibration detection signal is input from the vibration detection sensor 85a. When determining that the vibration detection signal has been input, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S209-2, and when determining that the vibration detection signal has not been input, the main CPU 101a ends the vibration detection input process.

  In step S209-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the game ball is being fired, that is, whether or not the game ball firing flag is ON in the game ball firing flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the main CPU 101a determines that the game ball is being fired, the process proceeds to step S209-3. If the main CPU 101a determines that the game ball is not being fired, the vibration detection input process is terminated.

  In step S209-3, the main CPU 101a sets a vibration detection abnormality designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer), and ends the vibration detection signal input process.

  The special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S301, the value of the special figure special electricity processing data is loaded, and the branch destination address is referred to from the special figure special electric treatment data loaded in step S302. ), The process moves to the special symbol variation process (step S320) if the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, and the special symbol stop process (step S330) if the special symbol special electric treatment data = 2. If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process moves to the big hit game process (step S340), and if the special figure special electric treatment data = 4, the process moves to the small hit game process (step S350). If the process data = 5, the process goes to the jackpot game end process (step S360). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 41.

  The special symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIGS. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol variation display is in progress, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol storage determination process.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special figure holding number (U2) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4. If it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. Move processing.

  In step S310-3, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the second special symbol hold count counter by subtracting “1”, and in step S310-6, the data stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is shifted. Processing is performed, and each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the data stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area. The data stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the special symbol common storage area (the 0th storage unit) common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The data stored in the 0 storage unit is deleted. Thereby, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted. Furthermore, the stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first special figure hold number (U1) is 1 or more. If the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the first special figure hold number (U1) is 1 or more, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S310-5.

  The main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the first special symbol reservation number counter by subtracting “1” in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, shifts the data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area. I do.

  For example, data stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the data stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (the 0th storage unit), and the data stored in the 0th storage unit is erased. Is done. Thereby, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted. Furthermore, the stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  In addition, in order to update the 1st special figure reservation number (U1) or the 2nd special figure reservation number (U2) with the data shift process (the suspension digestion process) in step S310-6, specifically, Sets the first and second special symbol hold display data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to change the display contents of the special symbol hold display devices 23 and 24 corresponding to the type of the start port related to the data. The hold display data includes information on the type of the special symbol hold display device and information on the special symbol hold number (U1 or U2).

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted in priority to the first special symbol reservation storage area in steps S310-2 to S310-6, but the game ball enters the start port. The first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted in the order of the balls, or the first special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted with priority over the second special symbol reserved storage area. May be.

  If it is determined in step S310-4 that the first special symbol hold number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to steps S319-1 to S319-3 to set the customer waiting state. Wait state setting processing is performed. The customer waiting state refers to a state in which special symbol variation display and special games are not executed.

  As the customer waiting state setting process, the main CPU 101a first determines whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area in step S319-1. When the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol storage determination process, and determines the customer waiting state determination in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area. If the flag “01H” is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2.

  In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area because the customer waiting state is not repeatedly set.

  In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets a customer waiting state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol memory determination process.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101a executes jackpot determination processing based on the data shifted in step S310-6 and newly stored in the 0th storage unit.

  Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether the jackpot determination process is performed based on a game ball entering the first start port 6.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that it is the first start port 6 in step S311-1, the first jackpot determination table is selected in step S311-2. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101a determines that it is not the first start port 6 (is the second start port 7) in step S311-1, the second jackpot determination table is selected in step S311-3.

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. Here, the fact that the flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area means that the current jackpot winning probability is a high-probability gaming state.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-5, the main CPU 101a further selects “from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3”. The “high probability first jackpot determination table” or the “high probability second jackpot determination table” is selected.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101a determines that the flag is not turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-6, the "low probability second number" is further selected from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. “1 jackpot determination table” or “low probability second jackpot determination table” is selected.

  In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a shifts the jackpot determination random number in the 0th storage unit after being shifted in step S310-6 to the “high probability jackpot selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6”. It is checked against the “determination table” or “low probability jackpot determination table” to determine whether it is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”, and the jackpot determination processing ends.

  When the big hit determination process ends, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 33, and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, a special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process. Here, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is “jackpot”. If it is determined that the game is a “hit”, the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for winning a jackpot in step S312-5. If it is not determined that it is a “hit”, step S312— The process is moved to 2.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination is “small hit”. When it is determined that “small hit” is selected, the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for winning a small hit in step S312-6. The process moves to step S312-3.

  In step S <b> 312-3, the main CPU 101 a performs reach determination. Specifically, the reach determination random number value shifted in step S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit is checked against the reach determination table.

  In step S <b> 312-4, the main CPU 101 a determines whether or not “reach” is determined as a result of the reach determination in step S <b> 312-3. If it is determined that “reach is present”, the process proceeds to step S312-7, and a special symbol determination table for reach loss is selected. On the other hand, if it is not “reach”, that is, it is determined that “no reach”, the process proceeds to step S312-8 to select a special symbol determination table for loss without reach.

  In step S312-9, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the processing based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 6 or second start port 7), and step S312- At 10, based on the type of the start port, either the special symbol determination table for the first start port or the special symbol determination table for the second start port is selected.

  In step S312-111, the main CPU 101a performs special symbol determination for comparing the special symbol determination random number value shifted in step S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit with the selected special symbol determination table.

  In step S312-2, a special effect design designation command is determined based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-11, and the determined special effect design designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 101a determines in step S312-13 stop symbol data related to the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol stop symbol data") based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-11, that is, the special symbol. The determined special figure stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  As will be described later, when the special figure stop pattern data is determined in the special figure change pattern determination process of FIG. 36, the determined special figure stop symbol data is displayed in the special symbol stop process of FIG. When determining “special symbol” or “short win game”, etc., when determining the opening / closing mode of the first big winning port 8 and the second big winning port 9 in the big hit game processing of FIG. Also used for.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a collates the special figure stop symbol data with the game condition data determination table, sets the game condition data, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a confirms the high probability flag storage area, and selects a game condition data determination table according to the current status of the jackpot winning probability. Next, the special condition stop symbol data is compared with the selected game condition data determination table to determine the game condition data, and set in the game condition data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  When the special symbol determination process is completed as described above, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 33, and performs the special symbol variation pattern determination process in step S313. In the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process, a special figure fluctuation pattern including information on the special figure fluctuation time and the effect type of the fluctuating effect described later, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination, and the result of the reach determination is generated. decide.

  The special figure variation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a refers to ON / OFF of a high-probability flag, which will be described later, and ON / OFF of a short-time flag, to determine the current gaming state (high probability gaming state / low probability gaming state, and (Time saving gaming state / non-time saving gaming state) is checked, and a special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state is selected.

  In step S313-2, the main CPU 101a checks the special figure stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c, and determines a special figure variation pattern determination table based on the special figure stop symbol data. This is because in the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern determination table divided according to the gaming state is further divided by special figure stop symbol data.

  If the special figure stop symbol data is “19H” or “29H”, that is, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss without reach, the special figure pending number (U1orU2) related to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process is further determined. ) To determine the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. This is because, in the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern determination table related to the reachless loss is also divided according to the special figure reservation number.

  If the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is determined, the main CPU 101a performs special figure fluctuation pattern determination in step S313-3. Specifically, a special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number is collated with the determined special figure fluctuation pattern determination table to determine a special figure fluctuation pattern.

  When the main CPU 101a determines the special symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 33. In step S310-7, the special CPU variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern is transmitted for the effect in the main RAM 101c. Set in the data storage area. The special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 102. Upon receiving this command, the production control board 102 recognizes that the special symbol fluctuation display starts, and finally designates the special figure fluctuation pattern designation. Based on the command, the variation effect pattern associated with the content of the variation effect is determined.

  In step S310-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the gaming conditions at the start of the variable symbol display of the special symbol, and sets a gaming state designation command reflecting the state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. .

  In step S310-9, the main CPU 101a sets the special figure change time (see FIGS. 13 and 14) associated with the special figure change pattern in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S110.

  In step S310-10, the main CPU 101a sets special figure fluctuation display data for the special symbol fluctuation display on the first special symbol display apparatus 20 or the second special symbol display apparatus 21. The special figure variation display data includes information such as the type of the special symbol display device to be operated, the variation display mode, and the variation time.

  In step S310-11, the main CPU 101a sets a flag “00H” in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, that is, clears the customer waiting state determination flag storage area. In step S310-12, the special figure special electric processing data = 1 is set, and the special symbol memory determination process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol variation display is terminated in step S310-9, in other words, whether or not the set special symbol variation time has elapsed (special). Game timer counter = 0). As a result, if it is determined that the special symbol variation display does not end, the special symbol variation processing is terminated, and the next subroutine is executed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the variation display of the special symbol is finished, in step S320-2, the main CPU 101a produces a special effect symbol stop designation command to notify the effect control board 102 that the variation display of the special symbol is terminated. Set in the transmission data storage area.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 101a displays special figure stop display data based on the special figure stop symbol data set in step S312-13 in order to stop and display the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 in step S320-3. Set. Thereby, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player. In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time required for special symbol stop display (hereinafter referred to as "special figure stop time"; for example, 0.8 seconds = 200 counters) to the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S110.

  In step S320-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 in the special figure special electricity processing data, and in step S320-6, turns off the first starting opening prize flag or the second starting opening prize flag, and the special symbol variation process. Exit.

  The special symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG. First, the main CPU 101a first determines whether or not the special symbol stop display ends in step S330-1, in other words, the special figure stop time set in the special game timer counter in step S320-4 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (special game timer counter = 0?). As a result, if it is determined that the special symbol stop display does not end, the special symbol stop processing is ended. If it is determined that the special symbol stop display ends, the process proceeds to step S330-2.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the time reduction flag storage area. The fact that the flag is ON in the time-short flag storage area means that the current state is the time-short game state. If the flag is turned on in the time reduction flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-3. If the flag is turned off in the time reduction flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-8.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 101a sets “1” from the counter value of the time-short game state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of special symbol change display according to the time-short game state (J: hereinafter referred to as “time-short game state remaining number of times”). The calculated value (J-1) obtained by subtracting is stored as the remaining time-saving gaming state count (J).

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the remaining time-saving gaming state count (J) = 0. If the remaining time-saving gaming state (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-5. If the remaining time-short gaming state remaining number (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-8.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the time reduction flag storage area. It should be noted that the fact that the short time gaming state remaining number (J) is “0” means that the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of times (Ja) in the short time gaming state. Means to end.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a clears the abnormality determining out ball counter in the main RAM 101c.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a performs the abnormality determination general winning award winning counter, the abnormality determining first large winning opening winning counter, the abnormality determining second large winning opening winning counter, and the abnormality determining first start. Clear the entrance prize counter and the second start entrance prize counter for abnormality determination.

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. The fact that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area means that the current state is a high probability gaming state. If the flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-9. If the flag is OFF in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-12.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a displays the counter value of the high-probability gaming state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of display of the special symbol variation display according to the high-probability gaming state (X: hereinafter referred to as “high probability gaming state remaining number of times”) The operation value (X−1) obtained by subtracting “1” from the value is stored as a new high probability gaming state remaining number (X).

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) = 0. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-11. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S330-12.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. Note that the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) is “0” means that the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of executable times (Xa) in the high probability gaming state, and the special symbol based on the “high probability” state. This means that the fluctuation display of is finished.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, and sets a game state designation command indicating the game state in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol stop process is “jackpot”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the jackpot special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 16, 20 to 25). To do. If it is determined that the jackpot special symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S330-16. If the jackpot special symbol is not determined, the process proceeds to step S330-14.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol stop process is “small hit”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the small hit special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 17 to 18). If it is determined that the symbol is a small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-22. If it is not determined to be a small bonus special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-15.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a sets 0 to the special symbol special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG.

  In step S330-16, the main CPU 101a sets 3 in the special figure special electricity processing data, and in step S330-17, the game condition flag storage area (time-short flag storage area and high probability flag storage area), the high probability gaming state remaining. The variation counter and the short time gaming state remaining variation counter are reset.

  In step S330-18, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol stop process is “short win”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special figure stop symbol data stored in the special figure stop symbol data storage area is 16. If the main CPU 101a determines that it is “short hit”, it moves the process to step S330-21, and if it determines that it is not “short hit”, it moves the process to step S330-19.

  In step S330-19, the main CPU 101a clears the abnormality determining out ball counter in the main RAM 101c.

  In step S330-20, the main CPU 101a performs the abnormality determination general winning award winning counter, the abnormality determining first large winning opening winning counter, the abnormality determining second large winning opening winning counter, and the abnormality determining first start. Clear the entrance prize counter and the second start entrance prize counter for abnormality determination.

In step S330-21, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the opening time corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol data in the special game timer counter, and ends the special symbol stop process. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S110.
Further, in order to display the number of round games of the special game on the round number display device 26, the round number display data indicating the number of round games and the right-handed display device 27 while the special game is being performed. Is displayed in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S330-22, the main CPU 101a sets 4 in the special figure special electricity processing data, and moves the process to step S330-21.

  The jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently opening. Here, the term “opening” refers to a period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (the first opening of the first big winning opening 8 or the second big winning opening 9). If it is determined that the current opening is being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is determined that the current opening is not currently performed, the process proceeds to S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the set opening time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, the next subroutine is executed, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3. .

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, according to the special figure stop symbol data, which jackpot is confirmed, a jackpot opening / closing control table corresponding to the jackpot type is selected and set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Specifically, in accordance with the special figure stop symbol data, the first prize winning opening / closing control table for the first jackpot game (game per first length), the second winning prize opening / closing control for the second jackpot game (game per second length) Table, third prize winning game opening / closing control table for third jackpot game (game per third head), fourth winning jack opening / closing control table for fourth jackpot game (game per fourth head), fifth jackpot game (game per fifth head) ) Large winning opening opening / closing control table for 6) or 6th big winning game (short winning game) large winning opening opening / closing control table is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Next, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area and stores the value. Since the round game has not been executed at the time of step S340-3, the main CPU 101a stores “1” in the round game count storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special prize opening process. Specifically, “1” is added to the value stored in the special electric operation number storage area (special electric operation number (K)) and stored. Then, the main CPU 101a energizes the first big prize opening / closing solenoid 80B or the second big prize opening / closing solenoid 90B to open the first big prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9, so that the first big prize winning is achieved. The opening / closing solenoid energization start data or the second big prize opening / closing solenoid energization start data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Here, the main CPU 101a refers to the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step 340-3, and based on the round number (R) and the special operation number (K), The opening time of the second grand prize opening 9 (the operation time of the first big prize opening control device 80 and the second big prize opening control device 90) is set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S110.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1. If K = 1, a round designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area. This is because information indicating that the round game starts is transmitted to the effect control board 102. For example, at the time of the first release of the first round game per long game, “1” is set in the round game number storage area and “1” is set in the special operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating one round game is set in the effect transmission data storage area. On the other hand, if “1” is not set in the special operation number storage area, the big hit game process is terminated without setting the round designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. That is, since the case where K = 1 means the start of a round game, the main CPU 101a transmits a round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, an effect display is performed on the image display device 14 such as “ROUND1”.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here refers to the period from the completion of all previously set round games (after the final opening of the first grand prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9 is completed) to the end of the jackpot game. Refers to the period. Therefore, if it is determined that the current ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-17, where it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the current ending is not currently in progress, step S340-7 is performed. Move processing to.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first big prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9 is open, that is, the first big prize opening control device 80 or the second big prize opening control device. It is determined whether 90 is in operation. If the main CPU 101a determines that the first grand prize winning port 8 or the second grand prize winning port 9 is being opened, the first grand prize winning port 8 and the second grand prize winning port 9 are opened in step S340-8. It is determined whether or not the “opening end condition” for ending is satisfied. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value of the round winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, 9) in the round game, or the maximum open time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0) ) Is adopted. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S340-9. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the jackpot game process is ended.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the big prize opening closing process, the first big prize opening / closing solenoid energization stop data or the second big prize opening / closing solenoid energization stop data for closing the first big prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9 is stored in the sub RAM 102c. The first prize winning opening is set based on the current round number (R) and the special operation number (K) with reference to the big winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step 340-3. 8 or the closing time of the second grand prize opening 9 is set in the special game timer counter. Thereby, the 1st grand prize opening 8 or the 2nd big prize opening 9 is closed.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not one round game has ended. Specifically, in one round game, the special electric operation number (K) is the number of times of opening set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a specified number (for example, 9) ) Is terminated on the condition that it has been reached, it is determined whether or not such a condition is satisfied. If it is determined that one round game has been completed, the process proceeds to step S340-12. If it is determined that one round has not been completed, the jackpot game process is ended.

  When the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-7 that the first grand prize port 8 or the second grand prize port 9 is not open, a preset closing time has elapsed in step S340-11. It is determined whether or not. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-4.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special electricity operation number storage area is cleared and the counter value of the round winning counter is cleared.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game. When determining “Yes”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-15, and when determining “No”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the current round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area and stores the result.

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs jackpot game end processing. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area is reset.

  In step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, according to the special figure stop symbol data, the type of jackpot is confirmed, and an ending designation command associated with the type of jackpot transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets an ending time corresponding to the type of jackpot in the special game timer counter.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S340-18 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that it is not, the jackpot game process is terminated as it is.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 5 to the special figure special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to the jackpot game end process shown in FIG.

  The small hit game process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently open. If it is determined that it is currently opening, the process proceeds to step S350-2. If it is determined that it is not currently opening, the process proceeds to S350-5.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and when the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the opening time has not elapsed, the small hit game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S350-3.

  In step S350-3, the main CPU 101a performs a small hit game start process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a selects a big winning opening opening / closing control table corresponding to the type of the small hit based on the special figure stop symbol data, and determines the big winning opening opening / closing control table for the small hit game.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening opening process. In the big prize opening process, first, “1” is added to the value stored in the special operation number storage area (special operation number (K)) and stored. Then, the first big prize opening / closing solenoid energization start data for opening the first big prize opening 8 is set, and the current prize opening / closing control table determined in step 350-3 is referred to The opening time of the first big winning opening 8 based on the special electric operation number (K) is set in the special game timer counter, and the small hit game is ended.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. The ending here means a period from the end of the opening of the last first big winning opening 8 to the end of the small hit game. Therefore, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-13 when it is determined that it is currently ending, and moves to step S350-6 when it is determined that it is not currently ending.

  In step S350-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first big prize opening 8 is being opened. If the main CPU 101a determines that the first grand prize opening 8 is not open, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-10, and if the main CPU 101a determines that the first big prize opening 8 is open, the step In S350-7, it is determined whether or not an “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the first big winning opening 8 is satisfied. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value (C) of the round winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, 9), or the opening time of one time of the first big winning opening 8 has passed (special game) Timer counter = 0) is adopted. If the main CPU 101a determines that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S350-8, and if it determines that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process. To do.

  In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the big prize opening closing process, the first big prize opening / closing solenoid energization stop data for closing the first big prize opening 8 is set, and the large prize opening opening / closing control table determined in step 350-3 is referred to. Then, based on the current special electricity operation number (K), the closing time of the first big prize winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the first grand prize winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S350-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the small hit game ending condition is satisfied. The small hit game ending condition is the number of times of opening the first big winning opening 8 with a special electric operation number (K) set in advance, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a specified number (for example, 9) ). When the main CPU 101a determines that the small hit game end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S350-11. When the main CPU 101a determines that the small hit game end condition is not satisfied, the main hit game process. Exit.

  In step S350-11, the main CPU 101a sets “0” in the special operation number storage area and sets “0” in the counter value (C) of the round winning counter as the small hit game ending process. That is, the special operation number storage area and the round winning counter are cleared.

  In step S350-12, the main CPU 101a sets an ending designation command according to the type of small hits in the effect transmission data storage area based on the special figure stop symbol data, and the ending time according to the type of small hits. Is set in the special game timer counter.

  In step S350-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the closing time set in step S350-8 has elapsed. Note that the closing time is also determined by whether or not the special game timer counter = 0 as in the opening time. As a result, when the main CPU 101a determines that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process, and when it determines that the closing time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-4. .

  In step S350-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S350-14 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that the game is not done, the small hit game process is terminated.

  In step S350-14, the main CPU 101a sets “0” to the special symbol special electricity processing data, and moves the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG.

  The jackpot game end process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 101a loads game condition data.

  In step S360-2, the main CPU 101a collates the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is not turned ON, the process proceeds to step S360-4. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is ON, in step S360-3, the high probability flag is stored in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. (01H) is turned ON, and the executable number (Ja) (100 times in this embodiment) is set in the high probability gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S360-4, the main CPU 101a checks the loaded game condition data against the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not the time flag is turned on in the time flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is not turned ON, the process proceeds to step S360-6. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is turned ON, the time reduction flag (01H) is set in the time reduction flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S360-5. At the same time, the number of executable times (Ja) (100 times in the present embodiment) is set in the time-saving gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S360-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the played jackpot game is a long win. If the main CPU 101a determines that the played jackpot game is a long win, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S360-7. If the main CPU 101a determines that the played jackpot game is not a long win, the main CPU 101a performs a process to step S360-9. Move.

  In step S360-7, the main CPU 101a clears the abnormality determining out ball counter in the main RAM 101c.

  In step S360-8, the main CPU 101a performs the abnormality determination general winning award winning counter, the abnormality determining first large winning opening winning counter, the abnormality determining second large winning opening winning counter, and the abnormality determining first start. Clear the entrance prize counter and the second start entrance prize counter for abnormality determination.

  In step S360-9, the main CPU 101a confirms the current game condition status, sets a game status designation command indicating the current game condition status in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S360-10 0 is set in the figure special electricity processing data, and the process proceeds to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG.

  The ordinary power control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, the main CPU 101a loads the value of the ordinary power transmission processing data in step S401, refers to the branch address from the loaded ordinary power transmission processing data loaded in step S402, and if the ordinary power transmission processing data = 0. For example, the normal symbol determination as to whether or not the auxiliary game is to be executed (the second start port 7 is opened) based on the general symbol determination information acquired based on the winning to the first winning gate 10 and the second winning gate 11. The normal symbol memory determination process (step S410) including the above and so on, and if the normal symbol normal power processing data = 1, the normal symbol change when the normal symbol display device 22 fluctuates based on the normal symbol determination If the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped, the normal symbol stop process (step S430) when the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped is transferred to the process (step S420). It was transferred (to operate the second start hole control device 70) Hiroshizu Hiroshiden processing data = if 3 controls the opening and closing of the second start hole 7 moves the process to the auxiliary game process (step S440).

  The normal symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S410-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined that the normal symbol is being displayed, the main CPU 101a ends the normal symbol storage determination process. If it is determined that there is not, the process proceeds to step S410-2.

  In step S410-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the universal figure holding number counter for counting the normal figure holding number is 1 or more. When the number of held general symbols (G) is “0”, the normal symbol variation display is not performed, so the normal symbol variation process is terminated.

  When the main CPU 101a determines in step S410-2 that the number of reserved symbols (G) is “1” or more, in step S410-3, the main CPU 101a determines from the counter value (G) of the normal symbol reservation number counter “G”. 1 "is subtracted and updated, and a new number of reserved general drawings (G) is set.

  In step S410-4, the main CPU 101a performs a shift process on the data stored in the normal symbol storage area. Specifically, each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the storage unit with the previous number. At this time, the data stored in the previous storage unit is written into a predetermined processing area and is erased from the normal symbol holding storage area. Here, in order to change the display content of the normal symbol hold display device 25 in accordance with the shift of data (digestion of the hold), specifically, to display the current general symbol hold number (G), the normal symbol is displayed. The hold display data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S410-5, the main CPU 101a performs a hit determination, that is, a determination of a hit determination random number stored in the normal symbol holding storage area. Specifically, the main CPU 101a checks whether or not the hit determination random number for the normal symbol stored in the main ROM 101b is compared with the hit determination random number stored in the main ROM 101b after being shifted in step S410-4. Judgment is made. In the present embodiment, the winning determination table is associated with the start opening winning ease state (non-short-time gaming state / short-time gaming state) (see FIG. 15A), so the short-time flag storage area And a hit determination table for a normal symbol related to the current start port winning easiness state is selected.

  In step S410-6, the main CPU 101a performs normal symbol determination. Specifically, the main CPU 101a performs normal symbol determination by comparing the normal symbol determination random number stored in the 0th storage unit with the normal symbol determination random number stored in the main ROM 101b after being shifted in step S410-4. As described above, since this normal symbol determination table is associated with the result of the hit determination (win / loss), the result of the hit determination is confirmed, and the normal symbol determination table related to the result of the hit determination is determined. select.

  In step S410-7, the main CPU 101a determines a normal effect symbol designation command based on the result of the normal symbol determination, and sets the determined normal effect symbol designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. In step S410-8, the main CPU 101a determines the stop symbol data related to the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “general symbol stop symbol data”), that is, the type of the normal symbol, based on the result of the normal symbol determination. The normal stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  46. When determining the general pattern variation pattern in the general pattern variation pattern determination, the determined general symbol stop symbol data is determined to be the normal symbol suspension process in FIG. 45. Is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the second starting port 7.

  In step S410-9, the main CPU 101a performs general-purpose fluctuation pattern determination. Specifically, since the normal pattern variation pattern determination table for performing the universal map variation pattern determination is classified according to the start opening winning easiness state, the main CPU 101a first confirms the time-short flag storage area, A general-purpose variation pattern determination table according to the current start opening winning easiness state is selected. Then, the main CPU 101a compares the random number for determining the customary pattern fluctuation pattern in the 0th storage unit, which is shifted in the above step S410-4, with the selected customary pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and determines the normal pattern fluctuation pattern (normal map). (Variation time).

  In step S410-10, the main CPU 101a sets a normal variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined normal variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. The normal pattern change pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 recognizes that the change display of the normal symbol starts by receiving this command, and can execute the roulette effect described later.

  In step S410-11, the main CPU 101a sets a base variation time corresponding to the determined general variation pattern in the auxiliary game timer counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S110.

  In step S410-12, the main CPU 101a sets the normal pattern change display data in order to perform the normal symbol change display on the normal symbol display device 22, and if the hit determination result is a win, the main CPU 101a returns to step S410-13. The normal game stop symbol data is collated with the auxiliary game reference data determination table to determine auxiliary game reference data and set in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S410-14, the main CPU 101a sets “1” in the normal-plot normal power processing data, and ends the normal symbol variation process. It should be noted that the data for normal map variation display includes information such as the type of the normal symbol display device 22 to be operated, the mode of variation display, and the variation time.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S420-1, the main CPU 101a terminates the normal symbol variation display, in other words, whether or not the normal diagram variation time set in step S410-10 has elapsed (auxiliary game timer counter). = 0). As a result, when it is determined that the normal symbol variation display does not end, the normal symbol variation processing is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

  In step S420-2, the main CPU 101a sets a normal effect symbol stop designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. In step S420-3, the main CPU 101a performs normal processing based on the normal symbol stop symbol data set in step S410-8. Data for stop display of general symbols for stopping display on the symbol display device 22 is set. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the normal symbol lottery. In step S420-4, the main CPU 101a sets a normal symbol stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds = 200 counters) in the auxiliary game counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S110.

  Then, in step S420-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 to the ordinary figure / electric power process data, and ends the normal symbol variation process.

  Next, the normal symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S430-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the normal symbol stop display ends, in other words, whether or not the normal symbol stop time set in the auxiliary game timer counter in step S420-4 has elapsed. Whether or not (auxiliary game timer counter = 0?) Is determined. As a result, when it is determined that the normal symbol stop display does not end, the normal symbol stop processing ends, and the next subroutine is executed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the stop display of the normal symbol is finished, the main CPU 101a determines in step S430-2 whether the result of the hit determination related to the normal symbol stop process is “win”. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the general symbol stop symbol data stored in the normal symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to a normal symbol. Here, if it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, the process proceeds to step S430-4. If it is not determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, the process proceeds to step S430-3.

  In step S430-4, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the ordinary power transmission processing data. Then, the main CPU 101a performs an auxiliary game start process in step S430-5. In the auxiliary game start process, the main CPU 101a first selects the second start port opening / closing control table based on the auxiliary game reference data stored in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and enters the predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. set. Then, “1” is set in the normal power operation number storage area, the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization start data is set to operate the normal movable piece 70A, and the set second start port opening / closing control table is set. Referring to the auxiliary game timer counter, the opening time of the second start port 7 based on the current general electric operation number (D) is set.

  In step S430-3, the main CPU 101a sets 0 to the ordinary figure ordinary electricity processing data, and ends the normal symbol suspension process.

  The auxiliary game process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S440-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second start port 7 is being opened. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second start port 7 is open, whether or not the “open end condition” for ending the opening of the second start port 7 is satisfied in step S440-2. Determine. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value of the second starting port entrance specified counter has reached a specified (maximum) number (for example, 10), or one opening time of the second starting port 7 has elapsed. (Auxiliary game timer counter = 0) is adopted. Then, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S440-3 when it is determined that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, and ends the auxiliary game process when it is determined that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied. .

  In step S440-3, the main CPU 101a performs a second start port closing process. In the second start port closing process, the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization stop data is set in order to close the second start port 7, and the current general power operation number is referred to by referring to the second start port opening / closing control table. Based on (D), the closing time of the second start port 7 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter. As a result, the second start port 7 is closed.

  In step S440-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not an auxiliary game end condition is satisfied. The auxiliary game end condition is that the number of times the second start port 7 is opened with a preset number of normal operation numbers (D), or the counter value of the second start port entrance specified counter is a specified (maximum) number. (For example, 10). The main CPU 101a moves the process to step S440-5 when determining that the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied, and ends the auxiliary game process when determining that the auxiliary game end condition is not satisfied. .

  In step S440-5, the main CPU 101a performs auxiliary game end processing. In the auxiliary game end process, “0” is set in the general electric operation number storage area, and “0” is set in the second start-entry ball entry regulation counter. That is, the general electric operation number storage area and the second start-entry ball entry regulation counter are cleared.

  In step S440-6, the main CPU 101a sets the ordinary power transmission process data = 0, and ends the auxiliary game process.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S440-1 that the second start port 7 is not open, it determines in step S440-7 whether or not the closing time set in step S440-3 has elapsed. To do. That is, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, and when the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the closing time has elapsed. As a result, when determining that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the auxiliary game process, and when determining that the closing time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S440-8.

  In step S440-8, the main CPU 101a performs the second start port opening process and ends the auxiliary game process. In the second start port opening process, first, “1” is added to the value stored in the ordinary power operation number storage area (the ordinary power operation number (D)) and stored. Then, the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization start data is set to operate the normal movable piece 70A, and the current starter switch is referred to by referring to the second start port opening / closing control table set in step S430-5. The opening time of the second start port 7 based on the operation number (D) is set in the auxiliary game timer counter.

  Next, the data creation process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S600-1, the main CPU 101a sets the first big prize opening solenoid drive data (first big prize opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data, first big prize opening opening / closing solenoid energization) set in the big win game process or the small hit game process. Based on the stop data), drive control data corresponding to a drive signal for driving the first big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 80B to be opened or closed is created.

  In step S600-2, the main CPU 101a is based on the second big prize opening solenoid drive data (second big prize opening / closing solenoid energization start data, second big prize opening / closing solenoid energization stop data) set in the big hit game process. Thus, drive control data corresponding to the drive signal for driving the second big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 90B to the open or closed state is created.

  In step S600-3, the main CPU 101a, based on the second start port opening / closing solenoid drive data (second start port opening / closing solenoid energization start data, second start port opening / closing solenoid energization stop data) set in the auxiliary game process, Drive control data corresponding to a drive signal for driving the second start opening / closing solenoid 70B to be opened or closed is created.

  In step S600-4, the main CPU 101a performs first special display based on the special symbol display data (special symbol variation display data, special diagram stop display data) set in the special symbol memory determination process or the special symbol variation process. Special symbol display display control data corresponding to a special symbol display signal for turning on or off the LED of the symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 is created.

  In step S600-5, the main CPU 101a displays the normal symbol based on the normal symbol display data (the normal symbol change display data, the normal symbol stop display data) set in the normal symbol memory determination process or the normal symbol change process. The normal symbol display display control data corresponding to the normal symbol display signal for turning on or off the LED of the device 22 is created.

  In step S600-6, the main CPU 101a determines the first special symbol based on the special symbol hold display data set in the first starting port detection signal input process, the second starting port detection signal input process, or the special symbol memory determination process. Special symbol hold display display control data corresponding to a special symbol hold display signal for turning on or off the LED of the hold indicator of the hold display device 23 and the second special symbol hold display device 24 is created.

  In step S600-7, the main CPU 101a lights or turns on the LED of the hold indicator of the normal symbol hold display device 25 based on the normal symbol hold display data set in the winning gate detection signal input process or the normal symbol memory determination process. The display control data for normal symbol hold display corresponding to the normal symbol hold display signal to be turned off is created.

  In step S600-8, the main CPU 101a displays the round number corresponding to the round number display signal for turning on / off the LED of the round number display device 26 based on the round number display data set in the special symbol stop process. Display control data is created.

  In step S600-9, the main CPU 101a performs the right-handed display corresponding to the right-handed display signal for turning on or off the LED of the right-handed display device 27 based on the right-handed display data set in the special symbol stop process. Display control data is created.

  In step S600-10, the main CPU 101a, based on the out sphere display data set in the out sphere detection signal input process, outputs the out sphere detection display signal corresponding to the out sphere detection display signal for lighting the LED of the out sphere detection display device 28. Display control data for sphere detection display is created.

In step S600-11, the main CPU 101a relates to predetermined information related to the game, predetermined information related to the out ball based on the out ball display data set in the out ball detection signal input process (out information), and abnormal information. External signal output data creation processing for generating external signal output data for outputting information and RAM clear execution information (security signal) to the outside of the gaming machine is performed.
Here, regarding the generation of the external information related to the abnormality, the commands related to the abnormality (general prize opening first and second abnormal prize designation commands, first big prize opening first to third abnormal prize designation commands, second big prize opening first 1 to 3 abnormal winning designation commands, first start opening first and second abnormal winning designation commands, second starting opening first to third abnormal winning designation commands, magnetic detection abnormality designation commands, vibration detection abnormality designation commands) are set. If so, information related to the abnormality (security signal) is created.

  Next, output control processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S700-1, the main CPU 101a performs the above steps S600-1 to S600- in order to drive the second start opening / closing solenoid 70B, the first big prize opening / closing solenoid 80B, and the second big prize opening / closing solenoid 90B. The second start port opening / closing solenoid data, the first big prize opening opening / closing solenoid data, and the second big winning opening / closing solenoid data generated in step 3 are processed. Further, the game information is output as predetermined information relating to the game created in step S600-11, predetermined information relating to the out ball (out information), information relating to abnormality, and data for executing RAM clear (security signal). Output to the terminal board 108. In addition, regarding the generation of the predetermined information (out information) related to the out sphere, out information is created based on the out sphere display data set in the out sphere detection signal input process, so that 10 out spheres are detected. Is output each time

  In step S700-2, the main CPU 101a displays the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the normal symbol display device 22, the first special symbol hold display device 23, the second special symbol hold display device 24, In order to light each LED of the normal symbol hold display device 25, the round number display device 26, the right-handed display device 27, and the out ball detection display device 28, the various data created in the above steps S600-4 to S600-10 are used. Perform output processing.

  Thus, out information is output to the game information output terminal board 108 every time 10 out balls are detected in the step S700-1, and each time 10 out balls are detected in the step S700-2, the out information is output. Out sphere detection display display control data for turning on the LED of the sphere detection display device 28 is output. That is, the output of the out information to the outside and the LED lighting display of the out ball detection display device 28 are performed in synchronization.

  In step S700-3, the main CPU 101a performs a command output process for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board.

  Next, the security signal output timing will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 49 shows the RAM clear execution state (on / off), each abnormality (general winning opening first or second abnormal winning, first big winning opening first to third abnormal winning, second big winning opening first to third abnormality. Winning, 1st starting port 1st-2 abnormal winning, 2nd starting port 1st-3rd abnormal winning, magnetic detection abnormality, vibration detection abnormality) occurrence status (abnormal / normal), security signal output status (on / off) ) Is an example of a time chart.

  As shown in FIG. 49A, external output data creation in step S600-11 is performed based on the determination that the RAM clear is executed (ON), as shown in FIG. 49C. In addition, a security signal is output for 0.2 seconds, and after 0.2 seconds is output, an off period of 0.2 seconds is provided.

  In addition, each abnormality (general prize opening first or second abnormal prize, first grand prize opening first to third abnormal prize, second big prize opening first to third abnormal prize, first start opening first or second abnormal prize, 49 (b), it is determined that any one of the above-mentioned abnormalities has occurred (abnormal) when the second starting opening No. 1 to 3 abnormal winning, magnetic detection abnormality, vibration detection abnormality) occur. Based on the above, the external output data creation in step S600-11 is performed, and as shown in FIG. 49C, the security signal is output for 0.2 seconds, and after the output for 0.2 seconds, , An off period of 0.2 seconds is provided.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the security signal is externally output from the common output port when the RAM clear is executed and when any of the above abnormalities occurs.

Further, in this embodiment, during the 0.2 second off period after the security signal is output based on the execution of RAM clear or any abnormality, the RAM clear is newly executed or any abnormality is detected. If this occurs, the security signal is output again after the 0.2 second off period has elapsed, rather than being output further from that point. For example, as shown in FIG. 49, when any abnormality occurs during the 0.2 second off period of the security signal based on the RAM clear being executed, the RAM clear has been executed. After the 0.2 second off period of the security signal based on the lapse of time, the output of the security signal based on the occurrence of the abnormality is started.
If a new RAM clear or any abnormality occurs while the security signal is being output (during the 0.2 second ON period), the security signal is output instead of being output further from that point. The security signal is output again after the subsequent 0.2 second off period.

  In the present embodiment, when RAM clear is executed when power supply to the gaming machine Y is started, a security signal is output for 0.2 seconds when each of the above abnormalities occurs. However, the output time of the security signal is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the time for outputting the security signal may be different between when the RAM clear is executed and when an abnormality occurs. Furthermore, the output time may be varied depending on the type of abnormality. By doing so, it is possible to recognize whether the RAM is cleared or which abnormality has occurred.

  The power interruption processing of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the power supply board 107 detects a power failure, it outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 101. Then, the main CPU 101a performs the following power interruption interrupt processing.

  In step S51, the main CPU 101a clears the output port, and turns off data such as the second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B, the first large winning port opening / closing solenoid 80B, the second large winning port opening / closing solenoid 90B.

  In step S52, the main CPU 101a creates and stores a checksum of the main RAM 101c being used.

In step S53, the main CPU 101a prohibits access to the main RAM 101c and protects the contents of the main RAM 101c. Then, an infinite loop is performed to prepare for power down. In this step S53, as described above, the main CPU 101a at least data indicating information relating to the game, that is, data corresponding to the control state of the main CPU 101a (special special charge processing data, special figure stop symbol data, special figure variation) Pattern, round number (R), high-probability gaming state flag, high-probability gaming state remaining number counter, short-time gaming state flag, high-probable gaming state remaining number counter, ordinary map electric power processing data, etc.), unpaid winning ball number The data shown and the data showing the out information are stored as backup data in the main RAM 101c which is a backup RAM.
The main CPU 101a loads the backed up data after the game machine Y is powered on thereafter. Thereby, at the time of power failure recovery, the main CPU 101a recovers the control state at the time of power failure occurrence.

  Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 102a in the effect control board 102 will be described.

  First, the main process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the sub CPU 102a, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a, and the sub CPU 102a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs an initialization process. In this processing, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 102b, and the sub RAM 102c in which flags and commands are stored is initialized.

  In step S1002, the sub CPU 102a determines a random effect pattern determination random number, a special effect symbol stop display pattern determination random number, an effect mode determination random number, a special game effect pattern determination random number, a long per game roulette effect determination random number, and a specific characteristic. Roulette effect determination random number for result, roulette effect determination random number for pre-reading effect mode, roulette effect determination random number for 2 wins, roulette effect determination random number for lose, pre-reading effect mode execution determination random number, random number for reel configuration determination, A process of updating the effect random number used to control the effect made up of the roulette effect pattern determination random number, the special privilege game pattern determination random number, and the like is performed.

  Note that a random number counter is provided in the sub-RAM 102c for each of various random numbers constituting the production random number. In the effect random number update process, “1” is added to the random number counter provided for each type of random number. A random number range is provided for various random numbers constituting the production random number. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. Then, in the update of the random number, when the random value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”.

  Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set to be different depending on the type of random number (see FIGS. 79 to 90 and 93 to 96). This is to prevent the random number counter related to the production random number from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to prevent the random number counter related to the production random number from being completely synchronized, different initial value random numbers are provided to the various production random numbers instead of making the maximum values of the various random number ranges different, When updating the random number, if the random value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, each random value may be newly updated from the initial random number at that time.

  The timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 52 to 77 is executed by generating a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 102. Is done.

  First, in step S1100, the sub CPU 102a saves information stored in the register of the sub CPU 102a to the stack area.

  In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs timer management (variation effect timer counter, customer waiting effect timer counter, special game effect timer counter, long open effect timer counter, launch during a specific round for time management related to various effects. Time control for updating a confirmation timer counter, a long release release confirmation timer counter, a demonstration production launch confirmation timer counter, a dish full tank abnormality first announcement launch confirmation timer counter, a left-handed first announcement launch confirmation timer counter, etc.) Process.

  In step S1250, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not an effect button detection signal or a selection button detection signal has been input, and performs an effect input control process based on an operation on the effect button 18A or the selection button 19A. In particular, in the present embodiment, in this effect input control process, the image displayed on the image display device 14 is changed, or a QR code is generated and displayed. The effect input control process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs command analysis processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 102a performs processing for analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 to 72.

  When the effect control board 102 receives the command transmitted from the main control board 101, the effect control board 102 performs a reception interrupt process of the effect control board 102 (not shown) and stores the received command in the reception buffer. Thereafter, processing for analyzing the received command is performed in step S1300.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs a game privilege control process for control related to the provision of the game privilege according to the privilege grant mode. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a performs a special effect control process for the control related to the special effect performed based on the out information. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 to 75.

  In step S1600, the sub CPU 102a performs a customer waiting effect control process for controlling the customer waiting effect performed in the customer waiting state. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1650, the sub CPU 102a performs a long opening effect control process for controlling the long opening effect performed in the second auxiliary game. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1700, the sub CPU 102a performs data output processing for transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S1800, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

  The effect input control process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1250-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a button detection signal has been input. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the button detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S1250-2. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the button detection signal has not been input, the effect input control process ends.

  In step S1250-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the customer is waiting. Whether or not the customer is waiting is determined based on whether or not a demonstration effect standby flag or a demonstration effect execution flag that is turned on in the customer waiting state is turned on in the sub-RAM 102c.

  In the customer waiting state, a customer waiting effect is executed. Although the aspect of the customer waiting effect is appropriately set, the customer waiting effect in the present embodiment is a special operation that is performed until a predetermined demo effect waiting time elapses after the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102. It is composed of a stop display of the effect symbol, a demonstration effect that is performed after the demonstration effect standby time has elapsed, and a power saving mode that is set after the demonstration confirmation launch time has elapsed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is in the customer waiting state, it moves the process to step S1250-4, and if it determines that it is not in the customer waiting state, it moves the process to step S1250-3.

  In step S1250-3, the sub CPU 102a sets a display instruction command corresponding to the operation of the effect button 18A or the selection button 19A in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in various effects. For example, the special button 18A or the selection button 19A is used to select or determine a special game effect pattern during the special game, and to transmit a display instruction command for displaying a specific character during the variation display of the effect symbol. Become.

  In step S1250-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not an effect button detection signal has been input. That is, since the button detection signal has already been input in step S1250-1, the operation of the effect button 18A that mainly functions as the “decision button” has been operated, or the selection button 19A that mainly functions as the “select button”. It is determined whether there has been an operation.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect button detection signal has been input, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to the processing of step S1250-6 and subsequent steps corresponding to the “decision button”, and if it determines that the effect button detection signal has not been input, the “select button”. To step S1250-5.

  In step S1250-5, the sub CPU 102a performs a selection button determination process for selecting various data (menu counter, selection counter, character counter) in response to the operation of the selection button 19A serving as the “selection button”. Do.

  In step S1250-6, when there is an operation of the effect button 18A that functions as the “decision button”, the sub CPU 102a first determines whether or not the QR code edit menu screen is “top menu”. That is, with reference to the menu counter, it is determined whether or not menu counter = 00. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the “top menu”, it moves the process to step S1250-7, and if it determines that it is not the “top menu”, it moves the process to step S1250-9.

  In step S1250-7, the sub CPU 102a determines the menu counter (menu screen) of the transfer destination if the “top menu” is selected when the “decision button” is operated. This shifts from the “top menu” to various selection menu screens of “start new game” or “end game”.

  In step S1250-8, based on the information set in the menu counter, the sub CPU 102a sets a display instruction command for displaying a new transition destination menu screen in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The effect input control process is terminated. Specifically, if menu counter = 01, a menu screen of “start new game” is displayed, and if menu counter = 02, a menu screen of “game end” is displayed.

  In step S1250-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the menu screen for QR code editing is “start new game”. That is, referring to the menu counter, it is determined whether or not menu counter = 01. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is “start new game”, it moves the process to step S1250-10, and if it determines that it is not “start new game”, it moves the process to step S1250-18.

  In step S1250-10, assuming that one password character is determined, the sub CPU 102a performs determination processing for determining and storing the character (character counter) of the currently selected password.

  In step S1250-11, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not input of all passwords has been completed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that all password inputs have been completed, it moves the process to step S1250-12, and if it determines that password input has not been completed, it ends the current effect input control process.

  When the input of the password is completed, the sub CPU 102a performs a start information recognition process for authenticating whether or not the input password indicates start information in step S1250-12. In this start information recognition process, it is authenticated whether or not the input password is information corresponding to start information generated from a predetermined algorithm. Here, the password that has been successfully authenticated includes game history information that is information related to the history of games played by the gaming machine Y. In the present embodiment, at least information related to gaming benefits is included as the game history information. include.

  A game privilege is a privilege that is not directly related to a game related to winning balls such as prize balls or special symbol determination or jackpot games. In the present embodiment, the game privilege is composed of privilege points including points such as 10 points (10 pt) and 30 points (30 pt). In the present embodiment, in addition to games related to winning special balls such as special symbol determination and jackpot games, games related to the acquisition of game benefits are widely used as “games”. In the present embodiment, the information related to the game privilege is a privilege point (for example, the total of privilege points) owned by the player specified by the password.

  In step S1250-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the recognition in step S1250-12 has been successful. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the recognition is successful, it moves the process to step S1250-14, and if it determines that the recognition is not successful, it moves the process to step S1250-17.

  In step S1250-14, the sub CPU 102a clears the game history information (information related to the game privilege, the number of jackpot winnings, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display, etc.) and the privilege grant mode execution flag already stored in the gaming machine Y. The privilege grant mode initialization process is performed.

  In step S1250-15, the sub CPU 102a performs a privilege grant mode setting process for turning on the privilege grant mode execution flag and storing terminal unique information. In the present embodiment, the state where the privilege granting mode execution flag is set constitutes “privilege granting mode”, and the state where the privilege granting mode execution flag is not set is referred to as “non-privilege granting mode”.

  In the privilege grant mode, a privilege game in which privilege points can be acquired is performed. The privilege points (game privileges) acquired in the privilege grant mode are output as QR codes in the QR code generation process of S1250-19 described later.

  The QR code can be read using the terminal 400. Then, the player can access data provided on the server 500 by using the read QR code. The data provided on the server 500 includes contents related to the gaming machine Y (for example, videos, music, documents, etc. related to the motif on the rendering of the gaming machine Y), and is variously set in association with privilege points. Since this data is provided on the server 500 so as to be accessible to the player and is in a downloadable state, it can be downloaded to the terminal 400. That is, the player can acquire the content related to the gaming machine Y through the privilege points (game benefits) acquired by the game with the gaming machine Y.

  Thus, by giving a game privilege to a player, a new value other than winning a prize ball is created for the game by the gaming machine Y, and the game motivation of the player can be improved. In addition, it is possible to set the content so as to have a rare value as the privilege point becomes high, and to improve the player's willingness to acquire the privilege point.

  Note that the form of the game privilege is not limited to the privilege point, and can be set as appropriate. For example, a premium image (still image or video) is displayed at a predetermined timing during the game, or an original song is played. For example, special effects may be executed. Further, the player may be able to set the execution of the special effect as appropriate.

  In the privilege grant mode setting process, at least information related to the game privilege included in the start information is stored in the game privilege storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Thereby, the game history by the game in the privilege setting mode set last time is continuously reflected in the game by the privilege setting mode set this time.

  In step S1250-16, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, an authentication success display instruction command for notifying the player that the start information has been successfully authenticated by inputting the password.

  In step S1250-17, if the authentication of the start information is not successful by the password input, the sub CPU 102a sets an authentication failure display instruction command for notifying the player that the authentication has failed in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. .

  In step S1250-18, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the QR code edit menu screen is “game end”. That is, with reference to the menu counter, it is determined whether or not menu counter = 02. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is “game end”, it moves the process to step S1250-19, and if it determines that it is not “game end”, it ends the current effect input control process.

  In step S1250-19, the sub CPU 102a performs a QR code generation process.

  This QR code generation process reads an address (address of homepage HP) for accessing the server 500 from the sub ROM 102b, and also plays game history information (game benefits from the game history information storage area and terminal specific information storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Information etc.) and terminal specific information is read. Thereafter, a QR code is generated based on the read homepage address, game history information, and terminal-specific information. That is, the QR code includes homepage address, game history information, and terminal specific information.

  In the present embodiment, when generating a QR code (step S1250-19), it is desirable to encrypt the game history information and the terminal specific information and generate the QR code based on the encrypted data. . Specifically, in step S1250-19, after performing the encryption process for encrypting the game history information and the terminal specific information, a QR code may be generated based on the encrypted data. Further, the encryption is not limited to encrypting all data, and only a part of the data may be encrypted.

  In step S1250-20, the sub CPU 102a clears the game history information (information relating to the game privilege) and the privilege granting mode execution flag to cancel the privilege granting mode and set the non-privilege granting mode. Process.

  In step S1250-21, the sub CPU 102a sets a display instruction command for displaying the generated QR code in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the present effect input control process.

  The command analysis processing by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a newly receives a command and determines whether the command is stored in the reception buffer. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis processing. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command, it moves the process to step S1303, and if it determines that the command is not a customer waiting state designation command, it moves the process to step S1304.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a performs a customer waiting effect start process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1304, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start slot winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a start opening winning designation command, it moves the process to step S1305, and if it determines that the command is not a starting opening winning designation command, it moves the process to step S1306.

  In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a performs a start opening prize designation command storage process. The sub CPU 102a stores the start opening winning designation command in the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the effect information hold storage area is provided for each type of start port (first effect information hold storage area and second effect information hold storage area). The sub CPU 102a analyzes the received start opening winning designation command, confirms the type of the starting opening (the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7) related to the starting opening winning designation command, and sets the type of the starting opening. The corresponding effect information storage area is stored.

  Each effect information hold storage area has the same configuration as the special symbol hold storage area of the main RAM 101c, and is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit for each type of the start ports 6 and 7. The start opening winning designation command is stored in order from the storage unit having the smallest number in the storage unit in which the starting opening winning designation command is not stored. Each storage unit includes a start opening winning designation command section that stores a starting opening winning designation command and a prefetch effect mode designation flag section that stores a prefetch effect mode designation flag described later (see FIG. 78B). .

  In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect designating command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect designating command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1307 and step S1308. If the sub CPU 102a determines that there is no special effect designating command, the process proceeds to step S1309. Move.

  In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a performs a start opening prize designation command shift process. The sub CPU 102a shifts the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the starting opening related to the received special effect designating command in the start opening winning designation command shifting process.

  Specifically, the sub CPU 102a confirms the type of the start opening related to the received special effect design designation command, and shifts the start opening prize designation command stored in the effect information holding storage area corresponding to the start opening. In shifting the start opening prize designation command, the start opening prize designation command stored in the first to fourth storage sections is shifted (moved) to the previous storage section. For example, the start opening winning designation command stored in the fourth storage unit of the first effect information hold storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first effect information hold storage area. In addition, the start opening prize designation command stored in the first storage unit of the first effect information hold storage area is the effect information common storage area (the storage area (the storage area of the first effect information hold storage area and the second effect information hold storage area)). The start opening winning designation command that has been shifted to the 0th storage unit and stored in the storage area of the effect information is deleted.

  In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a performs a special effect symbol stop display pattern determination process for configuring a special symbol lottery effect and performing a special effect symbol stop display performed when the special symbol stop display is performed. . Details will be described later with reference to FIG. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the special effect designating command, and based on the information included in the received special effect designating command, the sub CPU 102a displays the special effect design to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 14, that is, the special effect design. An arrangement (combination) of decorative symbols arranged on a predetermined effective line in the stop display is determined.

  In step S1309, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1310 and step S1311. If the sub CPU 102a determines that there is no special figure variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step S1312. Move processing.

  In step S1310, the sub CPU 102a performs a customer waiting effect end process for ending the customer waiting effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a configures a special drawing lottery effect, and the variation for determining the variation effect pattern of the variation effect (including the variation display of the special effect symbol) performed when the variation display of the special symbol is performed. An effect pattern determination process is performed, and the command analysis process ends. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol stop designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol stop designation command, the process proceeds to step S1313 and step S1314. If the sub CPU 102a determines that there is no special effect symbol stop designation command, the process proceeds to step S1315. Move processing.

  In step S <b> 1313, the sub CPU 102 a ends the changing effect by setting a changing effect end command indicating that the changing effect is ended in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102 c. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S <b> 1314, the sub CPU 102 a performs an effect mode setting process for setting an effect mode when the special symbol variation display ends, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, the effect mode is a variation effect classification mode (category) performed by an effect device such as the image display device 14 in response to a special symbol lottery (or a special symbol variable display). It is related to the state of the game condition and the like.
Describe.

  In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command, it moves the process to step S1316, and if it determines that there is no gaming state designation command, it moves the process to step S1317.

  In step S1316, the sub CPU 102a sets the data indicating the gaming state indicated by the received gaming state designation command in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the command analysis processing.

  In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command related to a special game. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special game opening designation command, it moves the process to step S1318, and if it determines that there is no special game opening designation command, it moves the process to step S1319.

  In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a performs a special game effect pattern determination process for determining a special game effect pattern that is an aspect of the special game effect that is an effect related to the special game, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command, it moves the process to step S1320. If it determines that there is no round designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1321.

  In step S1320, the sub CPU 102a performs a round effect pattern determination process for determining a round effect pattern that is a mode of the round effect, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1321, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command (special game ending designation command) related to the special game. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special game ending designation command, it moves the process to step S1322, and if it determines that the command is not a special game ending designation command, it moves the process to step S1323.

  In step S1322, the sub CPU 102a performs an ending effect pattern determination process for determining an ending effect pattern that is an aspect of the ending effect, and ends the command analysis process.

  In step S <b> 1323, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a common map variation pattern designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a common map variation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1324, and if it determines that the command is not a common map variation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1325. .

  In step S1324, the sub CPU 102a performs a roulette effect determination process including a roulette effect execution determination as to whether or not to execute a roulette effect, which will be described later, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S1325, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an auxiliary game opening designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is an auxiliary game opening designation command, it moves the process to step S1326, and if it determines that the command is not an auxiliary game opening designation command, it moves the process to step S1327. The command analysis process ends.

  In step S1326, the sub CPU 102a performs the long opening effect determination process including the long opening effect execution determination as to whether or not to execute the long opening effect corresponding to the auxiliary game (second auxiliary game) related to the hit 2 in the non-time-saving game state. To complete the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1327, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the first winning gate winning designation command or the second winning gate winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the first prize gate prize designation command or the second prize gate prize designation command, the process proceeds to step S1328 and is stored in the reception buffer. If it is determined that the command is not the first prize gate prize designation command or the second prize gate prize designation command, the process proceeds to step S1329.

  In step S1328, the sub CPU 102a performs a firing notification process and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1329, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a general winning opening first abnormal winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the general winning opening first abnormal winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1330, and the command stored in the receiving buffer is the general winning opening first abnormal winning designation. If it is determined that the command is not a winning designation command, the process proceeds to step S1331.

In step S1330, the sub CPU 102a detects a winning to the general winning opening 12 while the game ball is not being fired, and then a general winning opening first abnormal winning notification notification effect that indicates that the out ball has not been detected for 2 seconds. Is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c, and the command analysis process is terminated.
In addition, it corresponds to the alerting | reporting means which alert | reports that the general winning opening 1st abnormal winning alert | report process of this step S1330 became the predetermined relationship of this invention.

The general winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. The image control board 105 executes the general winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect by receiving the general winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect control command. Specifically, when the image control board 105 receives the general winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect control command, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), the effect image being performed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 The character image of “general winning opening first abnormal winning” is displayed for 30 seconds on the front side, and the voice of the “general winning opening first abnormal winning” can be set by the audio output device 15 at the maximum. For 30 seconds.
In this way, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice of “general prize opening first abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, the game shop is noisy, Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the first prize winning abnormality in the general prize opening, and cheating can be prevented.

  In addition, although it was supposed that the general winning opening first abnormal prize notification effect was performed for 30 seconds, the notification effect time of the general winning opening first abnormal prize notification effect is not limited to 30 seconds. For example, as long as the power of the gaming machine Y is not turned off, the general winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect may not be ended. Thus, unless the power of the gaming machine Y is turned off, the player can usually not operate the power of the gaming machine Y by not ending the general prize opening first abnormal winning notification effect. As long as the store clerk does not come, the general winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect is not finished, so that illegal acts can be prevented.

  In step S1331, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a general winning opening second abnormal winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the general prize opening second abnormal winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1332, and the command stored in the reception buffer is the general prize opening second abnormal winning designation command. If it is determined that the command is not a winning designation command, the process proceeds to step S1333.

In step S1332, the sub CPU 102a issues a general prize opening second abnormal prize notification effect, which is a notice effect for a game ball exceeding the specified ball winning in the general prize opening 12 when 100 game balls are launched. Is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c, and the command analysis processing is terminated.
In addition, it corresponds to the alerting | reporting means which alert | reports that the general winning opening 2nd abnormal winning alert | report process of this step S1332 became the predetermined relationship of this invention.

The general winning opening second abnormal winning notification effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. The image control board 105 executes the general winning opening second abnormal winning notification effect by receiving the general winning opening second abnormal winning notification effect control command. Specifically, when the image control board 105 receives the general winning opening second abnormal winning notification effect control command, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the effect image being performed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 The character image of “general winning opening second abnormal winning” is displayed on the front side for 30 seconds, and the audio output device 15 can set the sound of “general winning opening second abnormal winning” to the gaming machine Y. Output at maximum volume for 30 seconds.
In this way, by causing the sound output device 15 to output the sound of “general winning opening second abnormal winning” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, the game shop is noisy, Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the second prize winning in the general prize opening, and cheating can be prevented.

  In addition, although it was supposed that the general winning opening second abnormal winning notification effect was performed for 30 seconds, the notification effect time of the general winning port second abnormal winning notification effect is not limited to 30 seconds. For example, as long as the power of the gaming machine Y is not turned off, the general winning opening second abnormal winning notification effect may not be ended. In this way, unless the power of the gaming machine Y is turned off, the player can usually not operate the power of the gaming machine Y by not ending the general prize opening second abnormal winning notification effect. As long as the store clerk does not come, the general prize exit second abnormal prize notification effect is not ended, so that illegal acts can be prevented.

  In step S1333, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a first big prize opening first abnormal winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the first big prize opening first abnormal prize designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1334, and the command stored in the reception buffer is the first big prize prize. If it is determined that the command is not a mouth first abnormal winning designation command, the process proceeds to step S1335.

In step S1334, the sub CPU 102a detects the winning at the first grand prize opening 8 while the game ball is not being fired, and the first big prize opening 1 A first big prize opening first abnormal winning notification notification control command indicating the contents of the abnormal winning notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c, and the command analysis processing is terminated.
In addition, it is equivalent to the alerting | reporting means which alert | reports that the 1st big winning opening 1st abnormal prize winning alert process of this step S1334 became the predetermined relationship of this invention.

The first big prize opening first abnormal prize notification effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. The image control board 105 executes the first large winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect by receiving the first large winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect control command. Specifically, when the image control board 105 receives the first grand prize opening first abnormal prize notification effect control command, it is performed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. A character image of “first grand prize opening first abnormal prize” is displayed on the front of the effect image for 30 seconds, and the voice output device 15 sends a voice of “first big prize mouth first abnormal prize” to the game. The machine Y is output at the maximum volume that can be set for 30 seconds.
In this way, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice “first big prize opening first abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop is noisy. However, even in an environment with such a loud noise, the store clerk can be made aware that the first big prize opening first abnormal prize has occurred, and cheating can be prevented.

  In addition, although it was decided that the 1st big winning opening 1st abnormal winning notification effect was performed for 30 seconds, the notification effect time of the 1st big winning opening 1st abnormal winning notification effect is not limited to 30 seconds. For example, as long as the power of the gaming machine Y is not turned off, the first grand prize opening first abnormal prize notification effect may not be ended. Thus, unless the power source of the gaming machine Y is turned off, the player cannot normally operate the power source of the gaming machine Y by not ending the first big prize opening first abnormal prize notification effect. Therefore, unless the store clerk comes, the first grand prize opening first abnormal prize notification effect does not end, so that illegal acts can be prevented.

  In step S1335, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the first big prize opening second abnormal winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the first big prize opening second abnormal prize designation command, the process moves to step S1336, and the command stored in the reception buffer is the first big prize winning prize. If it is determined that the command is not the mouth second abnormal winning designation command, the process proceeds to step S1337.

In step S 1336, the sub CPU 102 a outputs the first grand prize opening second, which is a notification effect for a game ball exceeding the specified ball winning in the first big prize opening 8 when 100 game balls are launched. The first big prize opening second abnormal prize notification effect control command indicating the contents of the abnormal prize notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c, and the command analysis process ends.
In addition, it is equivalent to the alerting | reporting means which alert | reports that the 1st big winning opening 2nd abnormal winning alert process of this step S1336 became the predetermined relationship of this invention.

The first big prize opening second abnormal prize notification effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. The image control board 105 executes the first big prize opening second abnormal winning notification effect by receiving the first big winning opening second abnormal winning notification effect control command. Specifically, when the image control board 105 receives the first grand prize opening second abnormal prize notification effect control command, it is performed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. A character image of “first big prize opening second abnormal prize” is displayed for 30 seconds in front of the effect image, and the voice “first big prize mouth second abnormal prize” is outputted by the voice output device 15 to the game. The machine Y is output at the maximum volume that can be set for 30 seconds.
As described above, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice “first big prize opening second abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop has a high noise level. However, even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware that the first big prize opening second abnormal prize has occurred, and cheating can be prevented.

  In addition, although it was decided that the 1st grand prize opening 2nd abnormal prize notification effect was performed for 30 seconds, the notification effect time of the 1st big prize mouth 2nd abnormal prize notification effect is not restricted to 30 seconds. For example, as long as the power of the gaming machine Y is not turned off, the first big prize opening second abnormal prize notification effect may not be ended. Thus, unless the power source of the gaming machine Y is turned off, the player cannot normally operate the power source of the gaming machine Y by not ending the first big prize opening second abnormal prize notification effect. Therefore, unless the store clerk comes, the first big prize opening second abnormal prize notification effect does not end, so that illegal acts can be prevented.

  In step S1337, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a first big prize opening third abnormal winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the first big prize opening third abnormal prize designation command, the process moves to step S1338, and the command stored in the reception buffer is the first big prize prize. If it is determined that the command is not the mouth third abnormal winning designation command, the process proceeds to step S1339.

  In step S1338, the sub CPU 102a notifies the first grand prize opening third abnormal prize notification which is a notification effect for detecting three balls in the first big prize opening 8 per 60 seconds outside the validity period of the big prize opening. The first grand prize opening third abnormal winning notification notification effect control command indicating the content of the effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c, and the command analysis process ends.

The first big prize opening third abnormal prize notification effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. The image control board 105 executes the first big prize opening third abnormal prize notification effect by receiving the first big prize opening third abnormal prize notification effect control command. Specifically, when the image control board 105 receives the first grand prize opening third abnormal winning notification effect control command, it is performed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. A character image of “first big prize opening third abnormal prize” is displayed for 30 seconds on the front of the effect image, and the voice output device 15 sends a voice of “first big prize mouth third abnormal prize” to the game. The machine Y is output at the maximum volume that can be set for 30 seconds.
In this way, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice “first big prize opening third abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop has a large noise level. However, even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the first big prize opening third abnormal prize winning, and cheating can be prevented.

  In addition, although it was decided that the 1st grand prize opening 3rd abnormal prize notification effect was performed for 30 seconds, the notification effect time of the 1st big prize port 3rd abnormal prize notification effect is not limited to 30 seconds. For example, as long as the power of the gaming machine Y is not turned off, the first grand prize opening third abnormal winning notification effect may not be ended. Thus, unless the power of the gaming machine Y is turned off, the player cannot normally operate the power of the gaming machine Y by not ending the first big prize opening third abnormal winning notification effect. Therefore, unless the store clerk comes, the first grand prize opening third abnormal prize notification effect does not end, so that illegal acts can be prevented.

  In step S1339, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the second big prize opening first abnormal winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the second big prize opening first abnormal prize designation command, the process moves to step S1340, and the command stored in the reception buffer is the second big prize winning prize. If it is determined that the command is not the first abnormal winning designation command, the process proceeds to step S1341.

In step S1340, the sub CPU 102a detects the winning at the second big winning opening 9 while the game ball is not being fired, and the second big winning opening 1 A second large winning opening first abnormal winning notification notification control command indicating the contents of the abnormal winning notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c, and the command analysis processing is ended.
In addition, it is equivalent to the alerting | reporting means which alert | reports that the 2nd big winning opening 1st abnormal winning alert notification process of this step S1340 became the predetermined relationship of this invention.

The second big prize opening first abnormal prize notification effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. The image control board 105 executes the second large winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect by receiving the second large winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect control command. Specifically, when the image control board 105 receives the second grand prize opening first abnormal prize notification effect control command, it is performed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. A character image of “second grand prize opening first abnormal prize” is displayed for 30 seconds on the front of the effect image, and the voice output device 15 sends a voice of “second big prize mouth first abnormal prize” to the game. The machine Y is output at the maximum volume that can be set for 30 seconds.
In this way, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice “second big prize opening first abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop is noisy. However, even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the second big prize opening first abnormal prize, and cheating can be prevented.

  In addition, although it was decided that the 2nd big prize opening 1st abnormal prize notification effect was performed for 30 seconds, the information production time of the 2nd big prize opening 1st abnormal prize information effect is not restricted to 30 seconds. For example, as long as the power of the gaming machine Y is not turned off, the second large winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect may not be ended. Thus, unless the power of the gaming machine Y is turned off, the player cannot normally operate the power of the gaming machine Y by not ending the second big prize opening first abnormal winning notification effect. Therefore, unless the store clerk comes, the second big prize opening first abnormal prize notification effect does not end, so that illegal acts can be prevented.

  In step S1341, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a second big prize opening second abnormal winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the second big prize opening second abnormal prize designation command, the process proceeds to step S1342, where the command stored in the reception buffer is the second big prize prize. If it is determined that the command is not the second abnormal winning designation command, the process proceeds to step S1343.

In step S1342, the sub CPU 102a outputs a second grand prize opening second, which is a notification effect for a game ball exceeding the prescribed ball winning in the second big prize opening 9 when 100 game balls are launched. The second big prize opening second abnormal winning notification effect control command indicating the contents of the abnormal winning notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and the command analysis process is ended.
In addition, it is equivalent to the alerting | reporting means which alert | reports that the 2nd big winning opening 2nd abnormal winning alert | report process of this step S1342 became the predetermined relationship of this invention.

The second big prize opening second abnormal prize notification effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. The image control board 105 executes the second large winning opening second abnormal winning notification effect by receiving the second large winning opening second abnormal winning notification effect control command. Specifically, when the image control board 105 receives the second grand prize opening second abnormal winning notification effect control command, it is performed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. A character image of “second grand prize opening second abnormal prize” is displayed for 30 seconds on the front of the effect image, and the voice output device 15 sends a voice of “second big prize mouth second abnormal prize” to the game. The machine Y is output at the maximum volume that can be set for 30 seconds.
In this manner, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice “second big prize opening second abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop has a large noise level. However, even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the second big prize opening second abnormal prize, and cheating can be prevented.

  In addition, although it was decided that the 2nd big prize opening 2nd abnormal prize notification production was performed for 30 seconds, the information production time of the 2nd big prize opening 2nd abnormal prize information production is not limited to 30 seconds. For example, as long as the power of the gaming machine Y is not turned off, the second large winning opening second abnormal winning notification effect may not be ended. Thus, unless the power source of the gaming machine Y is turned off, the player cannot normally operate the power source of the gaming machine Y by not ending the second big prize opening second abnormal prize notification effect. Therefore, unless the store clerk comes, the second large prize opening second abnormal winning notification effect is not finished, so that illegal acts can be prevented.

  In step S1343, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the second big prize opening third abnormal winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the second big prize opening third abnormal prize designation command, the process moves to step S1344, and the command stored in the reception buffer is the second big prize winning command. If it is determined that the command is not the mouth third abnormal winning designation command, the process proceeds to step S1345.

  In step S1344, the sub CPU 102a notifies the second big prize opening third abnormal prize notification which is a notification effect for detecting three balls in the second big prize opening 9 per 60 seconds outside the validity period of the big prize opening. The second big prize opening third abnormal winning notification notification effect control command indicating the content of the effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c, and the command analysis process ends.

The second big prize opening third abnormal prize notification effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. The image control board 105 executes the second large winning opening third abnormal winning notification effect by receiving the second large winning opening third abnormal winning notification effect control command. Specifically, when the image control board 105 receives the second grand prize opening third abnormal winning notification effect control command, it is performed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. A character image of “second grand prize opening third abnormal prize” is displayed for 30 seconds on the front of the effect image, and the voice output device 15 sends a voice of “second big prize mouth third abnormal prize” to the game. The machine Y is output at the maximum volume that can be set for 30 seconds.
In this way, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice “second big prize opening third abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop has a high noise level. However, even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the second big prize opening third abnormal prize, and cheating can be prevented.

  In addition, although it was decided that the 2nd big prize opening 3rd abnormal prize notification effect was done for 30 seconds, the information production time of the 2nd big prize mouth 3rd abnormal prize information effect is not limited to 30 seconds. For example, as long as the power of the gaming machine Y is not turned off, the second big prize opening third abnormal prize notification effect may not be ended. Thus, unless the power of the gaming machine Y is turned off, the player cannot normally operate the power of the gaming machine Y by not ending the second big prize opening third abnormal winning notification effect. Therefore, unless the store clerk comes, the second large prize opening second abnormal winning notification effect is not finished, so that illegal acts can be prevented.

  In step S1345, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the first start port first abnormal winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the first start port first abnormal winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1346, and the command stored in the reception buffer is the first start port first command. If it is determined that the command is not one abnormal winning designation command, the process proceeds to step S1347.

In step S1346, the sub CPU 102a detects the winning at the first starting port 6 while the game ball is not being fired, and the first starting port first abnormal winning is a notification effect for the fact that the out ball is not detected for 2 seconds. The first start port first abnormal winning notification effect control command indicating the content of the notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c, and the command analysis process ends.
In addition, it is equivalent to the alerting | reporting means which alert | reports that the 1st start opening 1st abnormal prize alerting | reporting process of this step S1346 became the predetermined relationship of this invention.

The first start port first abnormal winning notification effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. The image control board 105 executes the first start port first abnormal winning notification effect by receiving the first starting port first abnormal winning notification effect control command. Specifically, when the image control board 105 receives the first start port first abnormal winning notification effect control command, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), the effect performed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 is performed. A character image of “first start opening first abnormal winning” is displayed for 30 seconds on the front of the image, and the gaming machine Y outputs a sound of “first starting opening first abnormal winning” by the voice output device 15. Output at the maximum volume that can be set for 30 seconds.
In this way, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice of “first start opening first abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop has a high noise level. Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the first start opening first abnormal winning, and cheating can be prevented.

  In addition, although it was decided that the 1st start opening 1st abnormal winning notification effect was performed for 30 seconds, the notification effect time of the 1st start opening 1st abnormal winning notification effect is not limited to 30 seconds. For example, as long as the power of the gaming machine Y is not turned off, the first start opening first abnormal winning notification effect may not be ended. As described above, unless the power source of the gaming machine Y is turned off, the player cannot normally operate the power source of the gaming machine Y by not ending the first start opening first abnormal winning notification effect. As long as the store clerk does not come, the first start opening first abnormal winning notification effect is not completed, so that illegal acts can be prevented.

  In step S1347, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a first start-up port second abnormal winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the first start port second abnormal winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1348, and the command stored in the reception buffer is the first start port first command. If it is determined that the command is not an abnormal winning designation command, the process proceeds to step S1349.

In step S1348, the sub CPU 102a outputs a first start port second abnormal prize which is a notification effect for a game ball exceeding the prescribed number in the first start port 6 when 100 game balls are launched. A first start port second abnormal prize notification effect control command indicating the content of the notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c, and the command analysis process ends.
In addition, it is equivalent to the alerting | reporting means which alert | reports that this 1st starting opening 2nd abnormal winning alert | report process of this step S1348 became the predetermined relationship of this invention.

The first start port second abnormal winning notification effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. The image control board 105 executes the first start port second abnormal winning notification effect by receiving the first starting port second abnormal winning notification effect control command. Specifically, when the image control board 105 receives the first start port second abnormal winning notification effect control command, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the effect performed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 The character image of “first start opening second abnormal winning” is displayed for 30 seconds in front of the image, and the gaming machine Y outputs the sound “first starting opening second abnormal winning” by the voice output device 15. Output at the maximum volume that can be set for 30 seconds.
In this way, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice “first start port second abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop has a large noise. Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the first start opening second abnormal winning, and cheating can be prevented.

  In addition, although it was decided that the 1st start opening 2nd abnormal prize announcement effect was performed for 30 seconds, the notification effect time of the 1st start opening 2nd abnormal prize notification effect is not restricted to 30 seconds. For example, as long as the power of the gaming machine Y is not turned off, the first start opening second abnormal winning notification effect may not be ended. Thus, unless the power of the gaming machine Y is turned off, the player can usually not operate the power of the gaming machine Y by not ending the first start opening second abnormal winning notification effect. As long as the store clerk does not come, the first start opening second abnormal winning notification effect is not finished, so that illegal acts can be prevented.

  In step S1349, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the second start-up port first abnormal winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the second start port first abnormal winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1350, and the command stored in the reception buffer is the second start port first command. If it is determined that the command is not one abnormal winning designation command, the process proceeds to step S1351.

In step S1350, the sub CPU 102a detects the winning at the second starting port 7 while the game ball has not been fired, and then the second starting port first abnormal winning is a notification effect for detecting that the out ball has not been detected for 2 seconds. The second start port first abnormal winning notification effect control command indicating the content of the notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c, and the command analysis process is terminated.
In addition, it corresponds to the alerting | reporting means which alert | reports that the 2nd start opening 1st abnormal winning alert process of this step S1350 became the predetermined relationship of this invention.

The second start port first abnormal winning notification effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. The image control board 105 executes the second start port first abnormal winning notification effect by receiving the second starting port first abnormal winning notification effect control command. Specifically, when the image control board 105 receives the second start opening first abnormal winning notification effect control command, as shown in FIG. 109 (c), the effect performed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14. A character image of “second start opening first abnormal winning” is displayed for 30 seconds on the front of the image, and the voice output device 15 outputs a sound of “second starting opening first abnormal winning” to the gaming machine Y. Output at the maximum volume that can be set for 30 seconds.
In this way, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice “second start opening first abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop has a high noise level. Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the first starting prize for the first start opening, and cheating can be prevented.

  In addition, although it was decided that the 2nd starting opening 1st abnormal winning notification effect was done for 30 seconds, the reporting start time of the 2nd starting opening 1st abnormal winning notification effect is not limited to 30 seconds. For example, as long as the power of the gaming machine Y is not turned off, the second start opening first abnormal winning notification effect may not be ended. Thus, unless the power source of the gaming machine Y is turned off, the player cannot usually operate the power source of the gaming machine Y by not ending the second start opening first abnormal winning notification effect. As long as the store clerk does not come, the second start opening first abnormal winning notification effect is not ended, so that illegal acts can be prevented.

  In step S1351, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a second start port second abnormal winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the second start opening second abnormal winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1352, and the command stored in the reception buffer is the second start opening second command. If it is determined that the command is not an abnormal winning designation command, the process proceeds to step S1353.

In step S1352, the sub CPU 102a outputs a second start opening second abnormal winning, which is a notification effect when a game ball exceeding the specified ball is won at the second starting opening 7 when 100 game balls are launched. A second start port second abnormal prize notification effect control command indicating the content of the notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c, and the command analysis process ends.
In addition, it is equivalent to the alerting | reporting means which alert | reports that the 2nd starting opening 2nd abnormal prize alerting | reporting process of this step S1352 became the predetermined relationship of this invention.

The second start port second abnormal winning notification effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. The image control board 105 executes the second start port second abnormal winning notification effect by receiving the second starting port second abnormal winning notification effect control command. Specifically, when the image control board 105 receives the second start opening second abnormal winning notification effect control command, the effect performed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. 109 (d). A character image of “second start opening second abnormal winning” is displayed for 30 seconds in front of the image, and the gaming machine Y outputs a sound “second starting opening second abnormal winning” by the voice output device 15. Output at the maximum volume that can be set for 30 seconds.
In this way, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice of “second start opening second abnormal winning” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop has a high noise level. Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware that the second start opening second abnormal winning has occurred, and can prevent fraud.

  In addition, although it was decided that the 2nd start opening 2nd abnormal prize information production effect is done for 30 seconds, the information production time of the 2nd start mouth 2nd abnormal prize information production effect is not limited to 30 seconds. For example, as long as the power of the gaming machine Y is not turned off, the second start opening second abnormal winning notification effect may not be ended. Thus, unless the power source of the gaming machine Y is turned off, the player cannot normally operate the power source of the gaming machine Y by not ending the second start opening second abnormal winning notification effect. As long as the store clerk does not come, the second start opening second abnormal winning notification effect is not ended, so that illegal acts can be prevented.

  In step S1353, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the second start port third abnormal winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the second start port third abnormal winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1354, and the command stored in the reception buffer is the second start port first command. If it is determined that the command is not an abnormal winning designation command, the process proceeds to step S1355.

  In step S 1354, the sub CPU 102 a performs the second start port third abnormal prize notification effect that is a notification effect for detecting three balls for the second start port 7 per 60 seconds outside the valid winning port effective period. The second start port third abnormal winning notification effect control command indicating the content is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c, and the command analysis processing is terminated.

The second start port third abnormal winning notification effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. The image control board 105 executes the second start opening third abnormal winning notification effect by receiving the second starting opening third abnormal winning notification effect control command. Specifically, when the image control board 105 receives the second start port third abnormal winning notification effect control command, the effect being performed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. 109 (e). A character image of “second start opening third abnormal prize” is displayed for 30 seconds on the front of the image, and the gaming machine Y outputs a voice “second start opening third abnormal prize” by the voice output device 15. Output at the maximum volume that can be set for 30 seconds.
In this way, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice “second start opening third abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop has a high noise level. Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the second start opening third abnormal winning, and cheating can be prevented.

  In addition, although it was decided that the 2nd start opening 3rd abnormal winning notification effect was performed for 30 seconds, the notification effect time of the 2nd starting port 3rd abnormal winning notification effect is not limited to 30 seconds. For example, as long as the power of the gaming machine Y is not turned off, the second start port third abnormal winning notification effect may not be ended. Thus, unless the power source of the gaming machine Y is turned off, the player cannot normally operate the power source of the gaming machine Y by not ending the second start opening third abnormal winning notification effect. As long as the store clerk does not come, the second start opening third abnormal winning notification effect is not finished, so that illegal acts can be prevented.

  In step S1355, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a magnetic detection abnormality designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a magnetic detection abnormality designation command, the process proceeds to step S1356, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is not a magnetic detection abnormality designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step S1357.

  In step S1356, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, a magnetic detection abnormality notification effect control command indicating the content of the magnetic detection abnormality notification effect that is a notification effect for the magnetic detection sensors 81a to 84a detecting magnetism. Then, the command analysis process ends.

The magnetic detection abnormality notification effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. The image control board 105 executes the magnetic detection abnormality notification effect by receiving the magnetic detection abnormality notification effect control command. Specifically, when the image control board 105 receives the magnetic detection abnormality notification effect control command, as shown in FIG. 110 (b-1), the effect image displayed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 is displayed. A character image of “magnetic detection abnormality” is displayed on the front for 30 seconds, and a sound “magnetic detection abnormality” is output by the audio output device 15 at a maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y for 30 seconds.
In this way, by causing the sound output device 15 to output the sound of “magnetic detection abnormality” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop has a high noise level. Even in a large environment, the store clerk can be made aware that a magnetic detection abnormality has occurred, and cheating can be prevented.

  Although the magnetic detection abnormality notification effect is performed for 30 seconds, the notification effect time of the magnetic detection abnormality notification effect is not limited to 30 seconds. For example, the magnetic detection abnormality notification effect may not be ended unless the power of the gaming machine Y is turned off. As described above, unless the power of the gaming machine Y is turned off, the magnetic detection abnormality notification effect is not ended, so that normally, the player cannot operate the power of the gaming machine Y, so that the store clerk does not come. As long as the magnetic detection abnormality notification effect does not end, fraudulent acts can be prevented.

  In step S1357, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a vibration detection abnormality designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a vibration detection abnormality designation command, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to step S1358, and determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is not a vibration detection abnormality designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step S1359.

  In step S1358, the sub CPU 102a sets a vibration detection abnormality notification effect control command indicating the content of the vibration detection abnormality notification effect which is a notification effect for the vibration detection sensor 85a detecting vibration in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The command analysis process ends.

The vibration detection abnormality notification effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. The image control board 105 executes the vibration detection abnormality notification effect by receiving the vibration detection abnormality notification effect control command. Specifically, when the image control board 105 receives the vibration detection abnormality notification effect control command, as shown in FIG. 111 (b-1), the effect image displayed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 is displayed. A character image of “vibration detection abnormality” is displayed on the front for 30 seconds, and a voice “vibration detection abnormality” is output by the audio output device 15 at a maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y for 30 seconds.
In this way, by causing the sound output device 15 to output a sound of “vibration detection abnormality” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, game stores are noisy. Even in a large environment, the store clerk can be made aware that a vibration detection abnormality has occurred, and fraud can be prevented.

  Although the vibration detection abnormality notification effect is performed for 30 seconds, the notification effect time of the vibration detection abnormality notification effect is not limited to 30 seconds. For example, the vibration detection abnormality notification effect may not be ended unless the power of the gaming machine Y is turned off. In this way, unless the power of the gaming machine Y is turned off, the vibration detection abnormality notification effect is not ended, so that normally the player cannot operate the power source of the gaming machine Y, so the store clerk does not come. As long as the vibration detection abnormality notification effect does not end, fraudulent acts can be prevented.

  In step S1359, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a dish full tank abnormality occurrence designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a dish full tank abnormality occurrence designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves to step S1360, and the command stored in the reception buffer is not a dish full tank abnormality occurrence designation command. If it is determined that there is not, the process proceeds to step S 1361.

  In step S1360, the sub CPU 102a performs dish full tank abnormality notification processing for performing the dish full tank abnormality notification effect (dish full tank abnormality first notification effect, dish full tank abnormality second notification effect). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S 1361, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a dish full tank abnormality release designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a dish full tank abnormality release designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves to step S1362, and the command stored in the reception buffer is not a dish full tank abnormality release designation command. If it is determined that there is not, the process proceeds to step S 1363.

  In step S 1362, the sub CPU 102 a performs dish full tank abnormality notification cancellation processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the dish full tank first abnormality notification effect or the dish full tank second abnormality notification effect is being performed. If it is determined that the dish full tank first abnormality notification effect or the dish full tank second abnormality notification effect is being performed, the dish full tank first abnormality notification effect or the dish full tank second abnormality notification effect is being performed. Is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c, and the dish full tank abnormality notification canceling process is terminated. If it is determined that the dish full tank first abnormality notification effect or the dish full tank second abnormality notification effect is not performed, the dish full tank abnormality notification cancellation process is terminated.

  In step S 1363, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an out-sphere detection designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is an out sphere detection designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1364, and determines that the command is not an out sphere detection designation command, and ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1364, the sub CPU 102a performs an out ball process related to a special effect that is an effect based on the out information, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  With reference to FIG. 57A, the customer waiting effect start processing by the effect control board 102 will be described. In step S1303-1, the sub CPU 102a turns on the demonstration effect standby flag in the demonstration effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1303-2, the demonstration effect standby time (the time until the demonstration effect is started) In the embodiment, 30 seconds = 7500 counter) is set in the customer waiting effect timer counter of the sub-RAM 102c, and the customer waiting effect start process ends.

  The ON of the demonstration effect standby flag indicates that the demonstration effect standby flag is on standby to start the demonstration effect. Also, the customer waiting effect timer counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S1200.

  With reference to FIG. 57B, the customer waiting effect end process by the effect control board 102 will be described. In step S1310-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the demonstration effect standby flag is turned on. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the demonstration effect standby flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1310-2, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the demonstration effect standby flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1310-4.

  The sub CPU 102a turns off the demonstration effect standby flag in step S1310-2, clears the customer waiting effect timer counter in step S1310-3, and ends the customer waiting effect end process.

  The sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the demonstration effect execution flag is turned on in step S1310-4. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the demonstration effect execution flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1310-5. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the demonstration effect execution flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1310-7.

  In step S1310-5, the sub CPU 102a turns off the demonstration effect execution flag, sets a demonstration effect end command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in step S1310-6, and ends the customer waiting effect end process.

  The demonstration effect end command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 end the demonstration effect by receiving the demonstration effect end command.

  In step S1310-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the power saving mode flag is turned on. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the power saving mode flag is ON, it moves the process to step S1310-8. If it determines that the power saving mode flag is not ON, the sub CPU 102a ends the customer waiting effect end processing.

  In step S1310-8, the sub CPU 102a turns off the power saving mode flag. In step S1310-9, the sub CPU 102a sets a power saving mode cancel command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the customer waiting effect end processing.

  The power saving mode cancel command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 end the power saving mode by receiving the power saving mode release command.

  The special effect symbol stop display pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1308-1, the current effect mode is confirmed by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub-RAM 102c, and the special effect symbol associated with the current effect mode is stopped. Select the display pattern judgment table. This is because the special effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for determining the special effect symbol stop display pattern indicating the combination (placement) of the decorative symbols on the predetermined effective line in the special effect symbol stop display is divided according to the effect mode. Because.

  In the present embodiment, the effect mode is roughly divided into four effect modes: effect mode A, effect mode B, effect mode C, and effect mode D.

  The production mode A is a normal production mode set in correspondence with the low probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state. The effect mode B is an effect mode that represents a game state that is most advantageous to the player and is set corresponding to a high-probability gaming state after a probable big hit and a short-time gaming state.

  The production mode C is set corresponding to a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, or a low-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state that occurs after winning per high-probability short-lived length or low-probability short-lived length. This is an effect mode in which it is difficult to recognize whether the game state is a low probability game state or a high probability game state. On the other hand, the production mode D is set corresponding to a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-short gaming state, or a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-short gaming state that occur after winning a high-probability short-time or short-winning win. This is an effect mode in which it is difficult to recognize whether the game state is a low probability game state or a high probability game state.

  In step S1308-2, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the special effect symbol designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1308-3, the special effect symbol designation command associated with the special effect symbol designation command is stopped. A display pattern determination table is selected, and a special effect symbol stop display pattern determination table used for determining the special effect symbol stop display pattern is determined. This is because the special effect symbol stop display pattern determination table divided by the effect mode is further divided by the special effect symbol designation command.

  In the present embodiment, one or more special effect symbol stop display patterns are stored in association with the special effect symbol stop display pattern determination value for each special effect symbol designation command in each effect mode.

  In step S1308-4, the sub CPU 102a stores the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the special effect symbol stop display pattern determination random number in the special effect symbol stop display pattern determination random number storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and step S1308-5. The special effect symbol stop display pattern determination is performed by comparing the stored special effect symbol stop display pattern determination random number with the selected special effect symbol stop display pattern determination table to determine the special effect symbol stop display pattern. The symbol stop display pattern is determined.

  In step S1308-6, the sub CPU 102a sets a special effect symbol stop display control command corresponding to the special effect symbol stop display pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1308-7, the special effect symbol stop display pattern is set. Corresponding special effect symbol stop display data is set in the special effect symbol stop display data storage area of the sub-RAM 102c, and the special effect symbol stop display pattern determination process ends.

  The special effect symbol stop display control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the special effect symbol stop display control command, the special effect symbol stop display pattern indicated by the command when the special symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. The image display device 14 is caused to execute the stop display.

  The variation effect timer counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can specify the remaining time of the variation effect, in other words, the time elapsed since the variation effect was started, by the variation effect timer counter.

  The variation effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1311-1, the current effect mode is confirmed by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the variation effect pattern determination associated with the current effect mode is made. Select a table. This is because the variation effect pattern determination table for determining the variation effect pattern representing the effect contents of the variation effect is divided according to the effect mode.

  In step S1311-2, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not a prefetch effect mode designation flag indicating that it is a prefetch effect mode to be described later is turned on. This is because the effect mode A and the effect mode D are further divided depending on whether or not the variation effect pattern determination table divided according to the effect mode is in the pre-read effect mode.

  Therefore, in the effect mode A or effect mode D, if the prefetch effect mode designation flag is turned on, the sub CPU 102a selects the change effect pattern determination table for the prefetch effect mode, and the prefetch effect mode designation flag is turned on. If not, the variation effect pattern determination table for the non-prefetch effect mode is selected.

  In step S1311-3, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the special figure variation pattern designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. This is because the variation effect pattern determination table divided by the effect mode is further divided by a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command (special figure fluctuation pattern).

  In step S1311-4, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not a preset specific condition is satisfied. Satisfaction of the specific condition means that all of the following detailed conditions 1 to 4 are satisfied. Condition 1 is currently the production mode A, and condition 2 is that the special symbol lottery result related to the fluctuation production is a probable big hit or a normal big hit, and the special figure fluctuation time related to the fluctuation production is 90 seconds. That is the above, Condition 3 is that the number of first out balls, which is the number of out sphere detection designation commands (generated out spheres) input to the effect control board 102 after power-on described later, is 20000 or more, and Condition 4 The time based on the RTC 102d is a specific time (in this embodiment, from 21:00 to 22:00). Whether or not the specific condition set in advance is satisfied is that the special symbol lottery result of the special symbol lottery related to the variation effect is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit in the production mode A, and the special figure related to the fluctuation production This is because the variation effect pattern determination table when the variation time is 90 seconds or more is further divided into a case where the specific condition is satisfied and a case where the specific condition is not satisfied.

  In step S1311-1 to step S1311-4, the sub CPU 102a selects a variation effect pattern determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern designation command, and determines a variation effect pattern determination table used for variation effect pattern determination. . This is because each variation effect pattern determination table divided according to the presence / absence of the effect mode and the prefetch effect mode is further divided by the special figure variation pattern designation command.

  In the present embodiment, in each effect mode, one or more variable effect patterns are stored in association with the change effect pattern determination value for each special figure change pattern designation command. The variation effect pattern is identification information representing the effect content of the variation effect, and includes the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the effect accessory devices 200 to 203, and the effect button device. The specific effect mode of the change effect performed by 18 is matched.

  Fluctuation effect components such as change effect time, presence / absence of reach effect, contents of reach effect, presence / absence of effect button effect, content of effect button effect, effect deployment structure, etc. It is attached. In addition, the variation effect pattern of the variation effect in the image display device 14 includes a variation display display mode of the special effect symbol, an object image composed of a character or the like, a display mode related to the background image, and the like. It is associated as an element.

  In step S1311-5, the sub CPU 102a stores the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the random effect pattern determination random number in the random effect pattern determination random number storage area of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1311-6, the stored variable effect is stored. A random number for pattern determination is acquired, and in step S1311-7, a variation effect pattern determination is performed in which a variation effect pattern is determined by checking the selected variation effect pattern determination table.

  In step S1311-8, the sub CPU 102a sets the variable effect control command corresponding to the variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1311-9, the variable effect data corresponding to the variable effect pattern is stored in the sub RAM 102c. In step S1311-10, the variation effect time that is the effect time of the variation effect is set in the variation effect timer counter of the sub RAM 102c, and the variation effect pattern determination process ends.

  The variation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the fluctuation effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the effect display device such as the image display device 14 to execute the change effect based on the change effect pattern indicated by the command.

  In addition, a special variation effect that does not appear when the specific condition is not satisfied is executed as the variable effect based on the variation effect pattern selected when the specific condition is satisfied. For example, the protagonist character that appears when it is not established is in a special form (for example, red clothing when it is not established, rainbow pattern or zebra pattern when established). In addition, in the special variation effect when the specific condition is satisfied, it may be set so that all the effect modes of the effect devices 14 to 16, 18 and 200 to 203 that execute the change effect are special. It is also possible to set the aspect to be special.

  The variation effect timer counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can specify the remaining time of the variation effect, in other words, the time elapsed since the variation effect was started, by the variation effect timer counter.

  Next, the variation effect end process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1313-1, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, a variable effect end command indicating the end of the variable effect including the stop display of the special effect symbol that is variably displayed.

  The variable effect end command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the change effect end command, recognize that the change effect ends, and end the change effect.

  In step S1313-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a special privilege game mode flag to be described later is turned on. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special privilege game mode flag is turned on, it moves the process to step S1313-3, and if it determines that the special privilege game mode flag is not turned on, the sub CPU102a ends the variation effect end processing. The special privilege game mode is a special period in which privilege points can be given (execution of privilege games) triggered by the stop display of the special effect symbol on the condition that it is the effect mode D.

  In step S1313-3, the sub CPU 102a sets the special effect symbol stop display pattern for the special effect symbol stop display to be performed in advance based on the special effect symbol stop display data set in the sub RAM 102c. It is determined whether the special effect symbol stop display pattern. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a specific special effect symbol stop display pattern, it moves the process to step S1313-4, and if it determines that it is not a specific special effect symbol stop display pattern, it ends the variation effect end process.

  In the present embodiment, as the specific special effect symbol stop display pattern, the special effect symbol stop display pattern (first special effect symbol stop display pattern) in which “3” is included in the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed on the active line, A special effect symbol stop display pattern (second special effect symbol stop display pattern) in which “2” and “9” are included in the decorative symbol, or an arrangement of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the active line is “1” from the left. The special effect symbol stop display pattern (third special effect symbol stop display pattern) of “6” “4” or “1” “6” “5” is set.

  The sub CPU 102a confirms the counter value of the second out ball counter provided in the sub RAM 102c in step S1313-4, confirms the special privilege grant mode level in step S1313-5, and special in step S1313-3. Based on the effect symbol stop pattern, the counter value of the second out ball counter, and the special privilege granting mode level, the special game privilege pattern is determined.

  The second out ball counter counts the number of out balls generated in the privilege grant mode (hereinafter referred to as “second out ball number”) when the privilege grant mode is set. The level of the special privilege granting mode is the stage in which the user stays in the special privilege granting mode, and is associated with the ease of granting of privilege points, and as the level of the special privilege granting mode increases, the privilege points are granted It becomes easy to be done.

  The special game privilege pattern determination is a pattern of a game privilege (privilege points) given in a special game performed in accordance with the stop display of the special effect symbol by the specific special effect symbol stop display pattern in the effect mode D (hereinafter, “ A special game privilege pattern).

  The special game privilege pattern is associated with the privilege points to be given. In this embodiment, the privilege points granted in the special privilege grant mode are “50”, “100”, “150”, “300”, “500”, “750”, and “1000”. (Refer to FIG. 97) The types of privilege points and privilege points to be granted are not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

  The special game privilege pattern determination is performed using a special game privilege pattern determination table stored in the sub ROM 102b. As shown in FIG. 97, the special game privilege pattern determination table is divided according to the range of the second out ball number. Specifically, a special game privilege pattern determination table (FIG. 97 (a)) used when the second out ball number (= count value of the second out ball counter) is “5000” or less, and the second out ball Special game privilege pattern determination table (FIG. 97 (b)) used when the number is “5001” to “12500”, and special game privilege pattern determination table used when the second out ball number is “12501” or more. (FIG. 97 (c)). Each special game privilege pattern determination table is further divided according to the combination of the special effect symbol stop display pattern and the level of the special privilege grant mode.

  In FIG. 97, a plurality of privilege points that can be granted are set in each special game privilege pattern determination table divided according to the second out ball number, the special effect symbol stop pattern, and the special privilege grant mode level. In the privilege pattern determination, any privilege point is assigned with a predetermined probability. As this determination method, for example, a random determination value corresponding to each of a plurality of privilege points is set in each special game privilege pattern determination table, and the special game privilege pattern determination is the same as the random effect pattern determination random number. A random number is provided, and a random value is acquired at the predetermined time, and the acquired random value is collated with a special game privilege pattern determination table according to the second out ball number, the special effect symbol stop pattern, and the special privilege grant mode level. Special game bonus patterns (privilege points) are determined. This determination method is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

  For example, 34% if the second out ball number is “5000” or less, the first special effect design stop display pattern in which “3” is included in the decorative design, and the special privilege grant mode level is “1”. The special game privilege pattern 1 is determined with a probability of 33%, the special game privilege pattern 2 is determined with a probability of 33%, and the special game privilege pattern 3 is determined with a probability of 33% (see FIG. 97 (a)). Also, the second out ball number is “5001” to “12500” or less, the second special effect symbol stop display pattern in which “2” and “9” are included in the decorative symbol, and the special privilege granting mode level is “ 2 ”, it is determined as the special gaming privilege pattern 3 with a probability of 20%, is determined as the special gaming privilege pattern 4 with a probability of 30%, and is determined as the special gaming privilege pattern 5 with a probability of 50% (FIG. 97 (b)). Further, the third special effect symbol stop display in which the second out ball number is “12501” or more and the arrangement of the decorative symbols is “1” “6” “4” or “1” “6” “5” from the left. If it is a pattern and the special privilege granting mode level is “3”, it is determined as a special game privilege pattern 5 with a probability of 5%, and is determined as a special game privilege pattern 6 with a probability of 15%, with a probability of 80%. The special game privilege pattern 7 is determined (see FIG. 97 (c)).

  As shown in FIG. 97, in the present embodiment, the privilege points that can be given increase as the second out-ball number increases. Further, as the special privilege grant mode level becomes higher, the ratio of giving higher privilege points to each special game privilege pattern determination table becomes higher. Furthermore, the privilege point which can be provided becomes higher in the order of the third special effect symbol stop display pattern> the second special effect symbol stop display pattern> the first special effect symbol stop display pattern. In this embodiment, in the special effect symbol stop display pattern determination table, the first special effect symbol stop display pattern> the second special effect symbol stop display pattern> the third special effect symbol stop display pattern are selected in this order. Shall be allocated in such a way. That is, as the type of the special effect symbol stop display pattern becomes difficult to select, the privilege points that can be given increase. The special figure variation pattern related to the special effect symbol stop display pattern to which the privilege point is given in the special privilege grant mode is different depending on the second out number of balls, the special effect symbol stop pattern, and the special privilege grant mode level in the case of no reach reach. By giving privilege points, the player can be paid attention to the lossless reach and can be prevented from getting bored with the game. In addition, the privilege point provided by the 2nd out ball number, special effect design stop pattern, and special privilege provision mode level can also be set suitably. Also, only one special game privilege pattern can be set in one special game privilege pattern determination table.

  In step S1313-7, the sub CPU 102a sets a privilege point granting special game privilege pattern effect control command for notifying (displaying) the privilege points to be provided in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  The privilege point giving effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. And lamp control board 104 and image control board 105 will display a privilege point which the command shows in a predetermined field of display field 140 of image display device 14 in a predetermined mode, if a privilege point grant effect control command is received. Details of the display of privilege points in the special privilege game mode will be described later.

  Next, the effect mode setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1314-1, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the special effect designating command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1314-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. judge. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is lost, it moves the process to step S1314-3, and if it determines that it is not lost, it moves the process to step S1314-7.

  In step S1314-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a small hit, it moves the process to step S1314-8, and if it determines that it is not a small hit, it moves the process to step S1314-9.

  In step S1314-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current state is the high probability gaming state. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is in the high probability gaming state, it moves the process to step S1314-3, and if it determines that it is not in the high probability gaming state, it moves the process to step S1314-9.

  In step S1314-9, the sub CPU 102a confirms the result of the special symbol determination based on the information included in the special effect symbol designation command analyzed in step S1314-1, and associates the result of the special symbol determination with the sub ROM 102b. Is selected from the production mode determination table (see FIG. 82).

  Each effect mode determination table is associated with the effect mode determination value and the effect mode. Therefore, the sub CPU 102a acquires the effect mode determination random number indicated by the effect mode determination random number counter in step S1314-10, and collates the acquired effect mode determination random number with the effect mode determination table in step S1314-1. To determine the production mode.

  In step S1314-12, the sub CPU 102a stores an effect mode flag corresponding to the determined effect mode in the effect mode flag storage area, and the number of executions of the effect mode (Ma) associated with the effect mode. Is set in the effect mode remaining number counter provided in the sub-RAM 102c, and the effect mode setting process ends.

  The number of performance mode executions is the number of variable effects that can be executed in the effect mode. The effect mode remaining number counter indicates the remaining number of fluctuation effects that can be executed in a specific effect mode in which the effect mode executable number (Ma) is set (M: remaining number of effect modes).

  On the other hand, in step S1314-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the presentation mode A is currently set, that is, whether the presentation mode flag “00H” is set in the presentation mode flag storage area.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the effect mode A, the effect mode setting process ends. When determining that the mode is not the production mode A, the sub CPU 102a updates the remaining number (M) of the production mode by subtracting “1” from the counter value of the production mode remaining number counter in Step S1314-4. In step S1, it is determined whether the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is “0”.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is not “0”, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect mode setting process, and determines that the counter value is “0”, in step S1314-6. The production mode flag “00H” is set in the production mode flag storage area (production mode A is set), and the production mode setting process is terminated.

  62, the special game effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In step S1318-1, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the special game opening designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1318-2, the special game effect design pattern associated with the special game opening designation command. A determination table is selected, and a special game effect pattern determination table used for determining a special game effect pattern is determined. This is because the special game effect pattern determination table is divided by the special game opening designation command (see FIG. 83A).

  In the present embodiment, one or more special game effect patterns are stored in association with special game effect pattern determination values for each special game opening designation command. The special game effect pattern is identification information representing the effect contents of the special game effect, and includes the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the effect accessory devices 200 to 203, and the effect. A specific effect mode of the special game effect performed by the button device 18 is associated.

  Components of special game effects such as the time of special game effects, the contents of the effect button effects, the effect development structure, and the like are associated with the specific effect modes of the special game effects.

  In step S1318-3, the sub CPU 102a acquires the random value indicated by the random number counter related to the special game effect pattern determination random number in the special game effect pattern determination random number storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1318-4, acquired. The special game effect pattern determination for determining the special game effect pattern by comparing the random number for determining the special game effect pattern with the selected special game effect pattern determination table is performed.

  In step S1318-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the determined special game effect pattern is a specific special game effect pattern set in advance. In the present embodiment, the special game effect pattern “B1” related to the probability variation jackpot 1 and the special game effect pattern “B15” related to the probability variation jackpot 1 are set as specific special game effect patterns. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a specific special game effect pattern, it moves the process to step S1318-6, and if it determines that it is not a specific special game effect pattern, it moves the process to step S1318-8.

  In step S1318-6, the sub CPU 102a confirms the current time based on the second out ball count and the RTC 102d, and in step S1318-7, further details of the special game effect pattern “B1” or the special game effect pattern “B15”. A specific special game production pattern is determined.

  The determination of the specific special game effect pattern is performed based on a specific special game effect pattern determination table provided for each specific special game effect pattern in the sub ROM 102b. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), in each specific special game effect pattern determination table, the range of the second number of out balls and the time range are set as parameters for determining the specific special game effect pattern. As the range of the second out ball number, the second out ball number ranges from “0” to “7500” (= second out ball number range 1) and ranges from “7501” to “15000” (= second An out ball count range 2) and a range equal to or greater than “15001” (= second out ball count range 3) are set. Also, as the time, a time from 0:00 to 13:00 (= time range 1), a time from 13:00 to 17:30 (= time range 2), and 17:30 to 0:00 A time to minutes (= time range 3) is set.

  The sub CPU 102a identifies the range of the second out sphere to which the second out sphere belongs and the time to which the current time belongs based on the second out sphere number and the current time confirmed in step S1318-6, and specifies these A specific special game effect pattern is determined based on the result and the special game effect pattern determined in step S1318-4. The specific special game effect pattern is also a special game effect pattern.

  For example, if the special game effect pattern is “B1”, the second out ball number is “5000”, and the current time is 11:00, it is determined to be the specific special game effect pattern “B1-1”. Further, if the special game effect pattern is “B15”, the second out-ball number is “10000”, and the current time is 17:30, it is determined as the specific special game effect pattern “B15-5”. .

  In step S1318-8, the sub CPU 102a sets a special game effect control command representing the special game effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1318-9, special game effect data corresponding to the special game effect pattern is obtained. The special game effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c is set, and in step S1318-10, the special game effect time which is the effect time of the special game effect is set in the special game effect timer counter of the sub RAM 102c.

  The special game effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the special game effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the effect device such as the image display device 14 to execute the special game effect based on the special game effect pattern indicated by the command.

  Further, the special game effect timer counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can specify the remaining time of the special game effect, in other words, the time elapsed since the start of the special game effect, by the special game effect timer counter.

  In the present embodiment, the special game effects based on the specific special game effect patterns “B1-1” to “B1-9” are image effects in the display area 140 of the image display device 14, illumination effects by the effect lighting device 16, and The production mode of the operation production by the production effect devices 200 to 203 is the same, and the production mode of the audio production by the audio output device 15 is a specific special game production pattern, that is, a combination of the above preset parameter ranges. Depending on. Specifically, in the special game effect of the specific special game effect pattern (B1-1, B1-4, B1-7) related to the time range 1, the song that flows as the sound effect is the first song that is based on the morning. The special game effects of the specific special game effect pattern (B1-2, B1-5, B1-8) related to the time range 2 is the second song on the theme of noon, and the special special game effect related to the time range 3 In the special game effects of the patterns (B1-3, B1-6, B1-9), it is the third song with the theme of night. On the other hand, in the special game effect of the specific special game effect pattern (B1-1, B1-2, B1-3) related to the second outball range 1, the singer A sings a song that flows as a sound effect, In the special game production of the special special game production pattern (B1-4, B1-5, B1-6) according to the out-of-ball number range 2, the singer B who is more popular than the singer A sings a song that flows as an audio production, In the special game effect of the specific special game effect pattern (B1-7, B1-8, B1-9) according to the second outball range 3, the singer C, who is more popular than the singer B, sings a song that flows as a sound effect. Yes. In this way, the type of music is associated with the time that is a parameter for determining the specific special game effect pattern, and the range of the second out ball that is the parameter for determining the specific special game effect pattern. Is associated with the type of singer.

  In the present embodiment, as the special game effect by the specific special game effect pattern, the sound effect effect mode by the sound output device 15 is different depending on the above parameters, but is not limited to this, and the sound effect effect mode is the same. If it exists, the production | presentation aspect of the image presentation by the image display apparatus 14 can also be made to differ. Furthermore, as a special game effect based on the specific special game effect pattern, only a part of the effect devices 14 to 16 and 200 to 203 is made different in the effect mode according to the above parameters, but the effect devices 14 to 16 and 200 are used. It is also possible to make the production mode different for all of .about.203. Further, the determination of the specific special game effect pattern is not limited to the probable jackpot, and other types of jackpots and jackpots can also be determined. The special game effect pattern related to the probable jackpot is composed of a special game effect pattern that determines the specific special game effect and a special game effect pattern that does not determine the specific special game effect, but determines the specific special game effect. It may be configured only by a special game effect pattern that does not determine a special game effect pattern or a specific special game effect. In addition, a plurality of special game effect patterns for determining a specific special game effect are set, and the contents of the parameter ranges and / or the types of parameters can be appropriately set for each special game effect pattern.

  In step S1318-11, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special game effect is a special game effect related to the short hit game or the small hit game based on the set special game effect data. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a special game effect related to the short win game or the small hit game, it moves the process to step S1318-12, and if it determines that it is not a special game effect related to the short hit game or the small hit game, the special game The effect pattern determination process ends.

  In step S1318-12, the sub CPU 102a turns on the AT short open out determination flag in the AT short open out determination flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1318-13, the AT short open out determination value (this embodiment). In the embodiment, 10 seconds = 2500 counter) is set in the firing confirmation counter.

  When the AT short release out determination flag is ON, the number of out balls generated in a short hit game or a small hit game to be performed is counted. The AT short-opening out determination value is a privilege for launching a game ball in spite of being a big hit game or a small hit game in which it is difficult to put the game ball into the first big prize opening 8 It is a determination value related to the number of out balls for executing a special effect which is a special effect.

  A round effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1320-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special game effect data set in the sub RAM 102c. In step S1320-2, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the round designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. In -3, the round effect pattern determination table associated with the special game effect pattern indicated by the special game effect data and the round number (R) indicated by the round designation command is selected. This is because the round effect pattern determination table is divided by the special game effect data and the round number (R) indicated by the round designation command (see FIG. 83 (c)).

  In the present embodiment, one or more special game effect patterns are stored in association with the special game effect pattern determination value for each round designation command. The round effect pattern is identification information indicating the effect contents of the round effect pattern, and includes the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the effect accessory devices 200 to 203, and the effect button. A specific effect mode of the round effect performed by the device 18 is associated. A component of a round effect is associated with the round effect pattern.

  In step S1320-4, the sub CPU 102a performs round effect pattern determination for determining the round effect pattern by checking the round game number indicated by the round designation command with the selected round effect pattern determination table.

  In step S1320-5, the sub CPU 102a sets a round effect control command corresponding to the round effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1320-6, the round effect data corresponding to the round effect pattern is stored in the sub RAM 102c. Set in the round effect data storage area.

  The round effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the round effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the effect device such as the image display device 14 to execute a round effect based on the round effect pattern indicated by the command.

  In step S1320-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the first specific round game in the jackpot game is executed. The specific round game here refers to a round game that is open for an easy time (for example, 29.0 seconds) to enter a game ball. In the present embodiment, the first specific round game is set to the first round game of the long hit game. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the first specific round game is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1320-8. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the first specific round game is not to be executed, the round effect pattern determination process ends.

  In step S1320-8, the sub CPU 102a turns on the specific round firing confirmation flag in the specific round firing confirmation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1320-9, the specific round firing confirmation timer provided in the sub RAM 102c. The confirmation time for launching during a specific round is set in the counter (in this embodiment, 10 seconds = 2500 counter).

  Note that ON of the specific round launch confirmation flag indicates that the time until the out ball is first detected in the specific round game is measured. Further, the firing confirmation timer counter during the specific round is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S1200.

  Next, roulette effect determination processing by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the roulette effect determination process, an effect type (effect content) of the roulette effect is determined, and a process for executing the roulette effect is performed based on the effect type. The roulette effect is an effect that is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 14 on the condition that a normal symbol variation display is performed. In the roulette effect, in the box image B, which is a specific area of the display area 140 of the image display device 14, the special symbol determination result, the normal symbol determination result, or the variation display and stop of the specific effect symbol suggesting execution of the specific effect Display is performed (see FIGS. 99 to 101). As the effect type of the roulette effect, the display mode of the variation display of the specific effect symbol and the display mode of the stop display of the specific effect symbol are associated.

  The production types of roulette production are set from production type 1 to production type 7, and specific production contents are associated with each production type. Here, the correspondence between the effect types and the effect contents shown in FIGS. 84 to 86 and the specific contents of the effect contents will be described.

  The production content “Dango” corresponding to the production type 1 is production content that suggests that the second auxiliary game is executed by winning 2 in the normal symbol determination. The production content “Intense heat” corresponding to the production type 2 is production content that suggests that a special symbol determination is won. The production content “☆” corresponding to the production type 3 is production content that suggests winning a long game in the special symbol determination. The effect content “Z” corresponding to the effect type 4 is an effect content that suggests a shift to a pre-read effect mode that is a notice effect that suggests a short win or a small win. The effect content “×” corresponding to the effect type 5 indicates that the first auxiliary game is executed by winning 1 in the normal symbol determination, or that the auxiliary game is not executed due to a loss in the normal symbol determination. It is production contents. The production content “normal P” corresponding to the production type 6 is production content that suggests that a normal privilege game (hereinafter referred to as “normal privilege game”) is executed and a predetermined game privilege is given. The effect content “special P” corresponding to the effect type 7 is an effect content that suggests that a special privilege game that is a privilege game to which a larger amount of game benefits can be given than a normal privilege game is executed.

  In step S1324-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current effect mode A or effect mode D is set. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is not the effect mode A or the effect mode D, it ends the roulette effect determination process, and if it determines that it is the effect mode A or the effect mode D, it moves the process to step S1324-2. This is because in this embodiment, the roulette effect is performed in the non-short game state (effect mode A or effect mode D) and not in the time-short game state (effect mode B or effect mode C).

  In step S1324-2, the sub CPU 102a checks the special figure variation pattern data, and in step S1324-2, determines whether or not a specific reach effect is currently being executed. Here, an example of a method for determining whether or not a specific reach effect is being performed will be described. The image control board 105 performs a drawing process related to the change effect based on the change effect control command transmitted from the effect control board 102 at the start of the change effect, and is currently performing what kind of effect content drawing process. Can be recognized. Then, the image control board 105 transmits a specific reach production start command indicating the start of the specific reach production to the production control board 102 at the start of the specific reach production. Further, the image control board 105 transmits a specific reach effect end command indicating the end of the specific reach effect to the effect control board 102 when the specific reach effect ends. Based on the specific reach production start command and the specific reach production end command, the sub CPU 102a of the production control board 102 sets a specific flag indicating that the reach production is being performed during a specific reach production in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c. It is determined whether or not a specific reach production is in progress. The determination as to whether or not a specific reach effect is being performed can also be made by the sub CPU 102a measuring the start time and execution time of the specific reach effect.

  Here, the specific reach effect is a super reach effect in a specific change effect (for example, a change effect based on a special map change pattern representing reach 2 to reach 4 or reach 6 to reach 8 shown in FIGS. 13 and 14). This is an effect that suggests a big win, which is performed after the reach state is established until the special effect symbol is stopped.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that the specific reach effect is being performed, the sub CPU 102a ends the roulette effect determination process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the specific reach effect is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S1324-4. This is to restrict the start of the roulette effect while the specific reach effect is being executed.

  Since the specific reach production is an effect for the player to expect a big win, if the roulette production is started while the specific reach production is being executed, the specific reach production and the roulette production effect Decreases. Therefore, by restricting the start of the roulette effect during the specific reach effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the specific reach effect and the roulette effect. Note that the sub CPU 102a determines that the specific reach effect is not in progress before the super reach effect is started even if the specific variation effect is being performed. This is to prevent a decrease in the chance of roulette production.

  In step S1324-4, the sub CPU 102a stores the roulette effect determination random number indicated by the roulette effect determination random number counter in the roulette effect determination random number storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1324-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the variation effect is currently being executed and the result of the special symbol lottery related to the variation effect is “long hit”. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is “long hit”, it moves the process to step S1324-6, and if it determines that it is not “long hit”, it moves the process to step S1324-7.

  In step S1324-6, the sub CPU 102a performs long hitting roulette effect determination. The long win roulette effect determination is to determine whether or not the roulette effect can be executed and the type of roulette effect when it is executed based on the long win fluctuation effect. The long hit roulette effect determination is performed using the long hit roulette effect determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 84A, the long winning roulette effect determination table is divided into a long winning roulette effect determination table used in the privilege grant mode and a long hit roulette effect determination table used in the non-privilege grant mode. ing. Whether it is the privilege grant mode or the non-privilege grant mode is determined by whether or not the privilege grant mode execution flag (see step S1250-15) described above is ON, and the privilege grant mode execution flag is ON. Sometimes it is determined to be a privilege grant mode.

  The sub CPU 102a selects the long-performing roulette effect determination table for the privilege-giving mode if it is the privilege-giving mode, and selects the long-time roulette effect determination table for the non-privilege-giving mode if it is the non-privilege giving mode.

  In each long roulette effect determination table, the roulette effect determination value, whether or not the roulette effect can be executed, and the roulette effect type when executed are uniquely associated. Then, the sub CPU 102a collates the roulette effect determination random number acquired in step S1324-4 with the selected roulette effect determination table for long hits, and determines whether the roulette effect can be executed and the type of roulette effect to be executed. decide.

  In step S1324-7, the sub CPU 102a is currently executing the variation effect, and the special symbol lottery result related to the variation effect is a specific result, that is, “short win”, “small hit”, or “specific It is determined whether or not “Leach with reach”. “Leach with specific reach” refers to a loss with reach where the expectation level of winning a big hit related to the special figure fluctuation pattern is a predetermined value or more. Here, as a specific loss with reach, reach 2 to reach 4 Alternatively, a special figure variation pattern representing reach 6 to reach 8 is set.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is “short win”, “small hit” or “losing with specific reach”, the process proceeds to step S1324-8, and “short win”, “small hit”, or “with specific reach” If it is determined that it is not “miss”, the process proceeds to step S1324-9.

  In step S1324-8, the sub CPU 102a performs roulette effect determination for the specific special figure result. Roulette effect determination for specific special figure results is based on short wins, small hits, or a specific reach loss effect, and whether or not the roulette effect can be executed and the type of effect of the roulette effect. It is to be. The roulette effect determination for specific special figure result is performed using the roulette effect determination table for specific special figure result.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (b), the specific special figure result roulette effect determination table also includes the specific special figure result roulette effect determination table used in the privilege grant mode and the specific special figure result roulette effect used in the non-privilege grant mode. It is divided into a judgment table.

  The sub-CPU 102a selects a special special figure result roulette effect determination table for the privilege grant mode in the privilege grant mode, and a specific special figure result roulette effect determination table for the non-privilege grant mode in the non-privilege grant mode. Select. Each roulette effect determination table for a specific special figure result is uniquely associated with the roulette effect determination value, the availability of execution of the roulette effect, and the type of roulette effect when executed.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a collates the roulette effect determination random number acquired in step S1324-4 with the selected roulette effect determination table for the specific special figure result, and determines whether the roulette effect can be executed and the roulette effect when it is executed. Determine the type.

  In step S1324-9, the sub CPU 102a performs prefetch effect mode execution determination processing. The prefetch effect mode execution determination process will be described with reference to FIG. In the pre-reading effect mode, a start opening winning designation command indicating that the result of the prior determination is “short win” or “small win” is stored in the first effect information hold storage area or the second effect information hold storage area. This is an effect mode that suggests that there is a so-called notice effect.

  In step S1324-9-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the pre-reading effect mode designation flag is currently ON and whether the pre-reading effect is being executed or the pre-reading effect is being waited. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the prefetch effect mode designation flag is ON, the sub CPU 102a ends the prefetch effect mode execution determination process and returns to the roulette effect determination process. This is to prevent the pre-reading effect mode from being executed repeatedly. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the prefetch effect mode designation flag is not turned on, it moves the process to step S1324-9-2.

  In step S1324-9-2, the sub CPU 102a sets a start opening winning designation command (hereinafter referred to as “short hit starting opening winning designation) in the first presentation information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c to indicate that the preliminary determination result is short hit. It is determined whether or not "command") is stored. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the short hit start opening winning designation command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1324-9-4, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the short hit starting opening winning designation command is stored, step S1324-9- The processing is moved to 3.

  In step S1324-9-3, the sub CPU 102a selects a short-look prefetch effect mode execution determination table (see FIG. 86), and moves the process to step S1324-9-8.

  In step S1324-9-4, the sub CPU 102a stores a start opening winning designation command (hereinafter referred to as “small hit starting opening winning designation) in the first effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c, indicating that the pre-determination result is a small hit. It is determined whether or not "command") is stored. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the small hitting start opening winning designation command is not stored, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1324-9-6, and determines that the small hitting starting opening winning designation command is stored in step S1324-9-. The processing is moved to 5.

  In step S1324-9-5, the sub CPU 102a selects the pre-reading effect mode execution determination table (see FIG. 86) for small hits, and moves the process to step S1324-9-8.

  In step S1324-9-6, the sub CPU 102a reaches the first presentation information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the reach of the specific determination variation pattern (reach 2 to reach 4 or reach 6 to reach 8) is reached. It is determined whether or not a start opening winning designation command (hereinafter referred to as “specific reach lost starting opening winning designation command”) indicating that there is a loss is stored. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the specific reach loss start opening prize designation command is not stored, the sub CPU 102a terminates the prefetch effect mode execution determination process, and determines that the specific reach loss start opening prize designation command is stored. The processing is moved to S1324-9-7.

  In step S1324-9-7, the sub CPU 102a selects a prefetch effect mode execution determination table (see FIG. 86) for the loss with specific reach, and moves the process to step S1324-9-8.

  Each prefetch effect mode execution determination table selected in step S1324-9-3, step S1324-9-5, or step S1324-9-7 corresponds to the prefetch effect mode execution determination value and the availability of execution of the prefetch effect mode. It is attached.

  In step S1324-9-8, the sub CPU 102a stores the prefetch effect execution determination random number indicated by the prefetch effect execution determination random number counter in the prefetch effect execution determination random number storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1324-9-9, the sub CPU 102a uses the stored prefetch effect execution determination random number for the prefetch effect mode execution determination selected in step S1324-9-3, step S1324-9-5, or step S1324-9-7. Whether to execute the pre-reading effect mode is determined by collating with the table.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 86, the execution probability of the prefetch effect mode increases in the order of short hit> small hit> reach with a specific special figure variation pattern. That is, when the pre-reading effect mode is executed, it is possible to expect a winning especially short.

  In step S1324-9-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the prefetch effect mode execution determination is execution of the prefetch effect mode. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the pre-reading effect mode is not executed, the sub CPU 102a ends the pre-reading effect mode execution determination process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the pre-read effect mode is executed, the process proceeds to step S1324-9-11.

  In step S1324-9-11, the sub CPU 102a turns on the prefetch effect mode designation flag in the prefetch effect mode designation flag portion of the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c, ends the prefetch effect mode execution determination process, and roulette effect. Return the process to the judgment process. The storage unit of the effect information storage area for turning on the prefetch effect mode designation flag is determined as follows.

  The sub CPU 102a, from the storage unit storing the start opening winning designation command related to the next variation effect to be started, to the storage unit storing the starting opening prize specifying command that triggered the prefetch effect mode, Turn on the prefetch effect mode designation flag. That is, the variation effect in the pre-reading effect mode is performed from the next variation effect to the variation effect related to the start opening prize designation command that triggered the pre-reading effect mode.

  In step S1324-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the prefetch effect mode execution determination process in step S1324-9 is “execution of the prefetch effect mode”. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is “execution of the prefetch effect mode”, it moves the process to step S1324-11, and if it determines that it is not “execution of the prefetch effect mode”, it moves the process to step S1324-2.

  In step S1324-11, the sub CPU 102a performs pre-reading effect mode roulette effect determination. The pre-reading effect mode roulette effect determination is based on determining whether or not to execute the roulette effect and the effect type of the roulette effect when executing based on the stored start opening winning designation command (preliminary determination result). is there. The pre-reading effect mode roulette effect determination is performed using the pre-reading effect mode roulette effect determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (c), the pre-reading effect mode roulette effect determination table includes a pre-reading effect mode roulette effect determination table used in the privilege granting mode, and a prefetch effect mode roulette effect determination table used in the non-privilege granting mode. It is divided into.

  The sub CPU 102a selects the prefetch effect mode roulette effect determination table for the privilege grant mode in the privilege grant mode, and selects the prefetch effect mode roulette effect determination table for the non-privilege grant mode in the non-privilege grant mode. To do. In each prefetch effect mode roulette effect determination table, the roulette effect determination value, whether or not the roulette effect can be executed, and the roulette effect type when executed are uniquely associated.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a collates the roulette effect determination random number acquired in step S1324-4 with the selected prefetch effect mode roulette effect determination table, and determines whether or not the roulette effect can be executed and the type of roulette effect to be executed. To decide.

  In step S1324-12, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the common map variation pattern designation command stored in the reception buffer, and in step S1324-1, the result of the normal symbol determination related to the common diagram variation pattern designation command is relative. It is determined whether or not it is a hit 2 indicating the second auxiliary game with the opening of the second start port 7 for a long time. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a hit 2, the process proceeds to step S1324-14, and the process proceeds to step S1324-14. If it is determined to be 1 or lost, the process proceeds to step S1324-15.

  In step S <b> 1324-14, the sub CPU 102 a makes a winning 2 roulette effect determination. The winning 2 roulette effect determination is to determine whether or not to execute the roulette effect and the type of effect of the roulette effect when it is executed based on a common pattern change pattern designation command whose normal symbol determination result is 2 It is. The winning 2 roulette effect determination is performed using the winning 2 roulette effect determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (a), the winning 2 roulette effect determination table is also divided into a winning 2 roulette effect determination table used in the privilege grant mode and a hit 2 roulette effect determination table used in the non-privilege grant mode. ing.

  The sub CPU 102a selects the winning 2 roulette effect determination table for the privilege granting mode if it is the privilege granting mode, and selects the winning 2 roulette effect determination table for the non-privilege granting mode if it is the non-privilege granting mode. In each of the two roulette effect determination tables, the roulette effect determination value, whether or not the roulette effect can be executed, and the roulette effect type when executed are uniquely associated.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a collates the roulette effect determination random number acquired in step S1324-4 with the selected winning 2 roulette effect determination table, and determines whether or not the roulette effect can be executed and the type of roulette effect to be executed. decide.

  In step S1324-15, the sub CPU 102a performs the roulette effect determination for losing. The roulette effect determination for losing determines whether or not the roulette effect can be executed and the type of effect of the roulette effect when it is executed based on a normal pattern variation pattern designation command whose normal symbol determination is 1 or lost. That is. The roulette effect determination for losing is performed using the roulette effect determining table for losing.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (b), the roulette effect determination table for loss is also divided into a roulette effect determination table for lose used in the privilege grant mode and a roulette effect determination table for lose used in the non-privilege grant mode.

  The sub CPU 102a selects the lose roulette effect determination table for the privilege grant mode in the privilege grant mode, and selects the lose roulette effect determination table for the non-privilege grant mode in the non-privilege grant mode. In each lost roulette effect determination table, the roulette effect determination value, whether or not the roulette effect can be executed, and the roulette effect type when executed are uniquely associated.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a collates the roulette effect determination random number acquired in step S1324-4 with the selected lose roulette effect determination table, and determines whether the roulette effect can be executed and the type of roulette effect to be executed. To do.

  84 and 85, the determination result of the roulette effect determination for long hits, the determination result of the roulette effect determination for specific special figure result, the determination result of the roulette effect determination for prefetch effect mode, and the roulette effect determination for 2 hits The determination result and the result of the roulette effect determination for losing are associated with the roulette effect type data. When the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not to execute the roulette effect and the type of roulette effect when it is executed, the sub CPU 102a stores the roulette effect type data corresponding to the result in the roulette effect type data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  Further, as described above, the roulette effect determination table for long hits (FIG. 84 (a)), the roulette effect determination table for specific special figure results (FIG. 84 (b)), and the roulette effect determination table for prefetch effect mode (FIG. 84). (C)) Depending on whether the winning roulette effect type determination table (FIG. 85 (a)) and the lost roulette effect determination table (FIG. 85 (b)) are in the privilege grant mode or the non-privilege grant mode. It is divided. This is because, as will be described later, the content of the roulette effect varies depending on whether the mode is the privilege grant mode or the non-privilege grant mode. Specifically, in the roulette effect in the privilege grant mode, a privilege game that is a game for giving a game privilege can be executed, but the privilege game is not executed in the roulette effect in the non-privilege grant mode.

  In the present embodiment, the roulette effect type represents a specific effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the roulette effect described later. In the present embodiment, production types 1 to 7 are set as the roulette production types. Production type 1 to production type 5 can be selected in the non-privilege grant mode, and production type 1 to production type 4 and production type 6 to production type 7 can be selected in the privilege grant mode. The bonus game is included in the effect type 6 roulette effect and the effect type 7 roulette effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the roulette effect is always executed in the winning 2 roulette effect determination. This suggests the execution of the second auxiliary game in which the second start opening 7 in which the second start opening 7 that is relatively easy to derive a special symbol determination result that is advantageous to the player is opened for a long time is executed. This is so as not to miss the opportunity to enter the game ball into the second starting port 7.

  In step S1324-16, the sub CPU 102a refers to the roulette effect type data stored in the roulette effect type data storage area, and determines whether or not to execute the roulette effect. If it is determined that the roulette effect is to be executed, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1324-17, and if it is determined that the roulette effect is not to be executed, the roulette effect determination process is ended.

  In step S1324-17, the sub CPU 102a stores the reel configuration determination random number indicated by the reel configuration determination random number counter in the reel configuration determination random number storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S <b> 1324-18, the sub CPU 102 a performs reel configuration determination to determine the type of reel configuration of the reel image L used in the roulette effect. The reel configuration is an arrangement of a plurality of specific effect symbols attached to a reel image L described later. The reel configuration determination is performed using a reel configuration determination table.

  The reel configuration determination table is divided according to the privilege grant mode / non-privilege grant mode. This is because a part of the types of specific effect symbols constituting the reel image L is greatly different between the privilege grant mode and the non-privilege grant mode. The reel configuration determination table shown in FIGS. 87 and 88 is a reel configuration determination table used in the non-privilege grant mode, and the reel configuration determination table shown in FIGS. 89 and 90 is a reel configuration determination table used in the privilege grant mode. It is a judgment table.

  The reel configuration determination table is further divided according to the roulette effect type. This is because the type of reel configuration to be determined differs depending on the roulette effect type.

  In each reel configuration determination table divided according to the privilege grant mode / non-privilege grant mode (setting status of the privilege grant mode) and the roulette effect type, the reel configuration type and the reel configuration determination value are uniquely associated. Stored.

  The sub CPU 102a refers to the roulette effect type data stored in the roulette effect type data storage area, and the reel configuration corresponding to the combination of the privilege grant mode / non-privilege grant mode and the roulette effect type indicated by the roulette effect type data. Select a judgment table. Then, the sub CPU 102a collates the selected reel configuration determination table with the reel configuration determination random number stored in step S1324-17, determines the reel configuration type, and sets the reel configuration data representing the reel configuration type. The data is stored in the reel configuration data area of the sub RAM 102c.

  FIG. 91 shows the relationship between the type of reel configuration, the specific content of the effect related to the reel configuration (arrangement of specific effect symbols), and the type of roulette effect (effect content).

  91, “A” to “F” arranged under the item “reel configuration (arrangement of specific effect symbols)” represent the area of the reel image L (see FIG. 92). As shown in FIG. 92, the reel image L is composed of an endless belt, and is divided into six in the circumferential direction to form areas “A” to “F”.

  In FIG. 91, characters / symbols (dumpling, intense heat, ☆) written in a matrix composed of vertical items “types of reel configuration (1 to 16)” and horizontal items “reel configuration (AF)”. , Z, x, JP, 10 pt, 30 pt, 50 pt, 100 pt) represent the types of specific effect symbols attached to the area of the reel image L relating to the types of the reel configuration.

  Here, “Dango” is a specific effect design of the dumpling mark (FIG. 101 (a)), “Intense heat” is a specific effect design of the “Intense heat” mark (FIG. 101 (b)), “☆” is “☆” ”Mark specific effect design (FIG. 101 (c)),“ Z ”is a specific effect design of the letter“ Z ”(FIG. 101 (d)),“ × ”is a“ X ”mark specific effect design (FIG. 101). (E)) “JP” is a specific effect design of the “JP” mark (FIG. 101 (f)), “10pt” is a specific effect design of the “10p” mark (FIG. 101 (g)), “30pt” is “ “30p” mark specific effect design (FIG. 101 (h)), “50pt” is a “50p” mark specific effect design (FIG. 101 (i)), and “100pt” is a “100p” mark specific effect design (FIG. 101). (J)) is shown respectively.

  For example, for the reel image L related to the reel configuration type “1” in the non-privilege grant mode, the region “A”, “C”, and “E” are provided with a specific effect symbol of “x” mark, and the region “B” ”,“ D ”, and“ F ”are accompanied by a specific effect symbol of a dumpling mark. In addition, for the reel image L related to the reel configuration type “10” in the privilege grant mode, the specific effect design of the “10p” mark in the region “A” and the specific effect of the dumpling mark in the regions “B” and “E” The design, the special design of the “JP” mark in the region “C”, the special design of the “30p” mark in the region “D”, the specific design of the “10p” mark in the region “E”, and the “ A special effect design with the “Intense heat” mark is attached.

  Further, “1” to “7” arranged under the item “effect type (effect contents)” in FIG. 91 represent the roulette effect type. The symbol “◯” described in the matrix composed of the horizontal item “Roulette effect type (1-7)” and the vertical item “Reel configuration type (1-16)” indicates the roulette effect. When the type is determined, the reel configuration type is selectable. The symbol “-” indicates that the reel configuration type is not selectable when the roulette effect type is determined. Represents.

  For example, when the roulette effect type “1” (dumpling) is determined in the non-privilege grant mode, the reel configuration types “1” to “14” and “16” can be selected. Further, when the roulette effect type “7” (special P) is determined in the privilege grant mode, the reel configuration types “6”, “9”, “10”, and “14” can be selected.

  In step S1324-19, the sub CPU 102a determines a reel stop position. As will be described later, when the roulette effect is started, the front surface of the box image B is opened and the reel image L is rotated (moved from the top to the bottom) and stopped after a predetermined time (see FIGS. 99 to 100). . That is, the reel stop position determination is to determine a specific effect symbol that can be seen from the front of the box image B when the reel image L stops.

  The reel stop position determination is performed by selecting one specific effect symbol from a plurality of specific effect symbols attached to the reel image L used in the roulette effect. Here, the selection of the specific effect design is performed based on the roulette effect type.

  Specifically, in the case of the roulette effect type 1, the specific effect symbol of the dumpling mark is selected, in the case of the roulette effect type 2, the specific effect symbol of the “hot” mark is selected, and in the case of the roulette effect type 3, In the case of roulette effect type 4, the specific effect symbol of “Z” mark is selected, and in the case of roulette effect type 5, the specific effect symbol of “x” mark is selected. In the case of the roulette effect type 6, the specific effect symbol of any of the marks “10p”, “30p”, “50p”, and “100p” is selected. In the case of the roulette effect type 6, the specific effect symbol of the “JP” mark is selected. Is selected.

  For example, in the privilege grant mode, it is assumed that the roulette effect type is 6 and the reel configuration type is “1”. In this case, as the reel stop position, one of a specific effect symbol of “10p” mark, a specific effect symbol of “30p” mark, and a specific effect symbol of “50p” mark is determined (see FIG. 91B). . Further, in the case of the roulette effect type 6, the reel image L stops at the specific effect symbol of the mark of the high point (p) in the order of long win> specific special figure result> prefetching effect mode> per second in the order of the roulette effect type 6. It is easy.

  In the privilege grant mode, if the reel configuration type is “6”, “9”, “10”, “14”, and the roulette effect type is 7, the “JP” mark is displayed as the reel stop position. A specific effect design is selected (see FIG. 91 (b)).

  In the non-privilege grant mode, it is assumed that the roulette effect type is 2 and the reel configuration type is “3”. In this case, the reel stop position is determined as a specific effect symbol of the “extreme heat” mark (see FIG. 91A).

  In step S1324-20, the sub CPU 102a stores the roulette effect pattern determination random number indicated by the roulette effect pattern determination random number counter in the roulette effect pattern determination random number storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1324-21, the sub CPU 102a performs roulette effect pattern determination. The roulette effect pattern is associated with the execution time of the roulette effect and the start time of the roulette effect with reference to the fluctuation display of the normal symbol that triggers the roulette effect. In the present embodiment, roulette effect patterns 1 to 3 are set as roulette effect patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 93A, the roulette effect pattern determination table for determining the roulette effect pattern is divided according to the roulette effect type. In each roulette effect pattern determination table, a roulette effect pattern and a roulette effect pattern determination value are uniquely associated and stored.

  The sub CPU 102a selects the roulette effect pattern determination table based on the roulette effect type indicated by the roulette effect type data stored in the roulette effect type data storage area. Then, the sub CPU 102a compares the selected roulette effect pattern determination table with the roulette effect pattern determination random number stored in step S1324-20 to determine the roulette effect pattern.

  93 (b) and 93 (c), the roulette effect production time of roulette effect pattern 1 and roulette effect pattern 2 is 10 seconds, and the roulette effect effect time of roulette effect pattern 3 is 13 seconds. It has become. In addition, the roulette effect of the roulette effect pattern 1 and the roulette effect pattern 3 starts at the start of the normal symbol fluctuation display, and the roulette effect of the roulette effect pattern 2 starts 3 seconds after the start of the normal symbol fluctuation display. The roulette effect of the effect pattern 1 and the roulette effect pattern 3 has no waiting time, and the roulette effect of the roulette effect pattern 2 has a waiting time of 3 seconds.

  In step S1324-22, the sub CPU 102a refers to the roulette effect type data stored in the roulette effect type data storage area, and the effect type of the roulette effect is “effect type 7 (special P)”. Determine whether. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the effect type 7 (special P), it moves the process to step S1324-23, and if it determines that it is not the effect type 7 (special P), it moves the process to step S1324-25.

  In step S1324-23, the sub CPU 102a stores the special bonus game pattern determination random number indicated by the special bonus game pattern determination random number counter in the special bonus game pattern determination random number storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1324-24, the sub CPU 102a performs special privilege game pattern determination. This is because, in the roulette production of the production type 7, a special privilege game capable of acquiring a large amount of game privileges is performed, and a plurality of special privilege game patterns are set in the special privilege game, and the pattern is determined. It is.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 to 96, the special privilege game pattern determination table for performing the special privilege game pattern determination is divided by roulette effect type data representing the roulette effect type 7. Specifically, in the bonus game pattern determination table, the roulette effect type determination table for which the roulette effect type 7 has been determined is the roulette effect determination table for long hits, the roulette effect determination table for specific special figure results, and the look-ahead effect. The mode roulette effect determination table and the hit 2 roulette effect determination table are divided.

  In each special privilege game pattern determination table, a special privilege game pattern and a special privilege game pattern determination value are uniquely associated and stored.

  In step S13224-24, the sub CPU 102a selects a corresponding special privilege game pattern determination table based on the roulette effect type data, and stores the special privilege game stored in step S13224-23 in the selected special privilege game pattern determination table. The special determination game pattern is determined by collating the random numbers for pattern determination, and the special bonus game pattern data indicating the special bonus game pattern is stored in the special bonus game pattern data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S <b> 1324-25, the sub CPU 102 a generates a roulette effect control command in which these determination results are reflected based on the determination results in steps S <b> 1324-18, step S <b> 1324-19, step S <b> 1324-21 and step S <b> 1324-24>. To do. That is, the roulette effect control command includes a roulette effect type, a reel configuration, a reel stop position, a roulette effect pattern (start time of roulette effect and roulette effect effect time), presence / absence of a special privilege game, a special privilege game pattern, etc. Various information on the roulette effect is included.

  In step S1324-26, the sub CPU 102a sets the roulette effect control command generated in step S13224-24 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the roulette effect determination process.

  The roulette effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When receiving the roulette effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute the roulette effect based on the command.

  When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the roulette effect control command for the roulette effect pattern 1, the lamp control board 104 immediately starts the roulette effect for 10 seconds. After 10 seconds, a roulette effect for 10 seconds is started, and when a roulette effect control command for roulette effect pattern 3 is received, the roulette effect for 13 seconds is immediately executed.

  Next, the long opening effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1326-1, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the auxiliary game opening designation command. In step S1326-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the auxiliary game opening designation command indicates an auxiliary game (second auxiliary game) related to 2, that is, whether or not the second auxiliary game is started from now on. Determine. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the game is not the second auxiliary game, the sub CPU 102a ends the long opening effect determination process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the game is the second auxiliary game, the process proceeds to step S1326-3.

  In step S1326-3, the sub CPU 102a turns on the long release effect standby flag in the long release effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1326-4, the long time of the second start port 7 in the second auxiliary game ( 5.0 seconds) A long opening effect standby time, which is a time until the start of a long effect during opening, is set in the long opening effect timer counter of the sub RAM 102c, and the long opening effect start process ends.

  The ON of the long opening effect standby flag indicates that the device is on standby to start the long opening effect. Further, the long opening effect timer counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S1200.

  Next, the firing notification process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1328-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the current gaming state, and determines in step S1328-2 whether it is a first winning gate designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command is a first winning gate designation command, it moves the process to step S1328-3, and if it determines that it is not a first winning gate designation command, it moves the process to step S1328-13.

  In step S1328-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the left-handed first notification flag is ON in the left-handed first notification flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the left-handed first notification flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1328-4. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the left-handed first notification flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1328-6. Move processing.

  In step S1328-4, the sub CPU 102a turns off the left-handed first notification flag in the left-handed first notification flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1328-5, the sub CPU 102a clears the left-handed first notification launch confirmation timer counter in the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1328-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the left handed second notification flag is ON in the left handing second notification flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the left-handed second notification flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1328-7. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the left-handed second notification flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1328-9. Move processing.

  In step S1328-7, the sub CPU 102a turns off the left-handed second notification flag in the left-handed second notification flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1328-8, the sub CPU 102a sets a left-handed notification end control command for ending the left-handed first notification effect or the left-handed second notification effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  The left-handed notification end control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. Upon receiving the left-handed notification end control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 end the left-handed first notification effect or the left-handed second notification effect currently being notified.

In step S1328-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether it is in the left-handed gaming state based on the gaming state confirmed in step S1328-1, that is, whether it is in the non-short-time gaming state. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is in the left-handed gaming state, the sub CPU 102a ends the firing notification process. If it determines that it is not in the left-handed gaming state, it moves the process to step S1328-10.
The left-handed gaming state is a non-time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, the right-handed gaming state is a short-time gaming state or a special game.

  In step S1328-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the right-handed highlight notification flag is turned on in the right-handed highlight notification flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the right-handed emphasis notification flag is ON, the sub CPU 102a terminates the firing notification process. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the right-hand highlight notification flag is not ON, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1328-11. .

  In step S1328-11, the sub CPU 102a turns on the right-handed emphasis reporting flag in the right-handed emphasis reporting flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1328-12, the sub CPU 102a sets a right-handed emphasis notification control command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the firing notification process.

  The right-handed emphasis notification control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the right-handed emphasis notification control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute a right-handed emphasis notification effect based on the command.

  In step S1328-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the right-handed highlight notification flag is turned on in the right-handed highlight notification flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the right-handed emphasis notification flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1328-14. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the right-handed emphasis notification flag is not ON, the sub-CPU 102a performs processing to step S1328-16. Move.

  In step S1328-14, the sub CPU 102a turns off the right-handed emphasis reporting flag in the right-handed emphasis reporting flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1328-15, the sub CPU 102a sets a right-handed emphasis notification end control command for ending the right-handed emphasis notification effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  The right-handed emphasis notification end control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the right-handed emphasis notification end control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 end the right-handed emphasis notification effect currently in the notification effect.

  In step S1328-16, the sub CPU 102a determines whether it is in the left-handed gaming state based on the gaming state confirmed in step S1328-1, that is, whether it is in the non-short-time gaming state. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is in the left-handed gaming state, it moves the process to step S1328-17, and if it determines that it is not in the left-handed gaming state, it ends the firing notification process.

  In step S1328-17, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the left-handed first notification flag is ON in the left-handed first notification flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the left-handed first notification flag is ON, the sub CPU 102a ends the firing notification processing. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the left-hand first notification flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1328-18. Move.

  In step S1328-18, the sub CPU 102a turns on the left-handed first notification flag in the left-handed first notification flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1328-19, the sub CPU 102a sets the left-handed first notification launch confirmation time (in this embodiment, 10 seconds = 2500 counter) to the left-handed first notification launch confirmation timer counter in the sub RAM 102c.

  The left-handed first notification flag ON is the time until the first out ball is detected during the left-handed first notification effect, or the next out ball is detected after the out ball is detected. Indicates that the time until is measured. The left-handed first notification launch confirmation timer counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S1200.

  In step S1328-20, the sub CPU 102a sets the left-handed first notification control command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the firing notification process.

  The left-handed first notification control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the left-handed first notification control command, the left-handed first notification effect is executed based on the command.

  Next, the dish full tank abnormality notification process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1344-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the dish full tank abnormality first notification flag is ON in the dish full tank abnormality first notification flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the dish full tank abnormality first notification flag is ON, the sub CPU 102a ends the dish full tank abnormality notification process and determines that the dish full tank abnormality first notification flag is not ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S1344-2.

  In step S1344-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the dish full tank abnormality second notification flag is ON in the dish full tank abnormality second notification flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the dish full tank abnormality second notification flag is ON, the sub CPU 102a ends the dish full tank abnormality notification process, and determines that the dish full tank abnormality second notification flag is not ON. The process moves to step S1344-3.

  In step S1344-3, the sub CPU 102a turns on the dish full tank abnormality first notification flag in the sub RAM 102c dish full tank abnormality first notification flag storage area.

  In step S1344-4, the sub CPU 102a sets the dish full tank abnormality first notification firing confirmation time (in this embodiment, 10 seconds = 2500 counter) to the dish full tank abnormality first notification firing confirmation timer counter in the sub RAM 102c. Set to.

  Note that the dish full tank abnormality first notification flag ON is the time until the first out ball is detected during the dish full tank abnormality first notification effect, or the next out ball after the out ball is detected. Indicates that the time until is detected is measured. Further, the dish full tank abnormality first notification launch confirmation timer counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S1200.

  In step S1344-5, the sub CPU 102a sets the dish full tank abnormality first notification control command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  The dish full tank abnormality first notification control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the dish full tank abnormality first notification control command, the lamp full board abnormality first notification effect is executed based on the command.

  Next, the out ball processing will be described with reference to FIGS. First, in step S1348-1, the sub CPU 102a adds “1” to the counter value of the first out ball counter provided in the sub RAM 102c. The first out sphere counter counts the total number of out spheres generated after power is turned on to the effect control board 102. The counter value of the first out ball counter is cleared when a power-on designation command is transmitted from the main control board 101.

  In step S1348-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the privilege grant mode flag is turned on. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the privilege granting mode flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1348-3, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the privilege granting mode flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1348-4.

  In step S1348-3, the sub CPU 102a adds “1” to the counter value of the second out ball counter provided in the sub RAM 102c. The second out ball counter counts the total number of out balls generated after the privilege grant mode is set.

  In step S1348-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the specific reach out determination flag is ON. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the specific reach out determination flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1348-5. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the specific reach out determination flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1348-9.

  In step S1348-5, the sub CPU 102a subtracts “1” from the counter value of the third out ball counter provided in the sub RAM 102c. The third out ball counter is in a specific reach production set in advance and when the first figure holding number (U1) = 4 (upper limit), or when the short hit game or the small hit game starts The out spheres where a specified number of out spheres are generated are counted.

  In step S1348-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the counter value of the third out ball counter is “0” and the remaining time of the variation effect is “10” seconds or more. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the third out ball counter is “0” and the remaining time of the variation effect is “10” seconds or more, the process proceeds to step S1348-7, but not. If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S1348-9.

  In step S1348-7, the sub CPU 102a turns off the specific reach out determination flag, and in step S1348-8, sets the variable display firing stop notification effect control command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  The variation display firing stop notification effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the variation display firing stop notification effect control command, based on the command, a predetermined time (5 seconds in the present embodiment) is set by the player. In order to reduce the disadvantages incurred, a launch stop notification effect during variable display for the purpose of stopping the launch of the game ball is executed. The firing stop notification effect during variable display will be described later.

  Further, when the sub CPU 102a receives the special figure effect symbol stop designation command with the specific reach out determination flag turned on, the sub CPU 102a turns off the specific reach out determination flag and clears the third out ball counter. (Not shown).

  In step S1348-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the AT short release out determination flag is ON. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the AT short release out determination flag is ON, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1348-10. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the AT short release out determination flag is not ON, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to step S1348-16. Move processing.

  In step S1348-10, the sub CPU 102a subtracts “1” from the third out ball counter provided in the sub RAM 102c. In step S1348-11, the counter value of the third out ball counter is “0”. Determine whether. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the third out ball counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1348-12, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the third out ball counter is not “0”, The processing is moved to S1348-16.

  In step S1348-12, the sub CPU 102a turns off the AT short release out determination flag, and in step S1348-13, sets the special effect control command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  The special effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. Upon receipt of the special effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive a predetermined time (preliminary time) based on the occurrence of an out ball exceeding a predetermined threshold during the short hit game or the small hit game. In this embodiment, a premium special effect is executed for 2 seconds).

  The effect mode of the special effect is not particularly limited and is set as appropriate. For example, as shown in FIG. 117, the specific image is cut in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 and the audio output device. A special sound effect is output from 15, and the decorative members 200A to 203A of the effect accessory devices 200 to 203 can be operated in a special manner. In this case, the operation in the specific image, the special sound effect and the special mode can be set to be performed only in the special effect, and the special effect appears in the variable effect or the jackpot effect. It is also possible to set so that it appears most easily. In addition, the effect mode of the special effect may be the same or different between the short win game and the small hit game. When they are different, they appear in any game, but the appearance probabilities can be made different depending on the production mode.

  In this way, by executing special effects when out balls exceed a predetermined threshold in short hit games or small hit games, the interest of the game is improved and the player is prevented from stopping the release of the game balls In addition, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved. In this embodiment, the threshold value of the out ball for executing the special effect is set to be the same for the case of the short hit game and the case of the small hit game, but it may be different. is there.

  Further, when the sub CPU 102a receives a special game ending designation command with the AT short release out determination flag turned on, the sub CPU 102a turns off the AT short release out determination flag and clears the third out ball counter. (Not shown).

  The sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the privilege grant mode flag is turned on in step S1348-14. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the privilege granting mode flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1348-15, and if it determines that the privilege granting mode flag is not ON, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1348-16.

  In step S1348-15, the sub CPU 102a sets a special privilege game mode flag in the special privilege game mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. ON of the special privilege game mode flag is set on the premise that the privilege grant mode is set, and in the effect mode D based on short win or small win, a special privilege game mode in which privilege points can be granted is set. It shows that. The special privilege game mode will be described later.

  In step S1348-16, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the demonstration effect standby flag is turned on. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the demonstration effect standby flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1348-17. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the demonstration effect standby flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1348-18.

  In step S1348-17, the sub CPU 102a resets the demonstration effect standby time (30 seconds = 7500 counter in the present embodiment) of the customer waiting effect timer counter in the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1348-46.

  This customer waiting effect timer counter is the time until the first out ball is detected during the standby for starting the demonstration effect, or the time from when the out ball is detected until the next out ball is detected. Since it is a counter that measures the number of times, it is reset every time an out-ball is detected. Since it is reset every time an out ball is detected in this way, the demonstration effect is restricted while the out ball is detected, and the demonstration effect is performed even though a game ball is being fired. The troublesomeness of the demonstration production (waiting for the customer) can be eliminated.

  In step S1348-18, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the demonstration confirmation launch confirmation flag is ON. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the demonstration confirmation launch confirmation flag is ON, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1348-19. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the demonstration presentation launch confirmation flag is not ON, the sub CPU 102a performs processing to step S1348-23. Move.

  In step S1348-19, the sub CPU 102a clears the demonstration confirmation launch confirmation timer counter in the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1328-20, turns off the demonstration confirmation launch confirmation flag in the demonstration confirmation launch confirmation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. To.

  In step S1348-21, the sub CPU 102a turns off the demonstration effect execution flag in the demonstration effect execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1348-22, the sub CPU 102a sets a demonstration effect end command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1348. Move processing to -46.

  The set demonstration effect end command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the demonstration effect end command and end the demonstration effect being executed.

  In step S1348-23, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the firing confirmation flag during the specific round is turned on. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the firing confirmation flag during the specific round is turned on, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1348-24. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the firing confirmation flag during the specific round is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1348-26. Move.

  In step S1348-24, the sub CPU 102a clears the specific round firing confirmation timer counter in the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1348-25, turns off the specific round firing confirmation flag in the specific round firing confirmation flag storage area. And the process proceeds to step S1348-46.

  In step S1348-26, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the long open release confirmation flag is ON. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the long open release confirmation flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1348-27. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the long open release confirmation flag is not ON, the sub CPU 102a performs the process to step S1348-29. Move.

  In step S1348-27, the sub CPU 102a clears the long open shooting confirmation timer counter in the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1348-28, sets the long open shooting check flag in the long open shooting check flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. And the process proceeds to step S1348-46.

  In step S1348-29, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a firing instruction effect flag during a specific round or a firing instruction effect flag during long open (hereinafter referred to as a “firing instruction effect flag”) is ON. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the firing instruction effect flag is ON, it moves the process to step S1348-30, and if it determines that the firing instruction effect flag is not ON, it moves the process to step S1348-32.

  The sub CPU 102a turns off the firing instruction effect flag in step S1348-30, sets a firing instruction effect end command in step S1348-31, and moves the process to step S1348-46.

  The set firing instruction effect end command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the launch instruction effect end command, and then finish the fire instruction effect during the specific round being executed or the launch instruction effect during the long open (hereinafter referred to as “fire instruction effect”). Let In addition, the firing instruction effect during the long opening is ended after a predetermined time even if the firing instruction effect end command is not transmitted, but the firing instruction effect during the specific round is not transmitted when the firing instruction effect end command is not transmitted. In the embodiment, when a special game ending designation command in the per-game is transmitted to the effect control board 102, in other words, it is terminated at the start of the ending.

  In step S1348-32, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the power saving mode flag is turned on. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the power saving mode flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1348-33. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the power saving mode flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1348-36.

  The sub CPU 102a turns off the power saving mode flag in step S1348-33, sets a power saving mode release command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in step S1348-34, and re-seat effect control in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in step S1348-35. Set the command.

  The set power saving mode cancel command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the power saving mode cancel command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 end the current power saving and return to the normal power mode.

  The set seating effect control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive a seating effect control command, thereby giving a seating effect corresponding to the seating of the player for a predetermined time (1 second in the present embodiment). Run.

  In step S1348-36, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the dish full tank abnormality first notification flag is ON. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the dish full tank abnormality first notification flag is ON, it moves the process to step S1348-37, and determines that the dish full tank abnormality first notification flag is not ON. The processing is moved to S1348-38.

  In step S1348-37, the sub CPU 102a checks the dish full tank abnormality first notification firing confirmation timer counter of the sub RAM 102c first notification firing confirmation timer counter (in this embodiment, 10 seconds = 2500 counter). Is reset, and the process proceeds to step S1348-46.

  The dish full tank abnormality first notification launch confirmation timer counter is the time until the first out ball is detected during the dish full tank abnormality first notification effect, or the next out ball after the out ball is detected. Since it is a counter that measures the time until is detected, it is reset each time an out ball is detected. Thus, since it resets whenever it detects an out ball | bowl, while the out ball | bowl is detected, the dish in which a part of dish full tank abnormality 1st alert | report effect was controlled from the dish full tank anomaly 1st alert | report effect The full tank abnormality second notification effect is not switched.

  In step S1348-38, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the dish full tank abnormality second notification flag is ON. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the dish full tank abnormality second notification flag is ON, it moves the process to step S1348-39, and determines that the dish full tank abnormality second notification flag is not ON. The processing is moved to S1348-42.

  In step S1348-39, the sub CPU 102a turns the dish full tank abnormality second notification flag in the sub RAM 102c in the dish full tank abnormality second notification flag storage area.

  In step S1348-40, the sub CPU 102a turns on the dish full tank abnormality first notification flag in the dish full tank abnormality first notification flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1348-41, the dish full tank abnormality first notification The notification control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and the process proceeds to step S1348-46.

  In step S1348-42, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the left handed first notification flag is ON. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the left-handed first notification flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1348-43. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the left-handed first notification flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1348-44. Move processing.

  In step S1348-43, the sub CPU 102a resets the left-handed first notification launch confirmation time in the left-handed first notification launch confirmation timer counter of the sub RAM 102c (in this embodiment, 10 seconds = 2500 counter), The process moves to step S1348-46.

  The left-handed first notification launch confirmation timer counter is the time until the first out ball is detected during the left-handed first notification effect, or the next out ball is detected after the out ball is detected. Because it is a counter that measures the time until, it is reset every time an out ball is detected. Thus, since it resets whenever it detects an out-ball, while detecting an out-ball, the left-handed second notification in which a part of the left-handed first notification effect is regulated from the left-handed first notification effect. There is no switch to production.

  In step S1348-44, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the left-handed second notification flag is ON. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the left-handed second notification flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1348-45. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the left-handed second notification flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1348-46. Move processing.

  In step S1348-45, the sub CPU 102a turns off the left-handed second notification flag in the left-handed second notification flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1348-46.

  In step S1348-46, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special privilege granting mode flag is ON. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special privilege granting mode flag is ON, it moves the process to step S1348-47. If it determines that the special privilege granting mode flag is not ON, the sub CPU 102a ends the out ball processing.

  In step S1348-47, the sub CPU 102a confirms the RTC 102d and is a specific date (for example, 7th, 17th, 27th, or Friday) set in advance based on the date / time information timed by the RTC 102d. It is determined whether or not. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the date is a specific date, the process proceeds to step S1348-48. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the date is not a specific date, the process proceeds to step S1348-51.

  In step S1348-48, the sub CPU 102a has a predetermined time (for example, 10:00 to 11:00, 15:00 to 16:00, or 21:00 to 22:00) based on the date / time information of the RTC 102d. It is determined whether or not there is. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a specific time, it moves the process to step S1348-49, and if it determines that it is not a specific date, it moves the process to step S1348-50.

  In step S1348-49, the sub CPU 102a sets the special privilege grant mode level to “3”, and in step S1348-50, sets the special privilege grant mode level to “2”.

  In step S1348-51, the sub CPU 102a sets a predetermined time (for example, 10:00 to 11:00, 15:00 to 16:00, or 21:00 to 22:00) based on the date and time information timed by the RTC 102d. It is determined whether or not. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a specific time, it moves the process to step S1348-50, and if it determines that it is not a specific date, it moves the process to step S1348-52.

  In step S1348-52, the sub CPU 102a sets the special privilege grant mode level to “1”.

  The “specific time” in step S1348-48 and the “specific time” in step S1348-51, that is, the “specific time” on the specific date and the “specific time” on the non-specific date are completely Can be set to match, or a part can be set to match, or can be set not to match completely.

  Next, the game privilege control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, the sub CPU 102a performs a later-described normal privilege effect design (a specific effect design of a character “10p”, a specific effect design of a character “30p”, a specific effect design of a character “50p”, “100p”. It is determined whether or not a stop display of the specific effect design of the character () has been performed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the normal privilege effect symbol is not stopped, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1403. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the normal privilege effect symbol is stopped, the process proceeds to step S1402.

  In step S1402, the sub CPU 102a adds the privilege points (game benefits) represented by the stopped and displayed normal privilege effect symbols to the privilege points stored in the game history information storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1403, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the specific special effect design described above is stopped. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the specific special effect symbol is not stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 102a ends the game privilege control process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the specific special effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S1404.

  In step S1404, the sub CPU 102a stores, in the game history information storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the privilege points (game benefits) represented by the special game privilege pattern determined in step S1313-5 related to the stop display of the specific special effect symbol. It is added to the reward points.

  Next, the special effect control process will be described with reference to FIGS. First, in step S1501, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current rendering mode AorD is being executed and the variation rendering is being executed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the current effect mode AorD is in effect and the variable effect is being executed, the sub CPU 102a moves to step S1502, and is not in the current effect mode AorD or is in the effect mode AorD, but the variable effect is being executed. If it is determined that there is not, the process proceeds to step S1508.

  In step S1502, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a specific reach out determination flag, which will be described later, is ON in the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the specific reach out determination flag is not ON, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1503. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the specific reach out determination flag is ON, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1518.

  In step S1503, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a long-time variation effect longer than a preset variation effect time (for example, 60 seconds) is being executed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the long time variation effect is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1504. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the long time variation effect is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S1518.

  In step S1504, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not reach has been established based on the variation effect data of the variation effect and the variation effect timer counter. If the sub CPU 102a determines that reach has been established, the process proceeds to step S1505. If the sub CPU 102a determines that reach has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1518. In addition, about the variation production in which the reach state is established, the time for which the reach is established is preset for each variation production pattern, and whether or not the reach state is established can be determined by the variation production timer counter. .

  In step S1505, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the first special figure hold number (U1) = “4”, that is, the first special figure hold number is an upper limit value. If the sub CPU 102a determines that U1 = 4, it moves the process to step S1506, and if it determines that U1 = 4 does not, it moves the process to step S1518. The sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the first special figure hold number (U1) = “4”, and the first start opening winning designation command is stored in the fourth storage section of the first effect information hold storage area. Judgment is made by whether or not. When the first start opening winning designation command is stored in the fourth storage unit, it is determined that the first special figure reservation number (U1) = “4”.

  The sub CPU 102a turns on the specific reach out determination flag storage area in the sub RAM 102c in step S1506, and fires the specific reach out determination value (10 in the present embodiment) in step S1507. Set to the confirmation counter.

  The ON of the specific reach out determination flag indicates that the number of out balls generated during execution of the first special figure holding number (U1 = 4) and the specific reach effect is being counted. The specific reach out determination value is the first special figure hold number (U1 = 4), and during the execution of the specific reach production, since the player is wasting a disadvantageous shot, the game ball is fired. This is a determination value related to the number of out balls for executing a launch stop notification effect during specific reach, which is a notification of stopping.

  In step S1508, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the demonstration confirmation launch confirmation flag is ON. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the demonstration confirmation launch confirmation flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step S1509. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the demonstration presentation firing confirmation flag is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1513.

  In step S1509, whether or not the demonstration confirmation launch confirmation time has elapsed in step S1509, which is a standby time for setting the effect devices of the gaming machine Y such as the image display device 14 and the effect lighting device 16 to the power saving mode. Determine. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the demonstration confirmation launch time has elapsed, it moves the process to step S1510. If it determines that the demonstration demonstration launch confirmation time has not elapsed, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1513.

  In step S1510, the sub CPU 102a turns off the demonstration confirmation launch confirmation flag, sets a power saving mode setting command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in step S1511, and saves the power saving mode flag in the power saving mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c in step S1512. Turn on.

  The ON of the power saving mode flag indicates that the power saving mode for reducing the power consumption of the effect device of the gaming machine Y such as the image display device 14 or the effect lighting device 16 is set. The set power saving mode setting command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the power saving mode setting command to control the effect device such as the image display device 14 in a power saving mode. For example, in the power saving mode, the luminance of the image display device 14 is reduced to 1/10 of that in the non-power saving mode, and the volume of the sound output from the sound output device 15 is muted. The production device and the power saving mode that are the targets of the power saving mode are not limited, and any power saving mode that can reduce power consumption (power saving) than the non-power saving mode can be set as appropriate.

  In step S1513, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the firing confirmation flag during the specific round is turned on. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the firing confirmation flag during the specific round is ON, the process proceeds to step S1514. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the firing confirmation flag during the specific round is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1518.

  In step S1514, the sub CPU 102a specifies a specific round for the purpose of urging the player to launch a game ball in order to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage because the game ball has not been fired even though the game is in a specific round. It is determined whether or not the firing confirmation time during the specific round, which is a standby time for executing the middle firing instruction effect, has elapsed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the firing confirmation time during the specific round has elapsed, it moves the process to step S1515. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the firing confirmation time during the specific round has not elapsed, it moves the process to step S1518.

  In step S1515, the sub CPU 102a turns off the specific round firing confirmation flag, sets the specific round firing instruction effect control command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in step S1516, and in step S1517 performs the specific round firing instruction in the sub RAM 102c. The launch instruction effect flag during the specific round is turned ON in the effect flag storage area.

  When the specific round launch instruction effect flag is ON, it indicates that the specific round launch instruction effect is being executed. Further, the set specific round launch instruction effect control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute the firing instruction effect during the specific round by receiving the firing instruction effect control command during the specific round.

  In step S1518, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the long open release confirmation flag is ON. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the long open release confirmation flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1519. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the long open release confirmation flag is not ON, the sub CPU 102a ends the special effect control process.

  In step S1519, the sub CPU 102a releases the game ball in order to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the game ball has not been fired despite being the second auxiliary game. It is determined whether or not the long open launch confirmation time, which is a standby time for executing the medium launch instruction effect, has elapsed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the long open firing confirmation time has elapsed, it moves the process to step S1520. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the long open firing confirmation time has not elapsed, it ends the special effect control process.

  In step S1520, the sub CPU 102a turns off the long open firing confirmation flag, sets the long open firing instruction effect control command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in step S1521, and in step S1522, the long open fire instruction effect of the sub RAM 102c. The long open release instruction effect flag is turned on in the flag storage area.

  The ON of the long opening release instruction effect flag indicates that the long opening release instruction effect is being executed. In addition, the set long-in-launch firing instruction effect control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute the long-in-release instruction instruction control command by receiving the long-in-release instruction instruction control command.

  In step S1523, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the dish full tank abnormality first notification flag is ON. If it is determined that the dish full tank abnormality first notification flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1524. If it is determined that the dish full tank abnormality first notification flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1528.

  In step S1524, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the dish full tank abnormality first notification launch confirmation time has elapsed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the dish full tank abnormality first notification launch confirmation time has elapsed, it moves the process to step S1525, and determines that the dish full tank abnormality first notification launch confirmation time has not elapsed. The process moves to S1528.

  In step S1525, the sub CPU 102a turns the dish full tank abnormality first notification flag in the sub RAM 102c in the first dish full abnormality notification flag storage area.

  In step S1526, the sub CPU 102a turns the dish full tank abnormality second notification flag ON in the dish full tank abnormality second notification flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1527, the sub CPU 102a issues a dish full tank abnormality second notification control command. Set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c.

  The dish full tank abnormality second notification control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. Upon receiving the dish full tank abnormality second notification control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute the dish full tank abnormality second notification effect based on the command.

  In step S1528, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the left-handed first notification flag is ON. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the left-handed first notification flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1529. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the left-handed first notification flag is not ON, the special effect control process ends. To do.

  In step S1529, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the left-handed first notification launch confirmation time has elapsed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the left-handed first notification launch confirmation time has elapsed, it moves the process to step S1530. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the left-handed first notification launch confirmation time has not elapsed, the special effect control process Exit.

  In step S1530, the sub CPU 102a turns off the left-handed first notification flag in the left-handed first notification flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1531, the sub CPU 102a turns on the left-handed second notification flag in the left-handed second notification flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1532, the sub-CPU 102a sends a left-handed second notification control command to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The special effect control process is terminated.

  The left-handed second notification control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. Upon receiving the left-handed second notification control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute a left-handed second notification effect based on the command.

  Next, the customer waiting effect control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1601, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the demonstration effect standby flag is turned on. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the demonstration effect standby flag is ON, it moves the process to step S1602, and if it determines that the demonstration effect standby flag is not ON, the sub CPU 102a ends the customer standby effect control process.

  In step S1602, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the counter value of the customer waiting effect timer counter becomes “0” and the demonstration effect waiting time has elapsed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the demonstration effect standby time has elapsed, it moves the process to step S1603. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the demonstration effect standby time has not elapsed, the sub CPU 102a ends the customer waiting effect control process.

  The sub CPU 102a turns off the demonstration effect standby flag in step S1603, turns on the demonstration effect execution flag in the demonstration effect execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c in step S1604, and confirms the first out ball counter in step S1605. .

  In step S1606, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the counter value of the first out ball counter is 250,000 or more. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value is 250,000 or more, it moves the process to step S1607, and if it determines that the counter value is not 250,000 or more, it moves the process to step S1608.

  In step S1607, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the counter value of the first out ball counter is 500,000 or more. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value is 500,000 or more, it moves the process to step S1610, and if it determines that the counter value is not 500,000 or more, it moves the process to step S1609.

  When the counter value of the first out ball counter is less than 250,000 in step S1608, that is, when the out ball generated after the power to the gaming machine Y is less than 250,000, the sub CPU 102a performs a demonstration effect (normally The first demonstration effect control command indicating the demonstration information of the demonstration effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  When the counter value of the first out ball counter is 250,000 or more and less than 500,000 in step S1609, that is, when the out ball generated after the gaming machine Y is powered on is 250,000 or more and less than 500,000, the sub CPU 102a performs the processing. A second demonstration effect control command indicating effect information of the demonstration effect (first special demonstration effect) is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  When the counter value of the first out ball counter is 500,000 or more in step S1610, that is, when the out ball generated after the power to the gaming machine Y is 500,000 or more, the sub CPU 102a performs the demonstration effect (first The third demonstration effect control command indicating the effect information of (2 special demonstration effect) is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c.

  The demonstration effect control commands (first demonstration effect control command to third demonstration effect control command) set in the transmission buffer are transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the demonstration effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 repeatedly execute a predetermined demonstration effect for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 60 seconds) based on the demonstration effect control command.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the demonstration time and the production mode of the demonstration effect are determined based on the number of out balls generated after the power is turned on to the gaming machine Y (hereinafter referred to as “first out ball number”). Is done. In the present embodiment, the production time of the normal demonstration production based on the first demonstration production control command, the second special demonstration production based on the second demonstration production control command, and the second special demonstration production based on the third demonstration production control command. Are set the same (in this embodiment, 30 seconds), and the production modes are set to be different from each other. Specifically, in the normal demonstration effect, a demonstration effect image in a normal mode (for example, a bathing scene of a semi-main character) is displayed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14, and a normal mode (for example, in the effect lighting device 16, for example). A lighting effect in a manner of repeating red, blue, and yellow lighting is performed, and normal BGM flows from the audio output device 15. In the first special demonstration effect, the demonstration effect image in the normal mode is displayed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14, and the lighting effect in the special mode (for example, a mode in which lighting of the rainbow color is repeated) is performed in the effect lighting device 16. At the same time, a special BGM flows from the audio output device 15. In the second special demonstration effect, a special demonstration effect image (for example, a bathing scene of the semi-main character and Madonna character) is displayed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14, and a special mode (for example, the lighting device 16 for the effect) The lighting effect of the aspect of repeating the lighting of the rainbow color is performed, and the BGM of the special aspect flows from the audio output device 15. As described above, the demonstration time and the production mode are determined based on the first out-ball number, but the production time and the production mode can be appropriately set.

  In step S1611, the sub CPU 102a turns on the demonstration confirmation launch confirmation flag in the demonstration confirmation launch confirmation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1612, the demonstration confirmation launch confirmation time (in this embodiment, 300 seconds = 75000 counter) is set in the demonstration confirmation launch confirmation timer counter of the sub-RAM 102c, and the customer waiting effect control process is terminated.

  The demonstration effect execution flag ON indicates that the demonstration effect is being executed. The demonstration confirmation launch confirmation flag indicates that the time from when the demonstration effect is executed until the first out ball is detected is measured. When the demonstration confirmation launch flag is ON, the time until the out ball is first detected during the demonstration presentation is measured. Further, the demonstration confirmation launch confirmation timer counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S1200.

  Next, the long opening effect control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1651, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the long open effect standby flag is ON. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the long opening effect standby flag is ON, it moves the process to step S1652, and if it determines that the long opening effect standby flag is not ON, the sub CPU 102a ends the long opening effect control process.

  In step S1652, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the counter value of the long opening effect timer counter becomes “0” and the long opening effect standby time has elapsed. When determining that the long opening effect standby time has elapsed, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1653, and when determining that the long opening effect standby time has not elapsed, the sub CPU 102a ends the long opening effect control process.

  In step S1653, the sub CPU 102a turns off the long open effect standby flag.

  In step S1654, the sub CPU 102a turns on the long opening effect execution flag in the long opening effect execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, sets the long opening effect execution time in step S1655, and in step S1656, the effect of long opening effect execution. A long opening effect control command indicating information is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c.

  The long opening effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the long opening effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute the long opening effect for a predetermined time (5.0 seconds in the present embodiment) based on the command.

  In step S1657, the sub CPU 102a turns on the long release effect firing confirmation flag in the long release effect launch confirmation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1658, the long release effect firing confirmation time (in this embodiment, 2 .5 seconds = 625 counter) is set in the long open firing confirmation timer counter of the sub-RAM 102c, and the long open effect control process ends.

  Note that ON of the long opening effect execution flag indicates that the long opening effect is being executed. In addition, ON of the long release release confirmation flag indicates that the time from when the long release effect is executed until the first out ball is detected is measured. In addition, the long release effect firing confirmation timer counter is subtracted every 4 milliseconds in step S1200.

  Next, the roulette effect will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the roulette effect is executed on condition that the game ball passes through the first winning gate 10 and the second winning gate 11 and the normal symbol lottery is performed, and the normal symbol variation display is performed. Furthermore, the roulette effect is executed on the condition that it is determined as “execution of roulette effect” in the roulette effect determination process (step S1324-16).

  As described above, in the case of the roulette effect pattern 1, the roulette effect is performed for 10 seconds from the start of the variation display of the normal symbol, and in the case of the roulette effect pattern 2, the roulette effect is 10 seconds after the start of the variation display of the normal symbol. In the case of the roulette effect pattern 3, it is performed for 13 seconds from the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 99, before the roulette effect is started, the front of the box image B displayed at the center of the lower end of the display area 140 of the image display device 14 is closed, and the reel image L can be visually recognized. Can not. When the roulette effect starts, as shown in FIG. 100, the front surface of the box image B opens, and the reel image L becomes visible (appears) and starts to rotate (fluctuate roulette). Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the reel image L rotates, the reel image L stops (roulette stop). When the reel image L stops and a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 99 again, the front surface of the box image B is closed and the reel image L becomes invisible, and the roulette effect ends.

  The front surface where the box image B is opened and the specific effect symbol attached to the reel image L have the same size. Therefore, by rotating the reel image L, the specific effect symbol attached to the reel image L appears from the front of the box image B in the order according to the arrangement related to the reel configuration. Variation display of the specific effect design will be performed. Further, when the reel image L is stopped, any specific effect symbol included in the reel configuration can be seen from the front of the box image B, so that the specific effect symbol is stopped.

  The reel image L that is used until the reel image L stops for the first time is determined by the reel configuration determination described above. Here, “until the reel image L stops for the first time” is, as will be described later, when the roulette effect type 7 is selected, the reel image L is temporarily stopped and the “JP” mark is displayed. This is because the specific effect symbol is stopped and displayed, but after this stop, a different reel image is restarted and a special privilege game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, there are ten types of specific effect symbols constituting the reel image L. As shown in FIGS. 101 (a) to 101 (j), a dumpling mark specific effect design, a “super heat” character specific effect design, a “☆” mark specific effect design, and a “Z” mark specification Production design, specific production design of “×” mark, special production design of “JP” mark, specific production design of “10p” mark, specific production design of “30p” mark, specific production design of “50p” mark, “100p” ”Mark special effect design is set.

  The specific effect symbol of the dumpling mark suggests that the result of the normal symbol lottery related to the roulette effect is “win 2” (execution of the second auxiliary game).

  The specific effect design of the characters “Intense heat” suggests that the result of the special design lottery related to the current variation effect may be “big hit”.

  The specific effect symbol of “☆” mark indicates that it is certain that the result of the special symbol lottery related to the current variation effect is “long win”.

  The specific effect design of the “Z” mark suggests execution of the prefetch effect mode. In other words, after the special effect symbol of “Z” mark is stopped and displayed, the fluctuating effect in the pre-reading effect mode is performed.

  The specific effect symbol of the “x” mark indicates that the result of the normal symbol lottery is a losing or winning one.

  The specific effect design of the “10p” mark, the specific effect design of the “30p” mark, the specific effect design of the character “50p”, and the specific effect design of the “100p” mark indicate the execution of the normal privilege game (hereinafter, “ The specific effect symbols of the “10p”, “30p”, “50p”, and “100p” marks are referred to as “normal privilege effect symbols”).

  The normal privilege game is a game in which a game privilege according to the number related to the normal privilege effect design is given to the player by stopping display of each normal privilege effect design. That is, when the special effect design of the “10p” mark is stopped and displayed, 10 point privilege points are displayed, and when the specific effect design of the “30p” mark is stopped and displayed, 30 point special points are specified by the “50p” mark. When the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, 50 point bonus points are given to the player, and when the specific effect symbol of the “100p” mark is stopped and displayed, 100 point privilege points are respectively given to the player.

  The specific effect symbol of the “JP” mark suggests execution of a special privilege game (hereinafter, the specific effect symbol of the “JP” mark is referred to as “special privilege effect symbol”). A special privilege game is a game in which a large amount of game privileges can be easily obtained compared to a normal privilege game. Details of the special privilege game will be described later.

  As described above, the roulette effect basically includes the change display of the specific effect symbol and the stop display of the specific effect symbol. However, the special privilege effect is provided only when the roulette effect type is the effect type 7. Since the symbol stop display is performed and the special privilege game is performed, the configuration of the roulette effect is greatly different between the effect type 7 and the other effect types 1 to 6.

  First, a roulette effect whose roulette effect type is other than the effect type 7 (hereinafter referred to as “normal roulette effect”) will be described. As shown in FIG. 98 (a), in the normal roulette effect, the variation display of the specific effect symbol for a predetermined time (“7” seconds in the effect patterns 1 and 2 and “10” seconds in the effect pattern 3) is performed. The specific effect symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (any effect pattern 1 to 3 is “3” seconds). While the stop display of the specific effect symbol is finished, the roulette effect is finished.

  Next, a roulette effect whose roulette effect type is effect type 7 (hereinafter referred to as “special roulette effect”) will be described. In the present embodiment, in the case of the roulette effect type 7, only the roulette effect pattern 3 is selected. That is, the production time of the special roulette effect is 13 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the special roulette effect is started, the variation display of the specific effect symbol for 7 seconds is first performed. When the variable display is finished, the special privilege effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, when the special bonus effect design stop display is performed and one second has elapsed (when the special privilege production design stop display is performed for 1 second), the specific special design symbol is displayed again, and the special privilege game starts. Is done.

  Here, the special privilege game will be described. In the special privilege game, the normal privilege game is performed a plurality of times. Specifically, the change display of the specific effect design and the stop display of the normal privilege effect design are repeated a plurality of times. When the stop display of the normal privilege effect symbol is performed, the game privilege corresponding to the normal privilege effect symbol is added in the game privilege control process of step S1400.

  Note that the reel image used in the special privilege game is appropriately set. That is, the specific effect symbol that appears in the variation display of the specific effect symbol is configured only by the normal privilege effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special privilege game, or is configured by all the normal privilege effect symbols. You can also Moreover, the fluctuation display of the normal privilege effect design may be configured with a blank (for example, white). Furthermore, a specific effect design different from the normal privilege effect design may be used.

  The number of executions of the normal privilege game in the special privilege game, and the type (the game privilege to be acquired) and the order of the normal privilege effect symbols to be stopped and displayed in each normal privilege game are preset as the special privilege game pattern (FIG. 94). To FIG. 96). “30p”, “50p”, and “100p” shown in the special privilege game content of FIGS. 94 to 96 represent the normal privilege effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the special privilege game by the special privilege game pattern. .

  In the present embodiment, the number of executions of the normal special game in the special privilege game is set to 2 to 4 times. In addition, the type of the normal privilege effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special special game in the special privilege game is a normal privilege effect symbol that can be stopped and displayed in the normal roulette effect.

  The acquired privilege points are directly given to the player through steps S1250-19 to 21. The player transmits information representing the gaming privilege acquired at an arbitrary timing to the server 500 of the gaming system, and in accordance with the privilege point, the privilege on presentation such as a privilege image or privilege sound related to the content of the gaming machine Y Can be earned. Note that the game privilege is not limited to the privilege related to the effect such as privilege points, and can be set as appropriate in addition to the direct benefits related to the game such as special games and auxiliary games.

  In this way, the roulette effect is executed in response to the normal symbol lottery (winning determination or normal symbol variation display). Then, when the roulette effect is executed, the effect type representing the effect content of the roulette effect is determined. Here, in the privilege grant mode, the effect type 6 or the effect type 7 can be selected. That is, in the privilege grant mode, a normal privilege game or a special privilege game to which a game privilege is granted can be executed. On the other hand, the effect type 6 or the effect type 7 is not selected in the non-privilege grant mode. That is, in the non-privilege grant mode, the normal privilege game or the special privilege game is not executed. In this way, by restricting the granting of the game privilege by the roulette effect (stop display of the normal privilege effect symbol or the special privilege effect symbol) to the privilege granting mode, it is troublesome for the player who is not interested in the grant of the game privilege. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the production effect due to the execution.

  Further, the reel configuration relating to the roulette effect is different depending on whether the privilege grant mode or the non-privilege grant mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91, the reel image L used in the privilege grant mode is provided with a specific effect design (a normal privilege effect design and a special privilege effect design) related to the game privilege. The reel image L used in the privilege grant mode is not attached with a specific effect symbol related to the game privilege. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the effect of performing an annoying effect on a player who is not interested in granting a game privilege.

  Moreover, the specific effect design of "x" mark is attached to the position where the normal privilege effect design of the reel image L used in the privilege grant mode is attached in the non-privilege grant mode. On the other hand, at the position where the special privilege effect symbol of the reel image L used in the privilege grant mode is attached, the specific effect symbol of the dumpling mark is given in the non-privilege grant mode. In this way, the entire reel image L is not made different depending on whether the privilege grant mode or the non-privilege grant mode, but only the specific effect symbols related to the game privilege are made different so as to be stored in advance. An increase in the amount of data can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the types of reel configurations are the types of reel configurations (non-common reel configurations: 1 to 11) in which the arrangement of specific effect symbols is different between the non-privilege grant mode and the privilege grant mode. 14), and in the case of the non-privilege giving mode and the case of the privilege granting mode, the arrangement of the specific effect symbols is the same type of reel configuration (common reel configuration: 12, 13, 15, 16). ing. Thereby, increase of the data amount memorize | stored previously can be suppressed, and the bias of the game property by privilege provision mode / non-privilege provision mode can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the end of the special privilege game, the roulette effect that can be selected in the roulette effect determination for long hit / specific special figure result / prefetch effect mode / win 2 that triggers the roulette effect type data. The specific effect symbol related to the type data is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the effect of the special roulette effect can be enhanced.

  Further, as described above, in the case of the roulette effect type 6, the opportunity of the roulette effect is a long distance> specific special figure result> prefetching effect mode> a specific point design pattern of a mark with a high point (p) in the order of 2 per reel The image L is easy to stop. That is, in the case of the roulette effect type 6, it is easy to obtain a gaming privilege of a high point in the order of the roulette effect in the order of long win> specific special figure result> prefetch effect mode> per win. For example, when the type of the reel configuration is “2”, the reel image L is likely to stop at the specific effect design of the “100 pt” mark in the order of long hit> specific special figure result> prefetch effect mode> per win 2 > Pre-reading effect mode> Result of specific special figure> Reel image L is likely to stop at a specific effect symbol of “30 pt” mark in the order of long win. In this way, when the reel image L is likely to stop at a high-specification design pattern when the expectation of winning a big hit is high, even if the special privilege game is not executed in the roulette effect and only the normal privilege game is executed, It is possible to change the degree of expectation for the subsequent performance depending on the content, and there is an effect that the player can be more interested in the game.

  Further, in the case of the roulette effect type 7, the expected value of the total of the game benefits acquired in the special privilege game is higher in the order of long-term> specific special figure result> prefetch effect mode> 2 per opportunity of the roulette effect. (See FIGS. 94 to 96). For example, in the case of “long win”, the special privilege game pattern of the special privilege game acquired 400p (= 100p × 4 times) is selected with the highest probability (see FIG. 94). On the other hand, in the case of “win 2”, the special privilege game pattern of the special privilege game acquired 90p (= 30p × 3 times) is selected with the highest probability (see FIG. 96). In this way, when the roulette effect type 7 is selected and the special privilege game is executed, it is possible to change the expectation level of the jackpot winning by the total of the earned points, thereby increasing the player's interest in the special privilege game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the present embodiment, the normal figure change time is “15.0” seconds in the non-short game state and “3.0” seconds in the short time game state, and is simply a single symbol regardless of the normal symbol determination result for each game state. Although it is set to one, in any gaming state or in one gaming state, a plurality are set, and it is also possible to select and decide from the plurality. In this case, the normal symbol variation time is associated with the determination result of the normal symbol determination, is allocated at a predetermined rate according to the determination result of the normal symbol determination, and is determined based on the determination result of the normal symbol. You can also. In other words, the normal pattern change time can also indicate the expectation of the determination result of the normal symbol determination. In addition, it is possible to set a plurality of roulette effect production times and disclosure times in conjunction with the provision of a plurality of normal time fluctuation times. Further, the usual time variation time can be set to be constant regardless of the types of non-time-saving gaming state and time-saving gaming state and gaming state.

  In addition, the effect mode of the roulette effect (the effect time, the start time, or the effect content) is not limited to the above example and can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the roulette effect is performed in one normal symbol variation display. However, the roulette effect is performed once over a plurality of ordinary symbol variation displays. You can also. Also, the type of specific effect symbol and the reel configuration in the roulette effect are not limited to the above example.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the roulette effect is performed in response to the normal symbol lottery, but it is also possible to perform in the special symbol lottery. In addition, the effect mode of the roulette effect can be set as appropriate. Further, in this embodiment, the roulette effect is performed only in the non-short game state, but can also be performed in the short-time game state. On the other hand, it is possible not to perform the roulette effect in the non-time-saving gaming state.

  Further, the configuration of the normal privilege game and the special privilege game is not limited to the above example. Furthermore, the number of executions of the normal special game in the special privilege game and the type of the normal privilege effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special privilege game are not limited to the above example. In addition, the contents of the normal privilege effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the special privilege game are not only those that add the game privilege such as 10p, 30p, but also those that multiply the game privilege such as “× 2” and “× 10”. Good. In addition, after the special privilege game ends, the total of game privileges acquired in the special privilege game can be notified.

  Furthermore, the operation content for performing the privilege grant mode setting process is not limited to the above example. For example, the privilege granting mode setting process can be performed by a predetermined operation of the selection button 19A during the customer waiting state. In addition, the operation timing for performing the privilege grant mode setting process is not limited to the waiting state of the customer, but during the game (for example, the change display or stop display of special symbols or the big hit game / small hit game), the selection button 19A A menu screen for the privilege grant mode setting process can be displayed on the display area 140 of the image display device 14 by the operation, and the privilege grant mode setting process can be performed by a predetermined operation.

  Next, various notification effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 114.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing notification effect conditions and notification effect contents corresponding to the type of notification effect. Each notification effect is associated with the content of the notification effect at the start of notification effect execution as the notification effect condition, the start condition and the end condition as the notification effect condition. Furthermore, depending on the type of notification effect, in addition to the content of the notification effect at the start of the notification effect execution, the content of the notification effect is set depending on whether or not the game ball is being launched (in this embodiment, the dish Full tank abnormality and left-handed notification).

  Specifically, the start condition of the power-on notification effect is when the power is turned on, that is, the sub CPU 102a receives a power-on designation command from the main CPU 101a, and the end condition is 30 seconds from the start of the power-on notification effect. It is progress of. The contents of the power-on notification effect are contents for displaying the image “power-on” for 30 seconds in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 (not shown).

  The start condition of the power recovery notification effect is when the power is recovered, that is, the sub CPU 102a receives a power recovery designation command from the main CPU 101a, and the end condition is 30 seconds from the start of the power recovery notification effect. In addition, the content of the power restoration notification effect is that the image “power on” is displayed for 30 seconds in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 and the sound “power is restored” is output from the audio output device 15 for 30 seconds. (Not shown).

  The start condition of the variable display launch stop notification effect is that the specific reach effect is executed in the normal gaming state, and the out ball is determined to be out during the specific reach after the first special figure hold number (U1) = 4 is established. The value ("10" in the present embodiment) is detected and the remaining time of the variation effect is 10 seconds or more, and the end condition is that 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation display firing stop notification effect. is there. Further, the contents of the variable display firing stop notification effect are contents for displaying the images G11 and G12 “Suspended full! Lost if hit” for 5 seconds in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 (FIG. 103). (Refer to (d-2) and (e-2)).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 103, the firing stop notification effect during variable display will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the display area 140 of the image display device 14, a first special figure hold display area 141 for displaying a first special figure hold image representing a hold of the first special figure variation display, A second special figure hold display area 142 for displaying a second special figure hold image representing a hold of the second special figure fluctuation display is provided.

  The first special figure hold display area 141 is divided into a first display unit 141a, a second display unit 141b, a third display unit 141c, and a fourth display unit 141d. Each display part 141a-141d respond | corresponds to the 1st memory | storage part-the 4th memory | storage part of the 1st special symbol holding | maintenance storage area of main RAM101c.

  Therefore, the 1st special figure reservation image displayed on the 1st display part 141a is the 1st special figure fluctuation display performed next, and the 1st special figure reservation image displayed on the 2nd display part 141b is the next The first special figure fluctuation display is executed. The second special figure hold display area 142 is also divided into a second display part 142a, a second display part 142b, a third display part 142c, and a fourth display part 142d. A special figure hold image is displayed. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 103A, four first special figure fluctuation displays are reserved. That is, the first special figure hold number (U1) = 4.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the normal gaming state (effect mode A), the special effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner, and when the first special figure reservation number (U1) = 4, FIG. Assume that a reach state is established as shown in (b), and then the above-described specific reach effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 103 (d-1) and 103 (e-1).

  In the present embodiment, during the specific reach production, the first special figure hold display and the second special figure hold display are deleted in order to prevent a reduction in the production effect of the specific reach production. Further, during the specific reach production, the special production design is reduced and displayed as compared with the state before the reach state is established, and is moved to a predetermined position.

  As described above, after the specific reach effect is executed in the normal gaming state and the situation of the first special figure holding number (U1) = 4 is established, the out ball is determined to be an out determination value during the specific reach (in this embodiment, “ 10 ”) If the remaining time of the variation effect is 10 seconds or more, a variation display firing stop notification effect for stopping the launch of the game ball is performed. In the present embodiment, in the variable display firing stop notification effect, since the first special figure reservation number (U1) has reached the upper limit value, a display to stop the launch of the game ball is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (d-2), the first special figure hold number (U1) is set to the upper limit value from the specific reach effect executed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14. The images G11 and G12 indicating that the game ball is to be stopped because it has reached the limit are displayed in a range different from the display range of the special effect symbol in the display area 140. By performing this display, the execution time is long and the number of the first special figure hold does not decrease (the hold of the first special figure change display is not digested). By stopping the player's launch (so-called “wasting”) that cannot generate the right (including special lottery), the disadvantage suffered by the player can be reduced.

  In this way, it is possible to directly notify the player that the launch of the game ball is to be stopped by the variable display launch stop notification effect. For example, the first special figure hold display is different from the normal display mode. By displaying in a special display mode and emphasizing that the first special figure reservation number (U1) has reached the upper limit value, the player is indirectly informed that the launch of the game ball is to be stopped. You can also In this case, the special display mode is a display mode used in the notice effect in addition to the normal display mode so as not to give the player the expectation of winning the jackpot by the first special figure hold display of the special display mode. It is desirable to adopt a different mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display of images G11 and G12 (changed display firing stop notification effect) is erased (finished) when performed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in the present embodiment). This is to suppress a decrease in the effect of the specific reach production. In order to surely prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage, it is possible to execute the variable display firing stop notification effect until the specific reach effect ends.

  Next, the start condition of the launch instruction effect during the specific round is that the out ball is not detected for 10 seconds after the start of the specific round, and the end ball is detected during the launch instruction effect during the specific round. That is. In addition, the content of the firing instruction effect during the specific round is the content for displaying the image G24 “Do n’t hit the jackpot !!” in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 (see FIG. 104C). ).

  Here, the firing instruction effect during a specific round will be described in detail with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 104 (a), an image G21 instructing the launch of a game ball toward the first grand prize winning port 8 or the second grand prize winning port 9 is displayed in the display area during the opening after the long hit game is started. It is displayed in 140 predetermined areas. Then, when the first round game is started, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), an image G22 and a round number for instructing the launch of a game ball toward the first grand prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9 An image G23 representing (R) is displayed in a predetermined area of the display area 140. Then, when the out ball is not detected during the specific round launch confirmation time (in this embodiment, 10 seconds) after the first round game is started, the specific round launch instruction effect is executed. In the present embodiment, as a launch instruction effect during a specific round, a display that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the first grand prize port 8 or the second grand prize port 9 is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (c), an image G24 that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the first grand prize winning port 8 or the second grand prize winning port 9 is displayed in a predetermined area of the display area 140. To do. By performing this display, it is possible to prevent a game ball from entering the first grand prize winning port 8 or the second big prize winning port 9 during the long hitting game and missing an opportunity to win a large amount of prize balls. Therefore, the disadvantage that the player suffers can be reduced.

  In addition, the launch instruction effect during the specific round is an effect instructing the launch of a game ball toward the first grand prize port 8 or the second grand prize port 9 (toward the first grand prize port 8 or the second grand prize port 9). This is performed separately from the display of the image G22 instructing the launch of the game ball, but by emphasizing the effect of instructing the launch of the game ball toward the first grand prize winning port 8 or the second grand prize winning port 9. It can also be used as an effect instructing the launch of a game ball toward the first grand prize port 8 or the second grand prize port 9. As an emphasis mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), an image G22 instructing the launch of a game ball toward the first grand prize winning port 8 or the second grand prize winning port 9 is displayed in an enlarged manner. In addition, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), an image G25 that is the same as the image G22 instructing the release of the game ball toward the first grand prize winning port 8 or the second grand prize winning port 9 is displayed in another area in the display area 140. May be displayed. Further, as an emphasis mode, for example, it is possible to change the display mode of the image G22 such as blinking the image G22 or changing the color.

  In addition, the launch instruction effect during a specific round is a time when it is difficult for the first big prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9 to win the game ball in the first predetermined round game in one big hit game. However, in a predetermined round game thereafter, the game can be applied to a jackpot game in which the first big winning opening 8 or the second big winning opening 9 is opened for an easy time to win a game ball.

  Next, the start condition of the launch instruction effect during the long release is that the out ball is not detected for 2.5 seconds after the start of the long release effect. The end condition is that the out ball is played during the launch instruction effect during the long release. It is to be detected. In addition, the content of the long open release instruction effect is the content for displaying the image G33 “Don't hit the electric chew !!” in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 (see FIG. 106 (c)). .

  Here, with reference to FIG. 106, the long opening release instruction effect will be described in detail. When the second auxiliary game is started, first, a time that is difficult for the game ball of the second start port 7 to enter is released (hereinafter referred to as “short open”), and an interval (second start) Through the closing of the mouth 7, an easy opening time (hereinafter referred to as “long opening”) for entering the game ball of the second starting port 7 is performed.

  In the second auxiliary game, when the short opening is started, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), an image G31 for notifying that the second start port 7 is long open during the short opening and in the interval is displayed in the display area. It is displayed in 140 predetermined areas. When the long opening is started, an image G32 indicating that the second start port 7 is long open is displayed in a predetermined area of the display area 140.

  If the out ball is not detected during the long open release confirmation time (2.5 seconds in the present embodiment) after the start of the long open, the long open release instruction effect is executed. In the present embodiment, a display to the effect that the player is to launch the game ball toward the second starting port 7 is performed as the long-releasing launch instruction effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106 (c), an image G 33 is displayed in a predetermined area of the display area 140 for prompting the player to launch a game ball toward the second starting port 7. By performing this display, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being missed from entering the second starting port 7 which is a relatively advantageous starting port in the special symbol lottery result. The disadvantage that the person suffers can be reduced.

  In addition, although the launch instruction effect during the long opening is performed separately from the display of the image G32 indicating that the second start port 7 is long open, as shown in FIG. By emphasizing the effect to be shown, it is also possible to use it as an effect instructing the launch of a game ball toward the second starting port 7. As an emphasis mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 107, an image G32 indicating that the shutter is long open is enlarged and displayed. Further, as a highlighting mode, the display mode of the image G32 can be changed, for example, by blinking the image G32 or changing the color.

  Next, the condition for starting the general winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect is that when it is determined that the game ball has not been fired, that is, when the out ball has not been detected for 10 seconds or longer, The out ball is not detected for 2 seconds after the winning is detected, and the end condition is 30 seconds from the start of the general winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect. Further, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), the content of the general winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect is displayed on the display area 140 of the image display device 14 for the image G50 “General winning opening first abnormal winning” for 30 seconds. In addition, the voice output device 15 outputs the voice “general winning opening first abnormal prize” at a maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y for 30 seconds.

In this way, if the out ball is not detected for 2 seconds after the out ball has not been detected for 10 seconds or longer and the out ball is not detected for 2 seconds, it is determined that the general winning port is the first abnormal prize winning. Since the detection of the out ball is not detected unless the game ball is actually won, an illegal act of allowing the player to recognize that the game ball has been detected by the general winning opening detection sensor 12a without actually firing the game ball. (For example, fraudulent acts such as attaching a string to a game ball to be detected by a detection sensor, or fraudulent acts of irradiating a radio wave and misdetecting that it has been detected by a detection sensor) A general winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect can be performed.
In addition, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice of “general prize opening first abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, the game shop is generally noisy. Even in a loud environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the first prize winning in the general prize opening, and cheating can be prevented.

  The start condition of the general winning opening second abnormal winning notification effect is that when 100 gaming balls are fired, that is, when 100 out balls are detected, gaming balls exceeding the specified ball are won in the general winning opening 12. The end condition is that 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the general winning opening second abnormal winning notification effect. In addition, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the content of the general winning opening second abnormal winning notification effect is displayed on the display area 140 of the image display device 14 for the image G51 “General winning opening second abnormal winning” for 30 seconds. In addition, the voice output device 15 outputs the voice “general winning opening second abnormal prize” at a maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y for 30 seconds.

In this way, when 100 out balls are detected and a game ball exceeding the prescribed ball is won in the general winning opening 12, it is determined as a general winning opening second abnormal winning, and by the player, While launching the game ball, the cheating action detection sensor 12a recognizes that the game ball has been detected (for example, a cheating action such as attaching a string or the like to the game ball and detecting the detection sensor by radiating radio waves) Even if a misconduct that misrecognizes the detection is performed), it is possible to accurately determine the abnormal winning and perform the general winning mouth second abnormal winning notification effect.
In addition, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice “general prize opening second abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, the game shop is generally noisy. Even in a loud environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the second prize winning in the general prize opening, and cheating can be prevented.

  The start condition of the first grand prize opening first abnormal prize notification effect is that when it is determined that the game ball has not been fired, that is, when the out ball has not been detected for 10 seconds or more, the first big prize opening 8 is entered. The out ball is not detected for 2 seconds after detecting the first prize, and the end condition is the passage of 30 seconds from the start of the first large prize opening first abnormal prize notification effect. In addition, as shown in FIG. 108 (c), the content of the first grand prize opening first abnormal prize notification effect is the image G52 “first big prize mouth first abnormal prize” in the display area 140 of the image display device 14. Is displayed for 30 seconds, and the voice “first big prize opening first abnormal prize” is output from the voice output device 15 at a maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y for 30 seconds.

In this way, if the out ball is not detected for 2 seconds after the winning to the first big winning opening 8 is detected when the out ball has not been detected for 10 seconds or longer, it is determined as the first abnormal winning opening first abnormal winning. Since the out-ball is not detected unless the game ball is actually won, the game ball is detected by the first major winning opening detection sensor 8a without actually firing the game ball. Even if a fraudulent act that is recognized as having been performed (for example, a fraudulent act in which a detection ball is attached to a game ball or detected by a detection sensor, or a fraudulent act that is mistakenly detected as being detected by a detection sensor) Can be accurately determined, and the first large winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect can be performed.
In addition, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice of “first big prize opening first abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop is noisy, Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware that the first big prize opening first abnormal prize has occurred, and illegal acts can be prevented.

  The starting condition of the first grand prize opening second abnormal prize notification effect is that when 100 game balls are launched, that is, when 100 out balls are detected, the first big prize opening 8 exceeds the specified ball. The game ball is winning, and the ending condition is 30 seconds from the start of the first large winning opening second abnormal winning notification effect. In addition, the content of the first grand prize opening second abnormal winning notification effect is as shown in FIG. 108 (d), in the display area 140 of the image display device 14, the image G53 “first big winning opening second abnormal prize winning”. Is displayed for 30 seconds, and the voice “first big prize opening second abnormal prize” is output from the voice output device 15 for 30 seconds at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y.

In this way, when 100 out balls are detected and a game ball exceeding the specified ball is won in the first big prize opening 8, it is determined as the first big prize opening second abnormal prize, While the player is launching a game ball, the player can detect that the first big prize opening detection sensor 8a has detected the game ball (for example, an illegal act that causes the detection sensor to detect a game ball with a string or the like) Even if a fraudulent act that irradiates a radio wave and misdetects that the detection sensor has detected is performed, it is possible to accurately determine an abnormal winning and perform a first large winning opening second abnormal winning notification effect.
In addition, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice of “first big prize opening second abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, the game shop is noisy, Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the first big prize opening second abnormal prize, and cheating can be prevented.

  The start condition of the first grand prize opening third abnormal prize notification effect is to detect three balls in the first big prize opening 8 per 60 seconds outside the big prize opening validity period, and the end condition is It has been 30 seconds since the start of the first grand prize opening third abnormal winning notification effect. In addition, as shown in FIG. 108 (e), the content of the first grand prize opening third abnormal prize notification effect is the image G54 “first big prize mouth third abnormal prize” in the display area 140 of the image display device 14. Is displayed for 30 seconds, and the voice “first big prize opening third abnormal prize” is output from the voice output device 15 at a maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y for 30 seconds.

In this way, if three balls are detected in the first grand prize opening 8 per 60 seconds outside the grand prize opening period, it is determined that the first big prize opening is a third abnormal prize, and the player Even if an illegal act of illegally opening the first grand prize opening 8 and winning the game ball at the first big prize opening 8 outside the grand prize opening period is determined, It is possible to perform a first grand prize opening third abnormal winning notification effect.
In addition, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice of “first big prize opening third abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, in general, the game shop is noisy, Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the first big prize opening third abnormal prize, and cheating can be prevented.

  The start condition of the second grand prize opening first abnormal prize notification effect is that when the game ball is determined to be unlaunched, that is, when the out ball has not been detected for 10 seconds or longer, The out ball is not detected for 2 seconds after the winning is detected, and the end condition is 30 seconds from the start of the second large winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect. In addition, the content of the second grand prize opening first abnormal winning notification effect is as shown in FIG. 108 (f), in the display area 140 of the image display device 14, the image G55 “second big winning opening first abnormal prize winning”. Is displayed for 30 seconds, and the voice “second big prize opening first abnormal prize” is output from the voice output device 15 at a maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y for 30 seconds.

As described above, if the out ball is not detected for 2 seconds after the out ball has not been detected for 10 seconds or more, and the out ball is not detected for 2 seconds, it is determined that the second big winning port is the first abnormal prize. Since the detection of the out ball is not detected unless the game ball is actually won, the game ball is detected by the second big prize opening detection sensor 9a without actually firing the game ball. Even if a fraudulent act that is recognized as having been performed (for example, a fraudulent act in which a detection ball is attached to a game ball or detected by a detection sensor, or a fraudulent act that is mistakenly detected as being detected by a detection sensor) Can be accurately determined, and the second large winning opening first abnormal winning notification effect can be performed.
In addition, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice “second big prize opening first abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop has a large noise. Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the second big prize opening first abnormal prize, and cheating can be prevented.

  The starting condition for the second grand prize opening second abnormal prize notification effect is that when 100 gaming balls are launched, that is, when 100 out balls are detected, the second big prize opening 9 exceeds the specified ball. That is, the game ball is won, and the end condition is 30 seconds from the start of the second large winning opening second abnormal winning notification effect. Further, the content of the second grand prize opening second abnormal winning notification effect is as shown in FIG. 108 (g), in the display area 140 of the image display device 14, the image G56 “second big prize winning mouth second abnormal prize winning”. Is displayed for 30 seconds, and the voice “second big prize opening second abnormal prize” is output from the voice output device 15 at a maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y for 30 seconds.

In this way, when 100 out balls are detected and a game ball exceeding the prescribed ball is won in the second big prize opening 9, it is determined as the second big prize opening second abnormal prize, While launching a game ball, the player may cause the second big prize opening detection sensor 9a to recognize that the game ball has been detected (for example, a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect a game ball with a string or the like) Even if a fraudulent act that irradiates a radio wave and misdetects that the detection sensor has detected is performed, it is possible to accurately determine an abnormal prize and perform a second large prize opening second abnormal prize notification effect.
In addition, by causing the voice output device 15 to output a voice of “second big prize opening second abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop is noisy. Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the second big prize opening second abnormal prize, and cheating can be prevented.

  The start condition of the second grand prize opening third abnormal prize notification effect is to detect three balls in the second big prize opening 9 per 60 seconds outside the big prize opening validity period, and the end condition is It is 30 seconds from the start of the second large prize opening third abnormal prize notification effect. The contents of the second grand prize opening third abnormal prize notification effect are as shown in FIG. 108 (h), in the display area 140 of the image display device 14, in the image G57 “second big prize mouth third abnormal prize winning”. Is displayed for 30 seconds, and the voice “second big prize opening third abnormal prize” is output from the voice output device 15 at a maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y for 30 seconds.

In this way, when 3 balls are detected in the second grand prize opening 9 per 60 seconds outside the grand prize opening period, it is determined as the second big prize opening third abnormal prize, and the player Even if an illegal act of illegally opening the second grand prize opening 9 and winning the game ball in the second big prize opening 9 outside the grand prize winning period is determined, It is possible to perform a second major winning opening third abnormal winning notification effect.
In addition, by causing the voice output device 15 to output a voice “second big prize opening third abnormal prize” at a maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop has a large noise. Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware that the second big prize opening third abnormal prize has occurred, and illegal acts can be prevented.

  The start condition of the first start opening first abnormal winning notification effect is that when the game ball is determined not to be fired, that is, when the out ball has not been detected for 10 seconds or more, the first start opening 6 is won. In this case, the out ball is not detected for 2 seconds after the detection of, and the end condition is 30 seconds from the start of the first start opening first abnormal winning notification effect. Further, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), the content of the first start opening first abnormal winning notification effect is 30 images G58 “first start opening first abnormal winning” in the display area 140 of the image display device 14. In addition to displaying for a second, the audio output device 15 outputs the voice “first start port first abnormal prize” for 30 seconds at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y.

As described above, when the out ball is not detected for 10 seconds or more, if the out ball is not detected for 2 seconds after the winning to the first starting port 6 is detected, it is determined as the first starting port first abnormal winning. Since the detection of the out ball is not detected unless the game ball is actually won, it is assumed that the game ball is detected by the first start port detection sensor 6a without actually firing the game ball. Even if an illegal act to be recognized (for example, an illegal act in which a string is attached to a game ball to be detected by a detection sensor or an illegal act in which a detection signal is detected by irradiating a radio wave), an abnormal winning is accurately determined. The first start opening first abnormal winning notification effect can be performed.
In addition, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice of “first start opening first abnormal winning” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop is noisy. Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the first start opening first abnormal winning, and illegal activities can be prevented.

  The starting condition of the first start opening second abnormal winning notification effect is that when 100 game balls are launched, that is, when 100 out balls are detected, the first start opening 6 exceeds the specified ball. Is the winning, and the end condition is 30 seconds from the start of the first start opening second abnormal winning notification effect. In addition, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the content of the first start opening second abnormal winning notification effect is 30 images G59 “first start opening second abnormal winning” in the display area 140 of the image display device 14. In addition to displaying for a second, the audio output device 15 outputs the voice “first start port second abnormal prize” for 30 seconds at the maximum volume that the gaming machine Y can set.

As described above, when 100 out balls are detected and a game ball exceeding the specified ball is won in the first start port 6, it is determined that the first start port is a second abnormal winning, and the player determines , While launching the game ball, the first start port detection sensor 6a recognizes that the game ball has been detected (for example, a fraudulent act or radio wave to be detected by the detection sensor with a string attached to the game ball) Even if an illegal act that misdetects that the detection sensor has detected is performed, it is possible to accurately determine the abnormal winning and perform the first start opening second abnormal winning notification effect.
In addition, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice of “first start opening second abnormal winning” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop is noisy. Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the first start opening second abnormal winning, and cheating can be prevented.

  The start condition of the second start opening first abnormal winning notification effect is that when the game ball is determined to be unlaunched, that is, when the out ball has not been detected for 10 seconds or longer, the second start opening 7 is won. In this case, the out ball is not detected for 2 seconds after the detection of, and the end condition is 30 seconds from the start of the second start opening first abnormal winning notification effect. In addition, as shown in FIG. 109 (c), the content of the second start opening first abnormal winning notification effect is 30 images G60 “second start opening first abnormal winning” in the display area 140 of the image display device 14. In addition to displaying for a second, the voice output device 15 outputs the voice “second start opening first abnormal prize” for 30 seconds at the maximum volume that the gaming machine Y can set.

As described above, when the out ball is not detected for 10 seconds or more, if the out ball is not detected for 2 seconds after the winning to the second starting port 7 is detected, it is determined as the second starting port first abnormal winning. Since the detection of the out ball is not detected unless the game ball is actually won, it is assumed that the game ball is detected by the second starting port detection sensor 7a without actually firing the game ball. Even if an illegal act to be recognized (for example, an illegal act in which a string is attached to a game ball to be detected by a detection sensor or an illegal act in which a detection signal is detected by irradiating a radio wave), an abnormal winning is accurately determined. And the second start opening first abnormal winning notification effect can be performed.
In addition, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice “second start opening first abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop is noisy. Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the second start opening first abnormal winning, and cheating can be prevented.

  The starting condition of the second start opening second abnormal winning notification effect is that when 100 game balls are launched, that is, when 100 out balls are detected, the second start opening 7 exceeds the specified ball. Is the winning, and the end condition is 30 seconds from the start of the second start opening second abnormal winning notification effect. In addition, as shown in FIG. 109 (d), the content of the second start opening second abnormal winning notification effect is 30 images G61 “second start opening second abnormal winning” in the display area 140 of the image display device 14. In addition to displaying for a second, the voice output device 15 outputs the voice “second start opening second abnormal prize” for 30 seconds at the maximum volume that the gaming machine Y can set.

As described above, when 100 out balls are detected and a game ball exceeding the prescribed ball is won in the second start port 7, it is determined as the second start port second abnormal winning, and the player determines An illegal act that causes the player to recognize that the second starting port detection sensor 7a has detected the game ball while launching the game ball (for example, an illegal act that causes the detection sensor to detect a game ball with a string or the like) Even if a fraudulent act that irradiates a radio wave and misdetects that the detection sensor has detected is performed, the abnormal winning can be accurately determined, and the second start opening second abnormal winning notification effect can be performed.
Further, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice “second start opening second abnormal prize” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop is noisy. Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the second start opening second abnormal winning, and cheating can be prevented.

  The start condition of the second start opening third abnormal winning notification effect is to detect three winning balls to the second start opening 7 every 60 seconds outside the second start opening valid period. 2 It has been 30 seconds since the start of the third start prize notification effect. In addition, as shown in FIG. 109 (e), the content of the second start opening third abnormal winning notification effect is 30 in image G 62 “second start opening third abnormal winning” in the display area 140 of the image display device 14. In addition to displaying for a second, the voice output device 15 outputs the voice “second start opening third abnormal prize” for 30 seconds at the maximum volume that the gaming machine Y can set.

As described above, if 3 balls are detected in the second start port 7 every 60 seconds outside the second start port effective period, it is determined as the second start port third abnormal win, and the player determines that 2 Even if an illegal act of illegally opening the second start port 7 and winning the game ball at the second start port 7 is performed outside the valid period of the start port, an abnormal winning is accurately determined and the second start The mouth third abnormal winning notification effect can be performed.
In addition, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice of “second start opening third abnormal winning” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop is noisy. Even in such a noisy environment, the store clerk can be made aware of the occurrence of the second start opening and third abnormal winning, and cheating can be prevented.

  The start condition of the magnetic detection abnormality notification effect is to detect magnetism by the magnetic detection sensors 81a to 84a when it is determined that the game ball is being launched, that is, when the out ball is detected, and the end condition Is the lapse of 30 seconds from the start of the magnetic detection abnormality notification effect. In addition, the content of the magnetic detection abnormality notification effect is displayed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 by displaying the image G63 “magnetic detection abnormality” for 30 seconds and outputting the sound “magnetic detection abnormality” from the audio output device 15 to the gaming machine. Y is the content that is output for 30 seconds at the maximum volume that can be set (see FIGS. 110B-1 and 110C).

  Here, the magnetic detection abnormality notification effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 110A is a diagram illustrating a state in which the variable display of the special effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is performed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14.

  When magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensors 81a to 84a, it is determined that the game ball is being launched, that is, when an out ball is detected, as shown in FIG. 110 (b-1), an image is displayed. In the display area 140 of the display device 14, the image G63 “Magnetic detection abnormality” is displayed for 30 seconds, and the voice “Magnetic detection abnormality” is output from the audio output device 15 at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y for 30 seconds. An output magnetic detection abnormality notification effect is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not been fired, that is, if the out ball has not been detected for 10 seconds or longer, even if magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensors 81a to 84a, FIG. 110 (b-2) As shown in FIG. 4, the magnetic detection abnormality notification effect is not performed. That is, when the game ball is not fired, even if magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensors 81a to 84a, the magnetic detection abnormality notification effect is regulated.

In this way, if a game ball is being fired when magnetism is detected, the trend of the game ball is changed by bringing the magnet closer to the gaming machine Y, and each winning opening (first start port 6, second Since there is a high possibility that fraudulent attempts to win the start opening 7, the first big winning opening 8, the second big winning opening 9, and the general winning opening 12) are made, a magnetic detection abnormality is immediately notified. Produce. On the other hand, if the game ball is not fired, there is a low possibility that fraud is being performed, and there is a possibility that the magnetic detection sensors 81a to 84a are erroneously detected. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a magnetic detection abnormality notification effect from being performed in the case of erroneous detection of the magnetic detection sensors 81a to 84a, and to perform an appropriate magnetic detection abnormality notification effect.
In addition, by causing the voice output device 15 to output the voice “magnetic detection abnormality” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop has a high noise level, but such a noise level is high. Even in the environment, the store clerk can be made aware that a magnetic detection abnormality has occurred, and cheating can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball is not being fired, the magnetic detection abnormality notification effect is restricted so as not to be performed. However, the restriction method is not limited to this, and a part of the restriction may be restricted. . For example, when magnetism is detected when a game ball is not being fired, no sound is output and the image G63 “abnormal magnetic detection” is displayed small in the display area 140 of the image display device 14. Also good.

  Next, the start condition of the vibration detection abnormality notification effect is to detect vibration by the vibration detection sensor 85a when it is determined that the game ball is being launched, that is, when an out ball is detected, and the end. The condition is that 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the vibration detection abnormality notification effect. The vibration detection abnormality notification effect is displayed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 by displaying the image G64 “vibration detection abnormality” for 30 seconds and outputting the sound “vibration detection abnormality” from the audio output device 15 to the gaming machine. Y is the content that is output for 30 seconds at the maximum volume that can be set (see FIG. 111 (b-1)).

  Here, the vibration detection abnormality notification effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable display of special effect symbols TZ <b> 1 to TZ <b> 3 is performed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14.

  When vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor 85a, it is determined that the game ball is being launched, that is, when an out ball is detected, as shown in FIG. 111 (b-1), the image display device In the display area 140, the image G64 “vibration detection abnormality” is displayed for 30 seconds, and the sound “vibration detection abnormality” is output from the audio output device 15 at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y for 30 seconds. The vibration detection abnormality notification effect is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not been fired, that is, if the out ball has not been detected for 10 seconds or longer, even if vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor 85a, it is shown in FIG. 111 (b-2). As described above, the vibration detection abnormality notification effect is not performed. That is, when the game ball is not yet launched, even if vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor 85a, the vibration detection abnormality notification effect is restricted.

In this way, if a game ball is being fired when vibration is detected, the game machine Y may be shaken or struck to change the trend of the game ball or the player may be distracted. Since there is a high possibility that an illegal act such as hitting Y is performed, a vibration detection abnormality notification effect is performed. On the other hand, if the game ball is not fired, there is a low possibility that fraud is being performed, and there is a possibility that it is a false detection of the vibration detection sensor 85a, so the vibration detection abnormality notification effect is not performed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a vibration detection abnormality notification effect from being performed in the case of erroneous detection of the vibration detection sensor 85a, and to perform an appropriate vibration detection abnormality notification effect.
In addition, by causing the audio output device 15 to output a sound of “vibration detection abnormality” at the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y, generally, a game shop has a high noise level, but such a noise level is high. Even in the environment, the store clerk can be made aware that a vibration detection abnormality has occurred, and cheating can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, when the game ball is not being fired, the vibration detection abnormality notification effect is restricted so as not to be performed. However, the restriction method is not limited to this, and a part of the restriction may be restricted. . For example, when vibration is detected when a game ball is not being fired, no sound is output, and the image G64 “vibration detection abnormality” is displayed small in the display area 140 of the image display device 14. Also good.

  Next, the start condition of the door opening abnormality notification effect is that the door opening detection sensor 87a detects that the glass door Y2 is opened from the game board mounting frame Y1, and the end condition is the door opening detection sensor. 5 seconds have elapsed since it was detected by 87a that the glass door Y2 was closed. In addition, the content of the door opening abnormality notification effect is that the image “door opening abnormality” is displayed for 30 seconds in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 and the sound “Please close the door” is output from the sound output device 15. The content is output for 30 seconds at the maximum volume that can be set by the machine Y (not shown).

  The start condition of the dish full tank abnormality notification effect (dish full tank abnormality first notification effect, dish full tank abnormality second notification effect) is that the full tray detection sensor 86a detects that the tray 61 is full. The end condition is that the dish full tank detection sensor 86a is not detected. Further, the content of the dish full tank abnormality notification effect is as follows. At the start of the notification effect execution, the image G65 “dish full tank abnormality” is displayed for 30 seconds in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 and the voice “ “Please pull out the ball” is the content (first full notification of dish full tank abnormality) that is output for 30 seconds at the currently set volume in the gaming machine Y (see FIG. 112 (b-1)). When it is determined that the game ball has not been fired since the start of the dish full tank abnormality first notification effect, that is, when the out ball has not been detected for 10 seconds or longer after the dish full tank abnormality first notification effect has been started. In the display area 140 of the image display device 14, the image G65 “dish full tank abnormality” is displayed for 30 seconds (dish full tank second notification effect) (see FIG. 112 (b-2)). Further, when it is determined that the game ball has been fired during the dish full tank abnormality second notification effect, the dish full tank abnormality second notification effect during the notification effect is switched to the dish full tank abnormality first notification effect.

Unlike the above-described various abnormal winning notification effects, magnetic detection abnormality notification effects, vibration detection abnormality notification effects, and door opening abnormality notification effects, the maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y is not a dish full tank abnormality. The notification effect is not a notification of fraud, but a notification that the tray 61 is full of game balls, so it is only necessary to be able to notice the player, so it is not the maximum volume that the gaming machine Y can set. May be.
The maximum volume that can be set by the gaming machine Y may be used.

  Here, the dish full tank abnormality notification effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 (a) is a diagram illustrating a state in which a jackpot game is being played in the display area 140 of the image display device 14.

  When the full tray detection sensor 86a detects that the lower tray 61 is full, an image G65 “abnormal dish full” is displayed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. 112 (b-1). Is displayed until the dish full tank detection sensor 86a is not detected, and a voice “please remove the ball” is output from the audio output device 15 until the dish full tank detection sensor 86a is not detected. Tan abnormality first notification effect (strong notification) is performed.

If the out ball is not detected for 10 seconds after the dish full tank abnormality first notification effect is performed and it is determined that the game ball is not being fired, as shown in FIG. 112 (b-2), an image is displayed. In the display area 140 of the device 14, the image G65 “abnormal dish full” is displayed until the pan full detection sensor 86a is not detected, but the voice “please remove the ball” is output from the audio output device 15. A dish full tank abnormality second notification effect (weak notification) that is not performed is performed.
That is, when the full tray detection sensor 86a detects that the lower tray 61 is full, first, a full plate abnormality first notification effect is performed regardless of whether or not the game ball is being fired. When it is determined that the dish full tank abnormality first notification effect is restricted, a dish full tank abnormality second notification effect is controlled. When it is determined that the game ball is being launched during the dish full tank abnormality second notification effect, the dish full tank abnormality first notification effect shown in FIG. 112 (b-1) is performed again.

  Then, when the dish full tank detection sensor 86a is not detected, the dish full tank abnormality first notification effect and the dish full tank abnormality second notification effect are finished as shown in FIG. 112 (c).

  Thus, for example, when a full tank of the lower tray 61 is detected during a big hit, no more game balls can be paid out, so a dish full tank abnormality that provides image display and audio notification A first notification effect is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball is not being fired during the first full notification of the dish full tank abnormality, the game ball to be paid out to the lower tray 61 does not increase any more, so the dish full that provides notification only by the image. Tan abnormality second notification effect is performed. For this reason, an appropriate dish full tank abnormality notification effect can be performed without notifying the player who has noticed the dish full tank abnormality and has stopped firing the game ball more than necessary.

  In the present embodiment, when full of the lower tray 61 is detected, the first full tank first abnormality notification effect is performed regardless of whether or not the game ball is being fired. When it is determined that the dish is being fired, the dish full tank abnormality second notification that restricts a part of the dish full tank first abnormality notification effect is performed, but the restriction method is not limited thereto. For example, when a full tank is detected in the lower tray 61 when a game ball is not being fired, the second dish full tank abnormality notification may be immediately performed.

  Next, the start condition of the right-handed emphasis notification effect is that a left-handed hit is detected during a right-handed gaming state (during a big hit gaming state or a short-time gaming state), that is, a winning to the first winning gate 10 is detected. The end condition is to detect right-handed, that is, to detect winning in the second winning gate 11. Further, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the content of the right-handed emphasis notification effect is displayed on the display area 140 of the image display device 14 for the image G26 “please right-hand” for 30 seconds, and the voice output device. 15 is a content in which the voice “Please make a right stroke” is output for 30 seconds at the volume currently set in the gaming machine Y.

  Here, the right-handed emphasis notification effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 (a) is a diagram showing a state where a big hit game is being played in the display area 140 of the image display device 14, and the game ball directed toward the first big winning opening 8 or the second big winning opening 9 is shown. An image G22 instructing the firing is displayed in a predetermined area of the display area 140.

  If a left-hand hit is detected during the jackpot game that should be hit right, that is, if it is detected that a game ball has won the first winning gate 10 during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 113 (b). In the display area 140 of the image display device 14, the image G26 “Please make a right strike!” Is displayed until a right strike is detected, that is, until it is detected that a game ball has been won at the second winning gate 11. At the same time, the voice “Please make a right strike” is output from the audio output device 15, and a right strike emphasis notification effect is output until it is detected that a right strike is detected, that is, a game ball is won at the second winning gate 11. Is called.

  Then, when a right strike is detected, that is, when it is detected that a game ball has won the second winning gate 11, the right strike highlight notification effect is ended as shown in FIG. 113 (c).

  In this way, by performing this right-handed emphasis notification effect, an opportunity to win a large number of prize balls by entering the game balls into the first big prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9 during the long hitting game. Since it is possible to prevent the player from losing, the disadvantage that the player suffers can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, if left-handed is detected during the game state in which the player should make a right-hand hit, that is, if it is detected that a game ball has won the first winning gate 10, whether the game ball is being fired or not is determined. Regardless, the right-handed emphasis notification effect was performed, but when the game ball is not fired, the right-handed emphasis notification effect may not be performed, or when the game ball is not fired. In the display area 140 of the image display device 14, the audio output from the audio output device 15 is not performed, and the image G26 “Please make a right-handed!” Is a notification effect that regulates a part of the right-handed highlight notification effect to be displayed. You can go.

  Next, the start condition of the left-handed notifying effect (left-handed first notifying effect, left-handed second notifying effect) is to detect right-handed in the left-handed gaming state (in the non-short-time gaming state), that is, the second winning prize The winning condition is to detect the winning to the gate 11, and the end condition is to detect the left-handed, that is, to detect the winning to the first winning gate 10. Further, the content of the left-handed notification effect is displayed for 30 seconds in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 for 30 seconds when the image G27 “left-handed” image G28 “please return the handle!” Is displayed. This is the content (left-handed first notification effect) that is output from the audio output device 15 for 30 seconds at the volume currently set in the gaming machine Y (see FIG. 114 (b-1)). ). If it is determined that the game ball has not been fired since the left-handed first notification effect is started, that is, if the out-ball has not been detected for 10 seconds or longer after the left-handed first notification effect is started, the image display device In the display area 140 of FIG. 14, the image G27 “left-handed” image G28 “please return the handle !!” is displayed for 30 seconds (left-handed second notification effect) (see FIG. 114 (b-2)). . Also, when it is determined that the game ball has been fired during the left-handed second notification effect, the left-handed second notification effect during the notification effect is switched to the left-handed first notification effect.

  Here, the left-handed notification effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 114A is a diagram showing a state in which the variable display of the special effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the normal gaming state (effect mode A) is performed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14.

  If a right-hand hit is detected during the normal game state to be left-handed, that is, if it is detected that a game ball has won the second winning gate during the normal game state, it is shown in FIG. 114 (b-1). Thus, in the display area 140 of the image display device 14, the image G27 “left-handed” and the image G28 “please return the handle!” Detected left-handed, that is, a game ball won the first winning gate. Is displayed until it is detected, and the sound “please return the handle” is output from the audio output device 15 until left-handed is detected, that is, until it is detected that the game ball has won the first winning gate. A left-handed first notification effect is performed.

If it is determined that the out ball is not detected for 10 seconds after the left-handed first notification effect is performed and the game ball is not being fired, as shown in FIG. 114 (b-2), the image display device 14 In the display area 140, the image G27 “left-handed” and the image G28 “please return the handle!” Are displayed until left-handed is detected, that is, until it is detected that the game ball has won the first winning gate. However, a left-handed second notification effect in which the voice “please return the handle” is not output from the audio output device 15 is performed.
That is, when a right strike is detected during a normal game state that should be left-handed, first, a left-handed first notification effect is performed regardless of whether or not a game ball is being fired. Is determined, a left-handed second notification effect in which a part of the left-handed first notification effect is restricted is performed. When it is determined that the game ball is being launched during the left-handed second notification effect, the left-handed first notification effect shown in FIG. 114 (b-1) is performed again.

  When left-handed is detected, that is, when it is detected that a game ball has won the first winning gate, the left-handed first notification effect and the left-handed second notification effect are finished as shown in FIG. 114 (c). To do.

  In this way, if a game ball is fired when a right strike is detected in the normal gaming state, the player is not aware that the player should make a left strike, and is likely to be making a right strike. In addition, a left-handed first notification effect that is notified by voice output is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball is not being fired during the left-handed first notification effect, there is a possibility that the second winning gate detection sensor 11a is erroneously detected. The second notification effect is performed. By doing so, an appropriate left-handed notification effect (left-handed first notification effect, left-handed second notification effect) is made without informing the player who has not fired the game ball more than necessary. It can be performed.

  In the present embodiment, when a right strike is detected in the normal gaming state, first, a left strike first notification effect is performed regardless of whether or not a game ball is being fired, and then the game ball has not been fired. If it is determined to be in the middle, the left-handed second notification effect in which part of the left-handed first notification effect is restricted is performed, but the restriction method is not limited to this. For example, if a right-handed strike is detected when a game ball is not being fired during the normal gaming state, the left-handed notification effect (left-handed first notification effect and left-handed second notification effect) is not performed. Also good.

  Next, the start condition of the card return notification effect is a predetermined timing during the ending effect (for example, 3 seconds before the end of the ending effect), and the end condition is the passage of 3 seconds from the start of the card return notification effect. . The contents of the card return notification effect are contents for displaying the image “Please take the card” for 3 seconds in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 (not shown).

In this way, the notification effect includes the above-described variation display firing stop notification effect, specific round launch instruction effect, long open release instruction effect, various abnormal winning notification effects, magnetic detection abnormality notification effect, vibration detection abnormality notification effect, Announcement effect to notify the presence or absence of out-ball detection, such as dish full tank abnormality notification effect and left-handed notification effect, power-on notification effect, power recovery notification effect, door opening abnormality notification effect, right There are notification effects for notification regardless of whether or not an out-ball is detected, such as a hit emphasis notification effect and a card return notification effect. In this way, by giving notification regardless of whether or not an out-ball is detected, a notification effect with high importance can be reliably performed.
In addition, even in the notification related to the launch of the game ball (left-handed notification effect, right-handed-highlighted notification effect), the left-handed notification effect that notifies whether or not the out-ball is detected and the right that is notified regardless of whether or not the out-ball is detected There is a hit emphasis notification effect.

  Next, the special privilege granting mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. The special privilege grant mode is a game mode (special period) in which privilege points can be acquired on condition that the privilege grant mode is set. In the present embodiment, when the out ball is generated during the short hit game or the small hit game and the out determination value (“10” in this embodiment) is generated during the AT short release, after the short hit game or the small hit game In the effect mode D set after the winning game, the special privilege granting mode is set.

  In the special privilege granting mode, when a special effect design that is set in advance is stopped, the special benefit design that has been stopped, the special privilege granting mode level, and the second outball number are selected from among a plurality of privilege points. One is selected and given.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 115, when a special effect design stop display including the decorative design “3” (hereinafter referred to as “stop display of the first special effect design”) is performed, 50 pt, 100 pt, and A privilege point given from 300 pt is selected. Further, when a special effect design stop display including the decorative design “2” and the decorative design “9” (hereinafter referred to as “stop display of the second special effect design”) is performed, from among 100 pt, 300 pt, and 500 pt. A privilege point to be given is selected. In addition, when a special effect design stop display (hereinafter referred to as “third special effect design stop display”) including the decorative design “1”, the decorative design “6”, and the decorative design “4” is performed, 300 pt, A privilege point given from 500 pt and 1000 pt is selected. In addition, for any special effect symbol stop display, when one of a plurality of privilege points is selected, the privilege point increases as the level of the special privilege grant mode and the determination range of the second out ball counter increase. Is easily given.

  Here, the alerting | reporting of provision of privilege points is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 115 (a), when the special effect symbol stop display is performed after the special effect symbol fluctuating display is performed, the special effect symbol stop display is as shown in FIG. 115 (b). In addition, if it is neither the stop display of the first special effect symbol, the stop display of the second special effect symbol, or the stop display of the third special effect symbol, the privilege point is not granted, and the bonus point is notified. I will not.

  115 (c), 116 (a), and 116 (c), after the special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, FIGS. 115 (d), 116 (b), and 116 (d) are displayed. ) If the stop display of the first special effect symbol, the stop display of the second special effect symbol, or the stop display of the third special effect symbol is performed, the privilege point determined by the privilege point determination is given. As a notification of the grant of privilege points, images G41, G42, and G43 indicating the grant of the privilege points are displayed in a predetermined area of the display area 140.

  Next, a special effect performed based on an out-ball detection designation command during the second auxiliary game will be described with reference to FIG. During the short hit game or the small hit game, when the out ball is generated during the AT short release out determination value (“10” in the present embodiment), the specific area of the specific image is displayed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14. While cut-in is performed, a special sound effect is output from the audio output device 15, and the decorative members 200 </ b> A to 203 </ b> A of the effect accessory devices 200 to 203 operate in a special manner.

  In addition, the effect aspect of a special effect is not specifically limited, It can set suitably. In addition, it is possible to set the specific image, special sound effect, and special mode related to the special effect to be performed only in the special effect. It is also possible to set so that it is most likely to appear in a special performance. In addition, the effect mode of the special effect may be the same or different between the short win game and the small hit game. When they are different, they appear in any game, but the appearance probability (so-called jackpot expectation) can be made different depending on the production mode.

  Next, a demonstration effect, a power saving mode setting, and a re-seat effect performed during the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), a special effect design stop display is performed, and winning of game balls at the start opening (first start opening 6, second start opening 7) and detection of out balls are performed. If the demonstration production standby time elapses without being performed, the demonstration production is executed based on the first out-ball number. For example, when the first out ball number is less than 50000, the demonstration effect image in the normal mode is displayed in the display area 140 as shown in FIG. 118 (b-1). On the other hand, when the first out ball number is 30000 or more, a demonstration effect image of a special mode is displayed in the display area 140 as shown in FIG. 118 (b-2). On the other hand, if a game ball wins the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 before the demonstration effect standby time elapses, a special area is displayed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. Variation display of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is performed. Since the demonstration effect standby time is reset every time an out ball is detected (step S1348-17), if an out ball is detected before the demonstration effect standby time elapses, the demonstration effect is not performed. Be regulated.

  In this way, as long as the game ball is fired even if the special effect design stop display is performed and it can not be awarded to any start opening, the demonstration effect will not be performed, so the game ball The demonstration production is no longer performed despite the fact that it is firing, and the troublesomeness of the demonstration production (customer waiting production) can be eliminated.

  Then, the game ball wins at the start opening (the first start opening 6 and the second start opening 7) until the demonstration confirmation launch time (300 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the demonstration effect is started. When the out ball is not detected, an image indicating the model name of the gaming machine Y is displayed in the display area 140 as shown in FIG. 118 (c), and the luminance is reduced to 1/10 of the normal level. The power saving mode is set so that the volume is muted. On the other hand, when an out ball is detected before the demonstration confirmation launch time elapses, the special effect symbol immediately before the demonstration effect image is displayed is displayed as shown in FIG. 118 (d). The demonstration production is terminated, and the execution of the demonstration production and the power saving mode are restricted. In addition, when a game ball wins the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 before the demonstration confirmation launch time elapses, as shown in FIG. 118 (e), in the display area 140 of the image display device 14. The special effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner.

In this way, even if the demonstration effect is being performed, if the out ball is detected, that is, if the game ball is fired, the demonstration effect will end, so the game ball is being fired. Regardless, the demonstration production is not performed, and the troublesomeness of the demonstration production (waiting for the customer) can be eliminated.
In addition, when the demonstration performance ends, the power saving mode is not set, so that the power saving mode is not set even though the game ball is being fired, and the power saving mode (waiting for the customer) is bothered. Can be eliminated.

  When the game machine Y is set to the power saving mode and the out-ball is detected, as shown in FIG. 118 (d), the power saving mode is canceled, and the brightness and volume are returned to normal, and the game is restarted. The seating effect is executed, and the special effect symbol immediately before the demonstration effect image is displayed is stopped. Re-seating effect means that the power saving mode is set, so it can be assumed that the player has not played a game (launching a game ball) for a long time and is likely to have left the seat. It is thought that the occurrence of the occurrence of the event is a re-seat and the game has been resumed. In the present embodiment, when the power saving mode is canceled, the voice output device 15 emits a voice “Return”. In addition, when the gaming machine Y is set in the power saving mode and a game ball wins the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7, the power saving mode is canceled as shown in FIG. 118 (e). The brightness and volume are returned to normal, and the special effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 without performing a re-seat effect.

  Thus, even when the power saving mode is set, when the out ball is detected, that is, when the game ball is being fired, the power saving mode is canceled, so the game ball is being fired. Nevertheless, the power saving mode is not set, and the troublesomeness of the power saving mode (customer waiting effect) can be eliminated.

  Each time the out sphere detection sensor 52 outputs an out sphere detection signal to the main control board 101 and the main CPU 101a inputs the out sphere detection signal, the counter value of the out sphere counter provided in the main RAM 101c is incremented by “1”. Based on the counter value of the out ball counter, the data creation process in step S600 and the output control process in step S700 are performed, and information about the out ball (out information) indicating that ten out balls have been generated is used as an external signal. By outputting to the game information output terminal board 108 connected to the display device 700 or the hall computer, the out information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine Y such as the game information display device 700 or the hall computer. Based on this out information, the amusement store can grasp the operating status of the gaming machine and use it for managing the amusement store. In addition, the out information can be used to determine the operating status of the gaming machine and to determine the selection of the vehicle.

  Further, the main control board 101 counts the number of times the out ball detection signal is input, and uses the out ball detection display device 28 provided in the game board 2 every time the predetermined number (10 times in the present embodiment) is counted. , It is informed that the out ball has been detected a predetermined number of times (10 times). In this way, it is possible to confirm that the processing related to the out sphere in the main control board 101 is normally performed by informing using the out sphere detection display device 28. In addition, the notification method of an out ball | bowl detection is not limited, It can set suitably. For example, the out sphere detection display device may be turned on every time an out sphere is detected by the out sphere detection sensor 52, or the number of detected out spheres may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 14. Anyway.

  In addition, the main control board 101 outputs an out-ball detection designation command corresponding to the number of game balls to be emitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 has a specific condition based on the input out-ball detection designation command. Since special variation effects, special effects, special privilege granting modes, special demonstration effects, and the like are executed when established, the interest of the game can be improved irrespective of the player's game ball launching technique.

  In addition, based on the game control state by the main control board 101 (special symbol variation display, auxiliary game, jackpot game, and other game situations), the second outball number range based on the outball detection, and the date / time information timed by the RTC 102d. Using a time range, a specific special game effect pattern is determined and a special game effect corresponding to the specific special game effect pattern is performed, so that variations of the special game effect increase and a reduction in the effect of the special game effect is suppressed. Can do.

  In addition, when a predetermined number of out balls are detected during a short hit game or a small hit game in the bonus grant mode, a special bonus grant mode is set, and the special symbol lottery is set to “Lose”, and a special figure of reachless lose When it is determined as a variation pattern, bonus points are earned. In other words, based on the setting status of the privilege grant mode, the game control state (game information from the main control substrate 101) by the main control board 101, and the detection of the out ball, a privilege point that is a game value different from the prize ball is granted. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

  Also, the special privilege grant mode level is changed based on the date and time information timed by the RTC 102d, and the expected value of the privilege points to be granted based on the special privilege grant mode level and the second out ball number generated during the privilege grant mode. However, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, even if a special effect design stop display is performed and no start opening can be awarded, an out ball is detected, that is, if a game ball is being fired, Since it is not performed, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance that the demonstration performance is performed even though the game ball is being fired. Further, when an out ball is detected during the demonstration production, that is, when a game ball is fired, the demonstration production is terminated and a special production symbol stop display immediately before the demonstration production image is displayed is performed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of the demonstration production (customer waiting production) performed while the game ball is being fired.

  In addition, if the out ball does not occur during the demonstration production after the demonstration production has started, the power saving mode is entered. If an out ball occurs during the power saving mode, the player judges that the player has re-seatd and cancels the power saving mode. At the same time, since the re-seat effect is performed to entertain the re-seatd player, the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

  In addition, even if it is not possible to win any start opening during the demonstration production, if the out ball is detected, that is, if the game ball is being fired, the demonstration production is ended and the demonstration production image is displayed. Since the special effect design stop display just before is displayed, it will not be set in power saving mode, so it will be set in power saving mode even though game balls are being fired Annoyance can be eliminated. Further, when an out ball is detected during the power saving mode, that is, when a game ball is fired, the power saving mode is canceled, so the power saving mode is set even though the game ball is being fired. This eliminates the inconvenience of the power saving mode (waiting for customers).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game privilege can be given by the stop display of the normal privilege effect symbol of the roulette effect in the privilege grant mode, but also in the special effect symbol display in the privilege grant mode or only in the special effect symbol display A gaming privilege can also be granted. In this case, in order to suppress a reduction in the effect of the effect on a player who is not interested in the provision of the game privilege, the game privilege may not be provided in the special effect symbol display in the non-privilege grant mode. it can.

  Here, an example in which a game privilege is given in a special effect symbol display will be described with reference to FIGS. For example, the special effect design is composed of three rows of special decoration symbols (a left special decoration symbol TZ1 arranged on the left side, a middle special decoration symbol TZ2 arranged in the center, and a right special decoration symbol TZ3 arranged on the right side). And In this case, as shown in FIG. 119 (a), the arrangement of the special decoration pattern when the game privilege is not given in the non-privilege grant mode or the privilege grant mode, and the special decoration pattern when the game privilege is given in the privilege grant mode. The arrangement can be as shown in FIG.

  “10 pt”, “30 pt”, and “50 pt” in FIG. 119 (b) constitute a special decorative design (privilege special decorative design) representing the provision of a gaming privilege. The special decoration design in the non-privilege grant mode does not include the special bonus design, and the special special design in the case of giving the game privilege in the privilege grant mode includes the special bonus design. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 120, in the variable display of the special effect symbol when the game privilege is granted in the privilege grant mode, the privilege special decoration symbol appears intermittently.

  Then, in the special effect design stop display, as shown in FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (g), the special special decoration designs in various modes are stopped and displayed. As with the roulette effect, the number of the bonus special decoration symbol that is stopped and displayed is the bonus point given to the player. FIG. 121 (h) is an example of a special decorative symbol stop display indicating winning of a promising jackpot, FIG. 121 (i) is an example of a special decorative symbol stop display indicating a normal jackpot winning, and FIG. 121 (j) is an example of FIG. It is an example of the stop display of the special decoration symbol showing loss.

  The conditions for executing the special special decoration symbol stop display are set as appropriate. However, the privilege grant mode is a sufficient condition for the execution of the stop display of the privilege special decoration symbol. For example, if the privilege granting mode execution flag is set in a predetermined period (for example, a period during which 10 special effect symbols are displayed) after the end of the short-time gaming state based on the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot, the special effect symbol is stopped. In the display pattern determination process (step S1308), it is determined whether or not to give a game privilege based on a special effect designating command, and if it is determined to give a game privilege, the special decorative design shown in FIG. 121 (b) is obtained. The special effect design is used to change the display, and the special special decoration design is stopped. In the privilege grant mode, even when no game privilege is granted, it is possible to perform a variable display of the special effect symbol using the special decoration symbol shown in FIG. 121 (b).

  In addition, the provision of the game privilege in the privilege grant mode can be performed only by the roulette effect, or can be performed only by the special effect symbol display. Furthermore, it is possible to give a game privilege in the privilege grant mode by either a roulette effect or a special effect symbol display.

  In the present embodiment, the out sphere detection sensor 52 is connected only to the main control board 101 (see FIG. 3), and an out sphere detection signal is output from the out sphere detection sensor 52 to the main control board 101 to detect out sphere detection. The main control board 101 that has input the signal outputs an out sphere detection designation command to the effect control board 102, but the out sphere detection sensor 52 is connected to the main control board 101 and the effect control board 102 and detects the same out sphere. The signal may be directly output from the out-sphere detection sensor 52 to either the main control board 101 or the effect control board 102.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the out sphere detection display device 28 is turned on and the out information is output to the outside is the same timing at which ten out spheres are detected, but the out sphere detection display device The timing at which the 28 lighting display and the out information are output to the outside is not limited to the same timing. For example, the out-ball detection display device 28 may be turned on every time one out-sphere is detected, and the out information may be output to the outside every time ten out-balls are detected. .

  In this embodiment, various effects are performed based on the out sphere detection designation command output from the main control board 101, such as a special effect, a special privilege granting mode, and a special demonstration effect. The type of effect performed based on the command is not limited to the present embodiment.

  For example, a sound effect or sound may be output from the sound output device 15 each time an out sphere is detected, or the effect lighting device 16 may be turned on each time an out sphere is detected. In addition, when a predetermined number of out balls are counted during the variation effect, the effect devices (the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, and the effect accessory devices 200 to 203) are used. In addition, an effect of notifying the degree of expectation for the jackpot winning of the variation effect (the expectation degree of jackpot) may be performed. In this way, by performing the effect of notifying the jackpot expectation level of the variation effect based on the out ball, the player can play the game in order to know the jackpot expectation level even if the number of special figure holds reaches the upper limit. The ball will continue to fire. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game ball from being released and to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  In addition, every time 100 out balls are counted, an out sphere detection designation command is transmitted from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102. For example, a notice effect for the change effect may be performed. As described above, the notice effect is performed when the number of out balls is counted as 100, so that the notice effect can be performed at various timings by shifting the generation timing of the notice effect.

  In addition, if there is an out ball in a specific period based on the date and time information by the RTC 102d, a premium special effect that only occurs during the specific period or hardly appears during a game is performed. If there is no out ball in the specific period, a special effect is provided. You can't do it.

  Also, a high expectation effect with a high expectation level for the big win and a low expectation effect with a low expectation value for the big win are provided, and there is a predetermined number of out balls in a specific period based on the date and time information by the RTC 102d. The high expectation level effect may be performed after the end of the specific period, and the low expectation level effect may not be performed after the end of the specific period unless there is a predetermined number of out balls in the specific period.

  Furthermore, the number of out balls at a specific time (for example, every 5 minutes every two hours) on a specific day (for example, every Friday or a day with “7” every month) regardless of whether or not the privilege grant mode is set. And develops or grows a predetermined character image according to the increase in the counted value (for example, increases the amount of ornaments to be worn), and the developed character image is used as a so-called SPSP reach or special game. It can also be used in production. In this case, if the privilege grant mode is set, in the privilege grant mode canceling process, the developed or grown character image data can be included in the QR code so that the player can own it.

  The first out ball counter is cleared when the presentation control board 102 is turned off, but is cleared when the demonstration presentation starts or when the power saving mode is set. You can also. In addition to the first out ball counter, an out ball counter that is cleared when the demonstration effect is started or when the power saving mode is set may be provided in the sub RAM 102c.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game ball launch determination time, the dish full tank abnormality first notification launch confirmation time, the dish full tank abnormality second alert launch confirmation time, the left-handed first alert launch confirmation time, a specific round Out sphere by main control board 101 and production control board 102, such as medium launch confirmation time, long release release confirmation time, demonstration production launch confirmation time, AT short release out decision value, and specific reach out decision value The value used for the processing related to can be set as appropriate. For example, the out-reach determination value during specific reach is set to “10”, but is not limited thereto, and can be appropriately set to “1”.

  In the present embodiment, the general prize opening first and second abnormal prizes, the first grand prize opening first to third abnormal prizes, the second big prize opening first to third abnormal prizes, and the first start opening first and second. Although the abnormal winning and the second start opening first to third abnormal winning are determined and the notification effect is performed, the abnormal winning determining method is not limited to these. For example, it is determined whether or not a game ball has not been fired, that is, whether or not an out ball has not been detected for 10 seconds or longer. To a winning opening (general winning opening, first large winning opening, second large winning opening, first starting opening, second starting opening) per predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) when the game ball is not fired. The number of game balls won may be counted, and if the number of wins is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more, it may be determined that the prize is abnormal.

  In the present embodiment, the out ball detection sensor 52 includes the first start port 6, the second start port 7, the first grand prize port 8, the second big prize port 9, the general prize port 12, and the out port. Although the game ball that entered the ball 13 and discharged to the outside of the game area 2A has been detected, it may be the out ball detection sensor 52 that detects only the game ball that has entered the out port 13. As a method for determining an abnormal winning in such a case, for example, a launch ball detection sensor that detects a game ball launched from a game ball launcher is provided between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C, and fired. The number of played game balls is counted, and when a predetermined ball (for example, 100 balls) is fired, the first start port 6, the second start port 7, the first grand prize port 8, the second big prize port 9, and the general prize port The total number of game balls won in 12 (hereinafter referred to as “the number of winning balls”) and the number of balls entered in the out mouth 13 (hereinafter referred to as “out number of balls”) are fired. If there are more than the predetermined balls, it can be determined that the prize is abnormal.

Note that the first starting port detection sensor 6a, the second starting port detection sensor 7a, the first large winning port detecting sensor 8a, the second large winning port detecting sensor 9a, and the general winning port detecting sensor after being detected by the firing ball detecting sensor. Since there is a time difference until it is detected by 12a and the out-ball detection sensor 52, it is desirable to set a threshold value in order to prevent erroneous determination in the determination of abnormal winning. For example, if the total number of winning balls and out balls is “5” more than the predetermined number of balls that have been fired, an abnormal winning may be determined. In addition, the notification mode may be changed step by step, and if the total number of winning balls and out balls is “5” more than the predetermined balls that have been fired, the image display device 14 If the image for notifying the abnormal winning is displayed small in the display area 140 and “10” is large, the image for notifying the abnormal winning is displayed large in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 and the audio output device 15 causes an abnormality. You may make it output the audio | voice which alert | wins a prize.
Since the notification effect can be performed according to the height at which the cheating is performed by changing the notification mode step by step in this way, an excessive abnormal winning notification effect is given to the player who is not performing the cheating. It is possible to prevent discomfort and to perform an appropriate abnormal winning notification effect.

In this embodiment, the dish full tank abnormality notification effect is the same notification effect regardless of the gaming state, but the notification effect may be changed depending on the gaming state. For example, when a full tank is detected in the jackpot game while the jackpot game is being played, the display and sound of the image G65 “dish full tank abnormality” are displayed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 regardless of the detection of the out ball. A notification effect (hereinafter referred to as “strong notification”) for outputting the voice “please remove the ball” from the output device 15 is performed. On the other hand, when the game state is other than the big hit, when full of the tray 61 is detected, if an out ball is detected, a strong notification is given. If no out ball is detected, the image display device A notification effect (hereinafter referred to as “weak notification”) in which only the display of the image G65 “abnormal dish full” is displayed in the display area 140 of 14 may be performed.
In this way, by changing the notification effect according to the gaming state, it is possible to perform an appropriate dish full tank abnormality notification effect according to the gaming situation. For example, if the game is not a big hit game, the player may be temporarily away for a break, and the full dish state may not be resolved immediately. In this case, if strong notification with voice output is performed, there is a risk of discomfort to surrounding players. However, if weak notification with no voice output is performed, discomfort to surrounding players is prevented. it can.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the full tray abnormality notification effect is detected, when the full tray 61 is detected, strong notification is first performed regardless of the detection of the out ball, and then the game ball is being launched. If there is a strong notification, and if the game ball is not yet launched, a weak notification is performed, but the notification method is not limited to this. For example, when full tank 61 is detected, first, a weak notification is made regardless of whether or not a game ball is being fired, and then a strong notification is made if an out ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time. If a sphere is not detected, weak notification may be continued.

  Further, the difference between strong notification and weak notification is not limited to whether or not a sound output is output. For example, the strong notification is a notification in which the display of the image G65 “abnormal dish full” is repeated for a display of 3 seconds and a non-display of 10 seconds, whereas a weak notification is a display of 3 seconds and a non-display of 30 seconds. It is good also as information which repeats a display. Thus, it is good also as a strong alerting | reporting and a weak alerting | reporting by the difference in the display interval (interval) of image G65 "dish full tank abnormality" instead of whether an audio | voice output is output.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball launch determination time, the dish full tank abnormality first notice launch confirmation time, the dish full tank abnormality second notice launch confirmation time, the left-handed first notice launch confirmation time, the specific round Out sphere by main control board 101 and production control board 102, such as medium launch confirmation time, long release release confirmation time, demonstration production launch confirmation time, AT short release out decision value, and specific reach out decision value Although one type of value used for the processing related to the above is set, a plurality of types can be set stepwise. In this case, it is possible to change the effect mode of the production corresponding to the firing confirmation time and the judgment value according to various types of firing confirmation time and judgment value types (stages).

  For example, the contents of the production (for example, a firing stop instruction or a firing start instruction) can be emphasized in accordance with the level increase. In this example, two types of “1” and “10” are set as specific reach out determination values, and the counter value of the third out ball counter is the first reach out determination value during specific reach “1”. ”Is performed, the image display device 14 performs a variation display launch stop notification effect (a weak variation display launch stop notification effect) that displays a predetermined image prompting the stop of the launch, and then the counter value of the third out ball counter is When reaching the second reach out determination value “10” in the second stage, the image display device 14 displays a predetermined image for urging to stop firing, and the sound output device 15 outputs a warning sound. It is also possible to perform a notification effect (a launch stop notification effect during strong fluctuation display). In other words, the type of effect device can be increased in accordance with the increase in the level of the firing stop notification effect during variable display. Further, when the counter value of the third out ball counter reaches “1”, which is the first reach out determination value during the specific reach, a firing stop notification effect during fluctuation display is performed with a relatively low volume warning sound. After that, when the counter value of the third out ball counter reaches “10”, which is the second reach out determination value during the specific reach, the firing stop notification effect during fluctuation display is output with the output of a relatively loud warning sound. It is also possible to increase the output of one rendering device as the level increases. In addition, the output of a production | presentation apparatus can also be increased while increasing the kind of production | presentation apparatus according to the raise of a step.

  Further, the production control board 102 is based on the date and time information by the RTC 102d, for example, every day (for example, 10:00:00, 11:00:00, 12:00:00, etc.) The video and music of a predetermined song are started, and if the counter value of the first out ball is constant for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) immediately before the start of this song (the out ball is detected) If not, the video can be started without starting the music, or both the video and music can be started. In addition, if the on-time music production is set for the same model in the same manner, at the amusement store, the music will be executed all at once and the music production effect will increase. However, by limiting the execution of music when an out ball is not detected in this way, it is possible to save power at the amusement store while achieving the effect of the music.

  In addition, when the execution of music on time is restricted, the counter value of the first out ball increases by a predetermined value (for example, “5”) from the start time to the end time of the music (a predetermined number of out balls). Can be removed from the location corresponding to the point in time of the music. On the other hand, once the execution of the music is restricted, it is possible not to release the restriction on the execution of the music even if a predetermined number of out balls are detected until the end time of the music.

  In addition, when the music on time is started, if the counter value of the first out ball is constant for a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds) from the start time to the end time of the music (the out ball is detected for the predetermined time) If not, you can also limit the execution of the song from that point on. On the other hand, once the music is executed without being restricted, it is possible to prevent the music from being restricted to the end even if the out ball is not detected for a predetermined period until the end time of the music.

  In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine that uses a game ball as a game medium has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a revolving game machine that uses a medal as a game medium. It can also be applied to (so-called slot machines).

For example, when applied to a slot machine, a medal detection sensor for detecting medals used in games and a medal number detection display device (liquid crystal display, LED, etc.) are provided, and the number of medals detected by the medal detection sensor is counted. Then, when a predetermined number of medals is counted, it may be displayed (notified) on the medal number detection display device.
Further, the medal information based on the detection of the medal detection sensor may be output to the outside (game information display device, hall computer, etc.) in synchronization with the display on the medal number detection display device.

  Furthermore, the following configuration is also described in this embodiment.

  In a gaming machine that performs a notification effect to notify whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player is achieved based on the fact that the player performs a game by launching a game medium to the gaming area and a predetermined condition is established, A game medium detecting means for detecting a game medium discharged from the game area, and a determination for determining whether or not a game medium is detected by the game medium detecting means based on detection of the game medium by the game medium detecting means. Means and a specific control execution means for executing specific control when the execution condition is satisfied when at least the notification effect is not executed, and the specific control execution means is configured when the execution condition is satisfied. Even so, the specific control is restricted when it is determined by the determination means that a game medium is detected.

  Further, in a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by launching a game medium into the game area, a game medium detection means for detecting the game medium discharged from the game area, and detection of the game medium by the game medium detection means A determination means for determining whether or not a game medium is detected by the game medium detection means, a predetermined event determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined event has occurred in the game, and the predetermined event determination Specific control execution means for executing specific control when it is determined that a predetermined event has occurred by means, and the specific control execution means is a case where it is determined that the predetermined event has occurred, When the determination means determines that no game medium is detected, the specific control is restricted.

  Further, in a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by launching a game medium in the game area, a winning area where the game medium can be won, and a winning area detecting means for detecting that the game medium has won in the winning area; A game medium detection means for detecting a game medium discharged from the game area, a prize area detection information based on detection of a game medium won in a prize area by the prize area detection means, and a game medium by the game medium detection means Determination means for determining whether or not the game medium detection information based on the detection of the predetermined relationship is a predetermined relationship, and the determination means determines that the predetermined relationship is determined by the determination means An informing means for informing that the relationship has been established.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine (so-called slot machine), a Jiyen ball gaming machine, an arrangement ball gaming machine, or the like. Can be used.

Y gaming machine 6 first start opening 6a first start opening detection sensor 7 second start opening 7a second start opening detection sensor 8 first big prize opening 8a first big prize opening detection sensor 9 second big prize opening 9a second Grand prize opening detection sensor 10 First prize gate 10a First prize gate detection sensor 11 Second prize gate 11a Second prize gate detection sensor 12 General prize opening 12a General prize opening detection sensor 14 Image display device 18 Production button device 19 Selection button Device 52 Out ball detection sensor 70 Second starting port control device 80 First big winning port control device 90 Second big winning port control device 101 Main control board 101a Main CPU
101b Main ROM
101c Main RAM
102 Production control board 102a Sub CPU
102b Sub ROM
102c Sub RAM
102d RTC

The gaming machine according to the present invention detects a winning area in which the gaming medium can be won and that the gaming medium has won in the winning area in a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by firing the gaming medium in the gaming area. a prize area detecting means, a game medium detection means for detecting a game medium discharged from the game area, the predetermined number of game media by game medium detection means is detected, and, Ri by the entering-prize area detection means when the number of game media out of the specified range is detected, based on the notification condition is determined and the determined notification condition determining means is satisfied, and the notification condition by Ri the notification condition determining means is satisfied, Informing means for informing that the informing condition is satisfied .

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning area in which the game medium can be won;
A winning area detecting means for detecting that a game medium has won in the winning area;
Game medium detecting means for detecting the game medium discharged from the game area;
The prize area detection information based on the detection of the game medium won in the prize area by the prize area detection means and the game medium detection information based on the detection of the game medium by the game medium detection means have a predetermined relationship. Determining means for determining whether or not
Informing means for informing that the predetermined relationship has been established based on the determination by the determining means that the predetermined relationship has been established;
A gaming machine comprising: